Aspen HYSYS Refining V7 0 Ops PDF

Aspen HYSYS
Refining
Unit Operations Guide
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com
The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Version Number: 7.0
Copyright (c) 1981-2008 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Aspen HYSYS, Aspen HYSYS Refining, Aspen RefSYS, Aspen Flare System Analyzer, Aspen Energy
Analyzer, Aspen HYSYS Refining CatCracker, Aspen HYSYS Pipeline Hydraulics, and the aspen leaf logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Burlington, MA.
This manual is intended as a guide to using AspenTech’s software. This documentation contains
AspenTech proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without
the prior consent of AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely
responsible for the proper use of the software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the
software may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user.
ASPENTECH MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION, ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Aspen Technology, Inc.

200 Wheeler Road
Burlington, MA 01803-5501
USA
Phone: (781) 221-6400
Website http://www.aspentech.com
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Overview 1-1
1 Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining
Overview
1.1 Introduction to RefSYS Options ..................................................... 2
1.2 Common Property Views ................................................................ 5

1.2.1 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Object Palette ........................... 7
1.2.2 Worksheet Tab ......................................................................... 6
1.2.3 Notes Page/Tab ........................................................................ 7
1.2.4 User Variables Page/Tab .......................................................... 10
1-1
1-2 Introduction to Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
1.1 Introduction to Aspen

HYSYS Petroleum Refining
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining (formerly known as “RefSYS”)
is based on the flowsheet capabilities of HYSYS (use of partial
information, bi-directional of information, and so forth). Existing
HYSYS simulation cases can be leveraged in Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining adding petroleum assays information and
specific refinery unit operations.
In order to run Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining features,

you have to install both Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
and Aspen Properties, and have the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining license.
For more information on The key concept of Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining is the
the petroleum assays,
refer to Chapter 2 -
petroleum assay. A petroleum assay is a vector that stores
Petroleum Assay. physical properties and assay properties for a specific
component list. Physical properties include all properties used in
a typical HYSYS simulation case. Assay properties comprise
refinery related properties as cloud point, octane numbers, flash
point, freeze point, sulphur content, PONA distribution, GC data
and etc. A component list typically consists of library
components (for instance, methane to n-pentane) and pseudo-
components (hypothetical components).
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining is based on a flexible structure

so that no pre-defined list of pseudo-components is required.
Moreover, existing lists of pseudo-components created by the
HYSYS Oil Environment can be used in Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining. Each component stores a value of a physical and assay
property. The assay properties are usually imported from an
assay management system, as for instance, CrudeManager from
Spiral Software Ltd.
At the Simulation Environment, each stream may have its own

petroleum assay, that is, the physical and assay properties of
components on one stream may differ from other streams. Bulk
values for assay properties are calculated using specific lumping
1-2
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Overview 1-
rules. When process streams are mixed together on any HYSYS

or Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining operation, a new petroleum
assay is created and special blending rules are employed to re-
calculate the physical and assay properties. This unique
architecture allows the simulation of refinery-wide flowsheets
using one single component list - resulting in optimal speed
performance on calculations. Moreover, the propagation of
those properties allows the integration of reactor models, since
the required properties are available at the feed stream to the
reactor unit.
The various components that comprise HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS

Petroleum Refining provide an extremely powerful approach to
refinery simulation modeling. At a fundamental level, the
comprehensive selection of operations and property methods
allows you to model a wide range of processes with confidence.
Perhaps even more important is how the HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining approach to modeling maximizes your return
on simulation time through increased process understanding.
The key to this is the Event Driven operation. By using a
‘degrees of freedom’ approach, calculations in HYSYS/Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining are performed automatically. Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining performs calculations as soon as unit
operations and property packages have enough required
information.
Any results, including passing partial information when a

complete calculation cannot be performed, is propagated bi-
directionally throughout the flowsheet. What this means is that
you can start your simulation in any location using the available
information to its greatest advantage. Since results are available
immediately - as calculations are performed - you gain the
greatest understanding of each individual aspect of your
process.
The multi-flowsheet architecture of HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS

Petroleum Refining is vital to this overall modelling approach.
Although HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining has been
designed to allow the use of multiple property packages and the
creation of pre-built templates, the greatest advantage of using
multiple flowsheets is that they provide an extremely effective
way to organize large processes. By breaking flowsheets into
1-3
1-4 Introduction to Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
smaller components, you can easily isolate any aspect for

detailed analysis. Each of these sub-processes is part of the
overall simulation, automatically calculating like any other
operation.
The design of the HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining

interface is consistent, if not integral, with this approach to
modelling. Access to information is the most important aspect of
successful modelling, with accuracy and capabilities accepted as
fundamental requirements. Not only can you access whatever
information you need when you need it, but the same
information can be displayed simultaneously in a variety of
locations. Just as there is no standardized way to build a model,
there is no unique way to look at results. HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining uses a variety of methods to display process
information - individual property views, the PFD, Workbook,
Databook, graphical Performance Profiles, and Tabular
Summaries. Not only are all of these display types
simultaneously available, but through the object-oriented
design, every piece of displayed information is automatically
updated whenever conditions change.
The inherent flexibility of HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS Petroleum

Refining allows for the use of third party design options and
custom-built unit operations. These can be linked to Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining through OLE Extensibility.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining also offers an assortment of

utilities which can be attached to process streams and unit
operations. These tools interact with the process and provide
additional information.
All standard HYSYS unit operations are explained in the HYSYS

Operations Guide and Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining unit
operations are explained in this guide. The unit operations can
be used to assemble flowsheets. By connecting the proper unit
operations and streams, you can model a wide variety of
refinery processes.
Included in the available operations are those which are

governed by thermodynamics and mass/energy balances, such
as Heat Exchangers, Separators, and Compressors, and the
1-4
logical operations like the Adjust, Set, and Recycle. A number of

operations are also included specifically for dynamic modelling,
such as the Controller, Transfer Function Block, and Selector.
The Spreadsheet is a powerful tool, which provides a link to
nearly any flowsheet variable, allowing you to model “special”
effects not otherwise available in HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining.
1-5
1-6 Common Property Views
In modelling operations, HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS Petroleum

Refining uses a Degrees of Freedom approach, which increases
the flexibility with which solutions are obtained. For most
operations, you are not constrained to provide information in a
specific order, or even to provide a specific set of information.
As you provide information to the operation, HYSYS/Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining calculates any unknowns that can be
determined based on what you have entered.
For instance, consider the Pump operation. If you provide a

fully-defined inlet stream to the pump, HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining immediately passes the composition and
flow to the outlet. If you then provide a percent efficiency and
pressure rise, the outlet and energy streams is fully defined. If,
on the other hand, the flowrate of the inlet stream is undefined,
HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining cannot calculate any
outlet conditions until you provide three parameters, such as
the efficiency, pressure rise, and work. In the case of the Pump
operation, there are three degrees of freedom, thus, three
parameters are required to fully define the outlet stream.
All information concerning a unit operation can be found on the

tabs and pages of its property view. Each tab in the property
view contains pages which pertain to a certain aspect of the
operation, such as its stream connections or physical
parameters (for example, pressure drop and energy input).
1.2 Common Property

Views
Each operation in HYSYS contains some common information
and options. These information and options are grouped into
common tabs and pages. The following sections describe the
common tabs and pages in HYSYS operation property view.
1-6
1.2.1 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum

Refining Object Palette
The Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining object palette enables you
to add Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining operations to the main
PFD. The Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining operations are:
• Assay Manipulator
• Catalytic Reformer
Refer to FCC Operation • FCC Reactor
Guide for more
information on FCC
• Hydrocracker
Reactor. • Petroleum Column
• Petroleum Feeder
• Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor
• Product Blender
To access the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining object palette do

one of the following:
• In the main case (Simulation) environment, press F6.
• In the main case (Simulation) environment, select
Flowsheet | RefSYS Operations command from the
menu bar.
Refining object palette 1.2.2 Worksheet Tab

The Worksheet tab contains a summary of the information
contained in the stream property view for all the streams
attached to the air cooler. The Conditions and Composition
pages contain selected information from the corresponding
pages of the Worksheet tab for the stream property view.
The Properties page displays the property correlations of the

inlet and outlet streams of the unit operations. The following is a
list of the property correlations:
• Vapour / Phase Fraction • Vap. Frac. (molar basis)

• Temperature • Vap. Frac. (mass basis)
• Pressure • Vap. Frac. (volume basis)
• Actual Vol. Flow • Molar Volume
• Mass Enthalpy • Act. Gas Flow
1-7
• Mass Entropy • Act. Liq. Flow

• Molecular Weight • Std. Liq. Flow
• Molar Density • Std. Gas Flow
• Mass Density • Watson K
• Std. Ideal Liquid Mass Density • Kinematic Viscosity
• Liquid Mass Density • Cp/Cv
• Molar Heat Capacity • Lower Heating Value
• Mass Heat Capacity • Mass Lower Heating Value
• Thermal Conductivity • Liquid Fraction
• Viscosity • Partial Pressure of CO2
• Surface Tension • Avg. Liq. Density
• Specific Heat • Heat of Vap.
• Z Factor • Mass Heat of Vap.
The Heat of Vapourisation for a stream in HYSYS is defined

as the heat required to go from saturated liquid to saturated
vapour.
The PF Specs page contains a summary of the stream property

view Dynamics tab.
The PF Specs page is relevant to dynamics cases only.
1.2.3 Notes Page/Tab

The Notes page/tab provides a text editor where you can record
any comments or information regarding the specific unit
operation or the simulation case in general.
Figure 1.1
1-8
Adding Notes
To add a comment or information in the Notes page/tab:
1. Go to the Notes page/tab.
2. Use the options in the text editor toolbar to manipulate the
appearance of the notes.
The following table lists and describes the options available
in the text editor toolbar.
Object Icon Description

Font Type Use the drop-down list to select the text type for
the note.
Font Size Use the drop-down list to select the text size for
the note.
Font Colour Click this icon to select the text colour for the
note.
Bold Click this icon to bold the text for the note.
Italics Click this icon to italize the text for the note.
Underline Click this icon to underline the text for the note.
Align Left Click this icon to left justify the text for the note.
Centre Click this icon to center justify the text for the
note.
Align Right Click this icon to right justify the text for the note.
Bullets Click this icon to apply bullets to the text for the
note.
Insert Object Click this icon to insert an object (for example an
image) in the note.
3. Click in the large text field and type your comments.

The date and time when you last modified the information in
the text field will appear below your comments.
The information you enter in the Notes tab or page of any

operations can also be viewed from the Notes Manager
property view.
1-9
Notes Manager
The Notes Manager lets you search for and manage notes for a
case.
To access the Notes Manager do one of the following:

• Select Notes Manager command from the Flowsheet
menu.
• Press the CTRL G hot key.
Figure 1.2
Click the Plus

icon to expand
the tree
browser.
View/Add/Edit Notes
To view, add, or edit notes for an object, select the object in the
List of Objects group. Existing object notes appear in the Note
group.
• To add a note, type the text in the Note group. A time
and date stamp appears automatically.
• To format note text, use the text tools in the Note group
toolbar. You can also insert graphics and other objects.
1-10
• Click the Clear button to delete the entire note for the
selected object.
• Click the View button to open the property view for the
selected object.
Search Notes
The Notes Manager allows you to search notes in three ways:
• Select the View Objects with Notes Only checkbox (in
the List of Objects group) to filter the list to show only
objects that have notes.
• Select the Search notes containing the string
checkbox, then type a search string. Only objects with
notes containing that string appear in the object list.
You can change the search option to be case sensitive by
selecting the Search is Case Sensitive checkbox.
The case sensitive search option is only available if you
are searching by string.
• Select the Search notes modified since checkbox,
then type a date.Only objects with notes modified after
this date will appear in the object list.
1.2.4 User Variables Page/Tab

The User Variables page or tab enables you to create and
implement variables in the HYSYS simulation case.
Figure 1.3
1-11
The following table outlines options in the user variables

toolbar:
Object Icon Function

Current Variable Enables you to filter the list of variables
Filter drop-down list in the table based on the following types:
• All
• Real
• Enumeration
• Text
• Code Only
• Message
Create a New User Enables you to create a new user variable
Variable icon and access the Create a New User
Variable property view.
Edit the Selected Enables you to edit the configuration of
User Variable icon an existing user variable in the table.
You can also open the edit property view
of a user variable by double-clicking on
its name in the table.
Delete the Selected Enables you to delete the select user
User Variable icon variable in the table.
HYSYS requires confirmation before
proceeding with the deletion. If a
password has been assigned to the User
Variable, the password is requested
before proceeding with the deletion.
Sort Alphabetically Enables you to sort the user variable list
icon in ascending alphabetical order.
Sort by Execution Enables you to sort the user variable list
Order icon according to the order by which they are
executed by HYSYS.
Sorting by execution order is important if
your user variables have order
dependencies in their macro code.
Normally, you should try and avoid these
types of dependencies.
Move Selected Enables you to move the selected user
Variable Up In variable up in execution order.
Execution Order icon
Move Selected Enables you to move the selected user
Variable Down In variable down in the execution order.
Execution Order icon
Show/Hide Variable Enables you to toggle between displaying
Enabling Checkbox or hiding the Variable Enabling
icon checkboxes associated with each user
variable.
By default, the checkboxes are not
displayed.
1-12
Add a User Variable

To add a user variable:
1. Access the User Variables page or tab in the object
property view.
2. Click the Create a New User Variable icon. The Create
New User Variable property view appears.
Create a New User
Variable icon 3. In the Name field, type in the user variable name.
4. Fill in the rest of the user variable parameters as indicated
by the figure below.
Figure 1.4
Select the data

type, dimension,
and unit type
For more information on using these drop-
the user variables, refer down list.
to Chapter 5 - User
Variables from HYSYS
Customization Guide. These tabs
contain more
options for
configuring the
user variable.
Code field
Allows you to add

password
security to the
user variable.
You can define your own filters on the Filters tab of the user
variable editing property view.
1-13
1-14
Petroleum Assay 2-1
2 Petroleum Assay
2.1 Introduction................................................................................... 2
2.1.1 Centroid Point.......................................................................... 4
2.2 Petroleum Assay Manager Property View....................................... 5

2.2.1 Adding Petroleum Assays .......................................................... 7
2.2.2 Viewing Petroleum Assays ......................................................... 7
2.2.3 Copying Petroleum Assays......................................................... 8
2.2.4 Deleting Petroleum Assays......................................................... 8
2.2.5 Importing Petroleum Assays ...................................................... 9
2.2.6 Exporting Petroleum Assays..................................................... 15
2.2.7 Creating User-Defined Blending Rules ....................................... 17
2.3 The Petroleum Assay Property View ............................................ 20

2.3.1 Information Tab ..................................................................... 22
2.3.2 GC Data Tab .......................................................................... 35
2.3.3 Analysis Tab .......................................................................... 42
2.3.4 Estimation Tab ....................................................................... 43
2.3.5 Plots Tab ............................................................................... 45
2.3.6 Notes Tab.............................................................................. 45
2.4 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Unit Tags................................. 46
2-1
2-2 Introduction
2.1 Introduction
In refinery, the typical crude oil stream consist of the following
characteristic:
• A continues mixture of many naturally occurring

hydrocarbons with boiling points ranging from -160°C
(Methane) to more than 1500°C.
• Heavy fractions that are not mixtures of discretely

identifiable components. These heavy fractions are often
lumped together and identified as the plus-fraction
starting from C7+ to C12+.
A proper description of the physical properties of the plus-

fractions is essential for reliable phase behaviour calculations
and compositional modelling studies.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining contains a data base that you

can use to store and calculate the physical and petroleum
properties of the crude oil stream. This data base is called a
petroleum assay.
A petroleum assay is a vector that stores physical properties and

assay properties for a specific component list. Physical
properties include all properties used in a typical HYSYS
simulation case. Assay properties comprise refinery related
properties as cloud point, octane numbers, flash point, freeze
point, sulphur content, PONA distribution, GC data and etc.
A component list typically consists of library components (for

instance, methane to n-pentane) and pseudo-components
(hypothetical components). Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining is
based on a flexible structure so that no pre-defined list of
pseudo-components is required. Moreover, existing lists of
pseudo-components created by the HYSYS Oil Environment can
be used in Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining. Each component
stores a value of a physical and assay property.
2-2
Petroleum Assay 2-3
The assay properties are usually imported from an assay

management system, as for instance, CrudeManager Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining Link from Spiral Software Ltd. At the
Simulation Environment, each stream may have its own
petroleum assay, that is, the physical and assay properties of
components on one stream may differ from other streams. Bulk
values for assay properties are calculated using specific lumping
rules. When process streams are mixed together on any HYSYS
or Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining operation, a new petroleum
assay is created and special blending rules are employed to re-
calculate the physical and assay properties.
If you do not have the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining

license, you cannot create or import a petroleum assay using
the options in the Petroleum Assay Manager property view.
You can create a petroleum assay using the options in the

Petroleum Assay Manager property view or the Oil Manager tab.
The differences between the petroleum assays created in
Petroleum Assay Manager and Oil Manager are listed in the
following table:
Oil Manager Petroleum Assay Manager

Each petroleum assay have its own One component list is shared among
component list. multiple assays.
Property values are not calculated Contains blending rule equation for
based on blending rule, because more accurate calculation.
each assay has its own component
list.
Enables you to modify a few Enables you to modify more
petroleum properties. petroleum properties.
Simplified option to characterize a Advanced option to characterize a
petroleum assay. petroleum assay.
2-3
2-4 Introduction
2.1.1 Centroid Point

In Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining, the centroid boiling point of
the cuts, represented by hypocomponents initial boiling points
(IBPs) and final boiling points (FBPs), and their yields are
calculated by:
1. Plotting the boiling point curves of the cuts in the crude oil
stream versus their yields.
2. Each cut is identified by an initial and final boiling point
temperature.
3. The centroid point is the boiling point temperature
associated with the mid percent-yield of the corresponding
cut. The mid percent-yield is the half-way % volume point
between the % volume of the initial and final boiling point.
Refer to the figure below:
Figure 2.1
FBPn
Centroidn
Temperature
IBPn
Vol 1 Vol 2
Vol 1 = Vol 2
% Volume
The final boiling point temperature is assigned as the

hypocomponent’s boiling point temperature. The centroid
boiling point is used to estimate the physical properties of
the component.
2-4
Petroleum Assay 2-5
4. Step #2 and #3 are repeated to generate the boiling point

temperatures for all of the hypocomponents.
5. For library components, the centroid boiling temperature is
set to their normal boiling point.
2.2 Petroleum Assay

Manager Property View
license, the HYSYS simulation case will have no access to
any petroleum assay.
The Petroleum Assay Manager property view enables you to

create, manipulate, import, and export the petroleum assay.
Figure 2.2
To access the Petroleum Assay Manager property view:
1. Enter the Basis environment of the simulation case.

2. In the menu bar, select Basis | Basis Manager to open the
Simulation Basis Manager property view.
2-5
2-6 Petroleum Assay Manager Property
3. Click the Extend Simulation Basis Manager button.
To create a petroleum assay, you must specify a list of

components and configure a fluid package.
If you are importing a petroleum assay from a file, you do
not have to specify components or a fluid package.
The following table lists and describes the objects in the

Petroleum Assay Manager property view:
Object Description
Petroleum Assays Displays the petroleum assays available in the
list simulation case.
View button Opens the Petroleum Assay property view of the
selected petroleum assay.
Add button Creates a blank petroleum assay, where you can
enter your own petroleum assay properties.
Delete button Deletes the selected petroleum assay from the
simulation case.
Copy button Creates a copy of the selected petroleum assay.
Import button Imports a petroleum assay from an external file.
You can import petroleum assay from three types
of files: HYSYS (*.pet), Comma Separated Value
File (*.csv), and XML File (*.xml).
Export button Exports the selected petroleum assay to an
external file. You can export the petroleum assay
into four types of files: Spiral CrudeManager,
HYSYS, Comma Separated Value File, and XML
File.
Property Blending Displays the blending rules/equations used to
Methods table calculation the petroleum properties of the
selected petroleum assay.
You can change the equations used to calculate
the petroleum properties by selecting a different
blending rule in the drop-down list.
Petroleum radio Filters the information in the Property Blending
button Methods table to display only HYSYS default
petroleum properties.
User radio button Filters the information in the Property Blending
Methods table to display only HYSYS non-default/
user created petroleum properties.
View Macro button Enables you to access the Blending Macros
property view and create user define blending
rules.
This button is only available if a petroleum
property contains a user define blending macro.
2-6
Petroleum Assay 2-7
2.2.1 Adding Petroleum Assays

To add a petroleum assay:
1. Open the Simulation Basis Manager property view.

Click the Home View icon to open the Simulation Basis
Manager property view.
Home View icon
2. Click the Extend Simulation Basis Manager button. The
Petroleum Assay Manager property view appears.
3. Click the Add button. The Petroleum Assay property view
appears.
2.2.2 Viewing Petroleum

Assays
To view a petroleum assay:

Press CTRL B to open the Simulation Basis Manager
property view.

3. Select the petroleum assay you want to view from the list in
the Petroleum Assays group.
4. Click the View button. The Petroleum Assay property view
appears.
2-7
2.2.3 Copying Petroleum

Assays
To copy a petroleum assay:

Select Basis | Basis Manager from the menu bar to open
the Simulation Basis Manager property view.

3. Select the petroleum assay you want to copy from the list in
the Petroleum Assays group.
4. Click the Copy button.
The Petroleum Assay property view of the copied assay
appears. The copied petroleum assay has a default name of
Petroleum Assay - n, where n is an integer value.
2.2.4 Deleting Petroleum

Assays
To delete a petroleum assay:

Click the Home View icon to open the Simulation Basis
Manager property view.
Home View icon
3. Select the petroleum assay you want to delete from the list
in the Petroleum Assays group.
4. Click the Delete button. Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
removes the selected petroleum assay from the list.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining will not ask for

confirmation when deleting assays.
2-8
Petroleum Assay 2-9
2.2.5 Importing Petroleum

Assays
You may import petroleum assays in HYSYS, XML, .CSV, or PIMS
formats. You can also import an H/CAMS CAL-II assay by editing
the CAL-II output file as described in the Section - Converting
an H/CAMS assay to PIMS format, and importing the data as
a PIMS assay.
For any selected format, the procedure below imports a

component list, petroleum assay properties, and/or property
package information, so a complete fluid package is created:
1. Press CTRL B to open the Simulation Basis Manager.

2. Click Extend Simulation Basis Manager. The Petroleum
Assay Manager opens.
3. Click Import. The Assay Import property view opens.
Figure 2.3
4. Select the type of assay you want to import by clicking on

the appropriate radio button.
Refer to Appendix A.6 - • HYSYS imports a PET (HYSYS petroleum assay) file. The
PET Files for more PET file contains the component list, physical properties,
information on PET files. petroleum properties, fluid packages, reactions, and
component maps associated to the petroleum assay.
User Property names from HYSYS must be edited to use
an alias in order for the imported properties to be passed
to the proper Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
calculations. See Appendix - HYSYS User Property
Aliases for Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining for a
list of the aliases.
2-9
• Comma Separated Value File imports a CSV (Comma

Refer to Appendix A.4 -
Comma Separated
Separated Value) file. The CSV file is a simple structured
Value Files for more
data file. The file contains a table of components, and the
information on CSV files. component’s molecular weight, normal boiling point,
specific gravity, and petroleum properties.
Refer to Appendix A.5 - • XML File imports an XML file. The XML file contains the
Petroleum Assay XML name of the petroleum assay, description, created date,
Files for more last modified date, a list of components available, and
information on XML files.
the molecular weight, normal boiling point, specific
gravity, and petroleum properties of each component.
Refer to PIMS for more • PIMS Format imports a PIMS assay table file. The PIMS
information on PIMS file. file contains all the necessary assay data, much like the
CSV file. However the PIMS data variable string tag is
different than Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining data
variable string tag. So Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
needs to map its variables to PIMS variables.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining imports the following
information from the petroleum assay:
• Components. If there is no list of components or the

default component list is incomplete, Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining creates a new list of components
based on the components in the imported petroleum
assay.
• Fluid Package. If the existing fluid package does not

contain the same component list as the imported
petroleum assay or there are no fluid package, Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining automatically creates a new
fluid package with Peng-Robinson as the default property
package and attaches a new component list based on the
imported petroleum assay.
(To change the property package of the new fluid
package, open the Fluid Package property view and
select a different property package.)
• Physical Properties. Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining

imports the following three critical physical properties:
molecular weight, centroid boiling point, and specific
gravity. The rest of the physical properties are calculated
based on the three critical properties.
2-10
Petroleum Assay 2-11
• Petroleum Properties. Aspen HYSYS Petroleum

Refining imports all petroleum properties.
If the petroleum assay data file contains petroleum

properties outside Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
petroleum property list, Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
imports the data from the non-default petroleum properties
and designates the non-default petroleum properties as
UserProp-n, where n is an integer value.
If the petroleum assay data file has no values for a
petroleum property, the system leaves the petroleum
property blank.
5. Click the Continue button. A file browser opens.

6. Locate and select the assay file you want to open and click
the Open button.
If you are importing a PIMS Assay, follow the additional steps

described in Section - PIMS Assay Import Additional
Steps.
PIMS Assay Import Additional Steps

If you are importing PIMS assay, there are more steps to follow
after completing the procedure above, Importing a Petroleum
Assay:
2-11
1. After selecting the PIMS file, the Import PIMS Data property
view appears:
Figure 2.4
All the data shown initially in the table of the Import PIMS
Data property view are default values not related to the csv
file previously selected.
To map the PIMS variable data to the Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining variable data, you must browse to and
select the PIMS String Table.
2. In the Import PIMS Data property view, click Import Data

String.
Refer to Section 2.4 - 3. Select the PIMS String Table file (*.sdb extension) to map
Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining
the PIMS variable tag with an Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Unit Tags for more Refining variable tag and click Open. (The default name and
location for the data string file is: \[install
location]\paks\PIMSAssay.sdb)
The PIMS String Table file (*.sdb) consists of 3 sections:
• The Property Tag section, where the text used to for the
PIMS petroleum property variables is mapped to the text
of the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining property
description.
Below is a sample of the PIMS tag (left) and associated
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining tag (right):
- ISPG = "Standard Liquid Density"
2-12
- IFVT = "Boiling Temperature"

- VBAL = "Volume Fraction"
- IMWT = "Molecular Weight"
- IACD = "Acidity"
• The Component Tag section, where the text used to

represent PIMS components is mapped to the text of the
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining components:
Below is a sample of the PIMS tag (left) and associated
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining tag (right):
- NC1 = "Methane"
- NC2 = "Ethane"
- NC3 = "Propane"
- IC4 = "I-Butane"
- NC4 = "N-Butane"
- IC5 = "I-Pentane"
• The Unit Tag section. The Unit Tag section is optional. It

maps PIMS unit abbreviations to Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining units if the PIMS Assay was stored using unit
syntax other than that which Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining recognizes.
You can add this section by appending a line for each
“foreign” unit in the following format:
UNIT_{PIMS property tag} = "{unit name}"
for example:
UNIT_IFVT = "C"
means the PIMS property tag "IFVT" has units in C

(Celcius). Refer to Section 2.4 - Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining Unit Tags for a table of Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining unit symbols.
4. Click the Import PIMS Data button.

Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining reads in all the data from
the assay table using the mapping instructions from the
string table, and populates the list in the Import PIMS Data
property view.
2-13
Converting an H/CAMS assay to

PIMS format
There is no direct import for H/CAMS data. However, you can
use CAL/LINK or PIMS to generate a PIMS assay file, and then
import the PIMS file into Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining. If
you do not license either program, you can develop a PIMS or
.csv format file in a manual editor.
You must make some minor edits to the PIMS file output from
Cal-II, and create an .sdb mapping file for the PIMS to Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining import. Here is the workflow for
creating and converting the Cal-II output file:
In Cal-II
1. Create slate of components.

2. Identify properties of interest.
3. Generate the PIMS file from Cal-II
In a text editor:
Open the Cal-II PIMS file. Using an SPG line as an example, the
Cal-II line format looks like this:
SPGR01;Specific Gravity;0,7405
1. Remove any lines with the property value of “na”.

2. Use search and replace to change all of the commas ( , ) to
dots, and all of the semicolons (;) to commas:
SPGR01,Specific Gravity,0.7405
3. Make sure each property name begins with the correct PIMS
tag. If there is no PIMS tag, add a PIMS tag. If there is a
PIMS tag, but it is different from that recognized by Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining, then replace the PIMS tag with
an Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining PIMS tag.
Current valid PIMS tags are listed in the file
[install dir]\paks\PIMSAssay.sdb.
Usually the valid PIMS tag is the existing string with a
leading “I” added, for example:
2-14
ISPGR01;Specific Gravity;0,7405
Notable exceptions are CutTemperature with a PIMS tag of
“IFVTR”, Mass Fraction with a PIMS tag of “WBAL” and
Volume Fraction with a PIMS tag of “VBAL.”
4. Save the file with a .csv extension, and close.
Now you must prepare the .sdb file to import along with the
PIMS file.
1. Open the [install dir]\paks\PIMSAssay.sdb “string table” file.

See Section - PIMS Assay Import Additional Steps
above for a description of the sections of this file.
2. Save the file to a new name.
3. Check the following factors:
If you have a user assigned tag not present in the .sdb file,
enter it with a text description in the first section.
Make sure every Component name has a description. If
there is no description, the component will not be passed in
the import process. At minimum, the value must be ‘’ ‘’
Optionally, append unit-correcting strings to the end of the
file if the assay was stored using unit strings other than
those Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining recognizes. See
Section - PIMS Assay Import Additional Steps and
Section 2.4 - Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Unit
Tags for more information
4. Save the file with an .sdb extension and close.
You can now import the .csv file as a PIMS assay in the normal
way. See Section 2.2.5 - Importing Petroleum Assays.
2.2.6 Exporting Petroleum

Assays
To export a petroleum assay:

Select Basis | Basis Manager from the menu bar to open
the Simulation Basis Manager property view.
2-15

3. Select the petroleum assay you want to export from the list
in the Petroleum Assays group.
4. Click the Export button. The Assay Export property view
appears.
Figure 2.5
5. Select the file type for the exported assay by clicking on the
appropriate radio button.
Refer to Appendix A.7 - • Spiral Crude Manager radio button allows you to
Spiral Files for more export the assay as a Spiral file. The Spiral file contains
information on the Spiral the name of the petroleum assay, description, created
file.
date, last modified date, a list of components available,
and the molecular weight, normal boiling point, specific
gravity, and petroleum properties of each component.
Refer to Appendix A.6 - • HYSYS radio button allows you to export the assay as a
PET Files for more PET (HYSYS petroleum assay) file. The PET file contains
information on PET files. the component list, physical properties, petroleum
properties, fluid packages, reactions, and component
maps associated to the petroleum assay.
Refer to Appendix A.4 - • Comma Separated Value File radio button allows you
Comma Separated to export the assay as a CSV file. The CSV file is a simple
Value Files for more structured data file. The file contains a table of
information on CSV files.
components, and the component’s molecular weight,
normal boiling point, specific gravity, and petroleum
properties.
Refer to Appendix A.5 - • XML File radio button allows you to export the assay as
Petroleum Assay XML a *.xml file. The XML file contains the name of the
Files for more petroleum assay, description, created date, last modified
information on XML files.
date, a list of components available, and the molecular
weight, normal boiling point, specific gravity, and
petroleum properties of each component.
2-16
With the exception of the PET file, the following information

are exported to the petroleum assay files:
• Petroleum assay name
• Petroleum assay description
• Petroleum assay creation and last modified dates
• Component list
• Component molecular weight
• Component normal boiling point
• Component specific gravity
• Component petroleum properties.

The petroleum assay physical properties are not exported.
6. Click the Continue button. The File Selection for Exporting

Petroleum Assay property view appears.
7. Select a location for the assay file using the Save in drop-
down list, and type the name of the exported assay file in
the File name field.
8. Click the Save button.
2.2.7 Creating User-Defined

Blending Rules
For more information, Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining lets you create your own
refer to Section 11.14 -
Macro Language Editor calculation blending method for the petroleum properties. The
in the HYSYS User new blending rule method is created in the Macro Language
Guide. Editor property view.
To create a new blending rule method for a petroleum property:
1. Enter the Simulation Basis Environment.

2-17

4. In the Property Blending Methods group, select the
Petroleum radio button.
5. In the Petroleum Property table, scroll up and down until you
find the petroleum property you want to manipulate.
Figure 2.6
6. Under the Blending Rule column, select the cell beside the
petroleum property.
7. Click the down arrow to access the drop-down list, and
select User Macro.
Figure 2.7
8. Click the View Macro button that appears.
Figure 2.8
The Blending Macros property view appears.
2-18
9. Double click the selected property to custom define a

blending rule.
Figure 2.9
Double click to custom define the

blending rule
Click to delete the user defined rule.
The Edit Existing Code of property view appears.

For more information on 10. In the Editing Existing Code of property view, click the
the options in Editing
Existing Code of property Show/Hide Variable Details icon to access more
view, refer to Section options in the view.
5.4 - User Variable
Property View in the
HYSYS Figure 2.10
Customerization Guide.
Use the options in the Editing Existing Code of property view

to configure the new petroleum property blending rule.
2-19
2-20 The Petroleum Assay Property View
11. Click the OK button to accept the new petroleum assay

blending rule.
2.3 The Petroleum Assay

Property View
The Petroleum Assay property view allows you to specify and
manipulate the properties of the petroleum assay.
Figure 2.11
The property view contains six tabs and a status bar:
• The Information tab contains all the options necessary

to create a petroleum assay.
• The GC Data tab allows you to manipulate the GC data

of the petroleum assay.
• The Analysis tab enables you to view the types of

calculation errors that occur in the petroleum assay.
• The Estimation tab enables you to import certain

petroleum assay property values based on assumptions
and equations.
• The Plots tab displays the petroleum properties of the

petroleum assay in graph format.
2-20
• The Notes tab allows you to specify information

regarding the simulation case.
• The status bar indicates the status of the petroleum

assay.
2-21
2.3.1 Information Tab

The Information tab allows you to specify the name, associated
fluid package, description, properties, and composition of the
petroleum assay.
Figure 2.12
The following table lists and describes the objects available in

the Information tab:
Object Description
Name field Allows you to specify the name of the petroleum
assay. The name you supply also appears in the
title bar of the Petroleum Assay property view.
Associated Fluid Pkg Allows you to select the fluid package associated
drop-down list with the petroleum assay.
Created field Displays the date and time when the petroleum
assay was created.
Modified field Displays the date and time when the petroleum
assay was last modified.
Description field Allows you to supply information about the
petroleum assay.
Edit Properties Allows you to access the Editing Properties
button property view, where you can manipulate the
petroleum property values.
Edit Composition Allows you to access the Petroleum Assay
button Composition property view, where you can enter
the composition of the petroleum assay.
Edit Bulk Properties Enables you to access the Edit Bulk Properties
button Property View.
2-22
Object Description
For more information on Reactor Type column Displays the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
FCC, refer to FCC reactor: FCC.
Operation Guide. The FCC reactor handles petroleum assay
differently than the standard HYSYS reactors.
Is Ready? column Displays whether the petroleum assay has been
configured to handle the associate reactors.
• Yes means the petroleum assay can be use
for material streams flowing through the
reactor.
• No means the petroleum assay cannot be
use for material streams flowing through the
reactor.
Make Ready? column Allows you to configure/prepare the petroleum
assay to handle the associate reactor, before
entering the simulation environment.
Select the appropriate checkbox to prepare the
petroleum assay.
To obtain the Crude Manager Allows you to access the CrudeManager Link and
CrudeManager Aspen button edit the petroleum assay using the assay
HYSYS Petroleum management system from Spiral Software Ltd.
Refining Link, contact In CrudeManager Link there are two different
your local AspenTech methods to characterizing a petroleum assay:
• Lite. The method uses simple and smooth
cuts to calculate the petroleum properties
based on the user provided experimental
data.
• Advanced. This method uses statistical and
prediction calculation models to calculate the
petroleum properties based on the user
provided experimental data.
CrudeManager Link carries an HPI standard data
base.
Refer to Importing Hysys Oil Enables you to easily import old HYSYS assays and
HYSYS Assays and Environment button PIMS assay table into an Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Importing a PIMS Refining petroleum assay.
Assay Table sections for
more information.
2-23
Edit Bulk Properties Property View

The Edit Bulk Properties property view enables you to specify
properties that apply to the entire petroleum assay, not
properties that just applies to individual components.
Figure 2.13
The current bulk properties available for specification are:
• Initial boiling point temperature
• Final boiling point temperature
Editing Properties Property View

The Editing Properties for Petroleum Assay property view, allows
you to modify the property values of the petroleum assay.
Figure 2.14
2-24
The Editing Properties property view is split into two panes.
• The pane on the left allows you to filter and select which
properties you want to manipulate.
• The pane on the right provides options for you to enter

the new property values.
2-25
The Sort By group in the left pane, allows you to filter the list of
properties, in the tree browser below the group, based on the
selected radio button:
Click the Plus ( ) and Minus ( ) icons to expand and

collapse the branches in the tree browser.
• Property Name. Displays

all the properties
available (in Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining) in
alphabetical order.
• Group. Sorts and

categorizes the properties
based on their
characteristic (for
example,
Thermodynamic, Property
Package, Physical, User
specified, Petroleum, and
so forth).
• Type. Sorts the properties

based on the value type
they provide (for
example, single point
value or multiple curve/
plot values).
• Modify Status. Splits the

properties between those
that have been already
modified by you, and
those that still have their
default values.
2-26
Petroleum Assay Composition

Property View
The Petroleum Assay Composition property view, allows you to
modify the mole fraction of the components in the petroleum
assay.
Figure 2.15

Petroleum Assay Composition property view:
Object Description
Component table Allows you to specify the mole fraction of the
components in the petroleum assay.
Normalize button Allows you to normalize the total composition
value to 1.
Cancel button Exits the Petroleum Assay Composition property
view without saving any of the changes.
Accept button Exits the Petroleum Assay Composition property
view and save the changes.
2-27
Importing HYSYS Assays

An Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining petroleum assay contains
an option that enables you to re-use assay information from old
HYSYS cases and place them into an Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining petroleum assay.
There are two ways of importing the assay information:
• You can import the assay into a petroleum assay while

keeping the original component list from the old HYSYS
case.
• You can import the assay information from the old

HYSYS case and apply the information to a new
component list.
You cannot re-use/import the blending information from an

old HYSYS assay into an Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
petroleum assay. The blend/cut information is always
recalculated during the import process (using the predefined
component list).
The imported HYSYS assay information does not contain any

petroleum property information. So after you have imported the
HYSYS assay into a petroleum assay, you can supply the
petroleum property data using the Crude Manager or Edit
Properties option in the Information Tab of the Petroleum
Assay property view.
Keeping the Original Component List

To import the HYSYS assay information into an Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining petroleum assay, while keeping the existing
component list from the old case:
1. Open a HYSYS case with existing HYSYS assay.

2-28
3. Open the Simulation Basis Manager property view, by

selecting Basis | Basis Manager command in the menu
bar.
Figure 2.16

5. In the Petroleum Assay Manager property view, click the
Add button.
6. In the Petroleum Assay property view, select the fluid
package (associated to the HYSYS Oil Characterization
assay) in the Associated Fluid Pkg drop-down list.
Figure 2.17
2-29
7. Click the HYSYS Oil Environment button.
Figure 2.18
8. In the Available Assays property view, open the Select

Assay drop-down list and select the assay you want to
import to Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining.
9. Click the OK button.
Using a New Component List

To import the HYSYS assays information into an Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining petroleum assay with a new component list:
1. Open a HYSYS case with existing HYSYS assay.

3. Open the Simulation Basis Manager property view, by
selecting Basis | Basis Manager command in the menu
bar.
4. Do one of the following:
• Import a component list and create a new fluid package

to be associated to the imported component list.
• Create a new component list from scratch and create a

new fluid package to be associated to the new
component list.
• Import a fluid package containing the new component

list.
5. In the Simulation Basis Manager property view, click the Oil
Manager tab.
2-30
6. Open the drop-down list in the Associated Fluid Package

field and select the copied fluid package.
Figure 2.19

8. In the Petroleum Assay Manager property view, click the
Add button.
9. In the Petroleum Assay property view, select the copied fluid
package in the Associated Fluid Pkg drop-down list.
Figure 2.20
2-31

11. In the Available Assays property view, open the Select
Assay drop-down list and select the assay you want to
import into Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining.
Figure 2.21
12. Click the OK button.
Importing a PIMS Assay Table

There are two methods of importing PIMS assay table:
• Importing the entire information (assay properties and

component list) from the PIMS assay table.
Refer to Section 2.2.5 - Importing Petroleum Assays
for more information.
• Importing only the assay properties information from the

PIMS assay table (See below).
Import Only PIMS Assay Properties

To import only the assay properties from the PIMS assay table:
1. Open an existing simulation case or start a new case.

If you are starting a new case, enter the component list and
select a property package for the fluid package.

3. On the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Petroleum Assay
Manager property view, click Add button.
2-32
4. In the new Petroleum Assay property view, select the fluid

package in the Associated Fluid Pkg drop-down list.
Figure 2.22
Figure 2.23
2-33
6. In the Petroleum Assay property view, click Import PIMS

Assay to Oil Environment button.
Figure 2.24
7. In the file browser, locate and select the PIMS assay table
file (.csv format, by default under the [install dir]\paks
directory.) Click Open.
The Import PIMS Data property view appears:
Figure 2.25
All the data shown initially will be default values and not
related to the csv file previously selected.
2-34
8. In the Import PIMS Data property view, click the Import

Data String button to access the File Selection for
Importing a PIMS String Table property view.
Refer to Section 2.4 - 9. In the File Selection for Importing a PIMS String Table
Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining
property view, select the PIMS String Table file (*.sdb
Unit Tags for more extension) to map the PIMS variable tag with an Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining variable tag and click Open.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining will read in all the data
from the assay table using the mapping instructions from
the string table and populate the list in the Import PIMS
Data property view.
10. Click the Import PIMS Data button.
2.3.2 GC Data Tab

The GC (gas chromatography) Data tab allows you to
manipulate the GC data values of the petroleum assay.
Figure 2.26
There are two types of GC data:
• Wide cut GC data is the value based on a lump/group

of components within the cut. You can only specify wide
cut GC data values in the GC Data Tab.
2-35
• Narrow cut GC data is the value based on individual

components within the cut. HYSYS calculates the narrow
cut GC data. You cannot specify values for narrow cut
data.
The following table lists and describes the objects in the GC

Data tab:
Object Description
GC Data Contains the PONA tree that list the wide cut GC data
Characterization available (in Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining) for
group manipulation.
To select a GC data for manipulation:
1. In the GC Data Characterization group, expand the
PONA tree browser by clicking the Plus icon .
2. Expand the branches until you find the GC data you
want to manipulate.
3. Select the checkbox beside the GC data you want to
manipulate .
<< Remove All Enables you to remove all the GC data parameters in
button the GC Data table.
GC Data Allows you to enter the new values for the selected
Characterization wide cut data at the specified cut point.
table • The specified cut point is the wide cut data’s true
boiling point (TBP) or final boiling point
temperature.
• The first row only contains the ICP (Initial Cut
Point) data, you must leave the rest of the cells in
the first row <empty> or have a value of 0.
• The percentage values are based on the entire
crude and not on the cut.
When defining GC component data, if you supply
values at a component group level, you cannot define
any information in the sub level of the group, and vice
versa.
Even Distribution Distributes the specified values evenly for the narrow
radio button cuts within the wide cut GC data.
In this option, the calculation is faster and the mass
balance is fulfilled. However, the generated values are
less realistic.
Normal Distributes the specified values in a normal distribution
Distribution format for the narrow cuts within the wide cut GC data.
radio button In this option, the generated values are more realistic.
However, the calculation is slower and the mass
balance is not fulfilled automatically. You need to
manually achieve the mass balance by adjusting the
settings in the Edit Property Distribution
Parameters Property View.
Characterize Applies the new GC data values to the petroleum
button assay.
2-36
Object Description
GC Data radio Allows you to view and enter individual GC data values
button in the GC Data Characterization table.
Mat Balance Allows you to view the sums up all the specified by-wt
radio button and by-vol GC data values (Wt Pct Entered and Vol Pct
Entered) in the GC Data Characterization table. The
sum values indicate the amount available for the Crude
by Wt and by Vol (Total Crude Wt Pct and Total Crude
Vol Pct).
For example, if you over specified by entering more
than is available, you can click the Normalize button
to change the specified amount to the available
amount and have all the GC data changed accordingly.
Advance Settings Opens the Edit Property Distribution Parameters
button Property View.
View Results Opens the Characterized GC Data Results Property
button View, which displays the calculated GC data values
based on the modification.
The sum of the percentage values in each wide cut GC data

column cannot surpass 100.
An error message appears if your GC components are not in
MW order, but this error does not stop the calculation.
PONA Tree Diagram

When defining GC component data, there are several different
levels which you can supply the values. There is the group
component level, where you supply a general value applicable to
a group of components, for example Aromatics for C8. There
is the sub group component level, where you supply a specific
value for each component in the group component, for example
Aromatics for C8 m-Xylene.
The general number of component groups and sub groups are

shown in the PONA tree diagram (see Figure 2.27).
If you supply values at a component group level, you cannot

define any information in the sub group level, and vice versa.
For example, if you define N C6, you cannot define N C6 cyc-
C5 or N C6 cyc-C6. If you define a component data at sub level
you cannot define N C6.
2-37
Abbreviations of the Wide Cut GC Data

The following table lists the abbreviations and full name of the
wide cut GC data in the GC Data tab:
Abbreviations Full Name Abbreviations Full Name

A Aromatics On Normal Olefins
N Naphthenes ON Naphthenic Olefins
O Olefins Pi Iso Paraffins
P Paraffins Pn Normal Paraffins
Oi Iso Olefins
2-38
Figure 2.27
2-39
Edit Property Distribution

Parameters Property View
The Edit Property Distribution Parameters property view allows
you to manipulate the maximum boiling point temperature and
standard deviation of the selected GC data property.
Figure 2.28
The Reset to Defaults

button allows you to
restore the values in the
table back to the default
setting.
Properties such as A C6 Benzene, which represents pure

components, will have a very small standard deviation of the
order of 0.5 or lower.
Properties such as Pi C8, which has a wider boiling point
distribution will have a higher standard deviation.
2-40
Characterized GC Data Results

Property View
This property view displays the calculated narrow cut GC data
values based on the modifications made on the GC Data tab.
Figure 2.29
From Figure 2.26,

the Even
Distribution radio
button was selected.
So when the
modified GC data
was characterized,
the specified value is
evenly distributed
for the narrow cut
GC data.
The Viewing Options group contains the following options that

manipulates the information displayed in the table:
• By Weight radio button displays the GC data

information associated to the component's weight.
• By Volume radio button displays the GC data

information associated to the component's volume.
• User Selected Props radio button displays just the GC

data that you have manipulated.
• All Props radio button displays all the GC data.
2-41
2.3.3 Analysis Tab

The Analysis tab displays the errors encountered when
constructing the petroleum assay.
Figure 2.30
Object Description
Warning Level Displays the error level that indicates the
column seriousness of the associate errors:
• Low indicates the error will only affect the
associate property under the Warning
Source column.
• High indicates the error will affect the
Source column and reactors that require the
property value to perform calculation.
• Critical indicates the error will affect the
Source column and reactors that require the
property value to perform calculation.
Warning Source Displays which petroleum assay property or
column parameter is affected or caused the error.
Warning column Displays the cause of the error and what
operations will be affected by the error.
Resolve PONA button Enables you to normalize the GC data values, so
that the sum of the GC data values equal 100%.
Analyze button Enables you to activate the analysis option in the
Analysis tab and view any errors in the active
petroleum assay.
2-42
2.3.4 Estimation Tab

The Estimation tab allows you to import some petroleum assay
property values based on assumptions and equations. The
options in this tab is particularly useful if you do not have the
raw data and want to generate some estimate values.
Figure 2.31
A pre-selected estimation method is used for each property,

although various known estimation methods might exist.
• The Assay Properties Estimation list displays the list of

properties for which estimation is currently implemented.
• The Estimation Methods button enables you to access

the Estimation Methods property view.
Figure 2.32
2-43
In the Estimation Methods property view, you can select

different estimation method (using the appropriate drop-
down list) for the properties in the Assay Properties
Estimation list.
• The first column in the Assay Properties Estimation table

displays the list of components in the petroleum assay.
• The Values column displays the current component

values of the selected petroleum property. These values
are specified by you in the Information tab or imported
from the petroleum assay properties files (*.csv, *.pet,
*.xml, and Spiral).
• The Estimated column displays the component values of

the selected petroleum property if they were to be
estimated.
The Aniline Point, MON (Clear), Refractive Index, and Sulfur
Content are estimated using methods from the following
documents:
1"Use
of the Refractive Index in the Estimation of Thermophysical
Properties of Hydrocarbons and Petroleum Mixtures", Mohammad
R. Riazi and Yousef A. Roomi, Chemical Engineering Department,
Kuwait University, Ind. Eng. Chem. Res. 2001, Vol. 40, No.8.
2“Estimation
of Sulfur Content of Petroleum Products and Crude Oils”,
Mohammad R. Riazi, Nasrin Nasimi, and Yousef A. Roomi,
Chemical Engineering Department, Kuwait University, Ind. Eng.
Chem. Res. 1999, Vol 38, No.11.
• The Accept button allows you to discard the current

component values and replace them with the estimated
values.
If the estimated value is <empty>, HYSYS was unable to

calculate an estimate value. If you tried to accept the
estimated value one of two events occur:
• If the current value is also <empty>, HYSYS leaves

the selected petroleum property value as unknown.
• If the current value is not <empty>, HYSYS leaves

the selected petroleum property value as the current
value.
2-44
2.3.5 Plots Tab

The Plots tab displays the petroleum property values in graph
format.
Figure 2.33
2.3.6 Notes Tab

The Notes tab provides a text editor where you can record any
comments or information regarding the specific unit operation
or the simulation case in general.
2-45
2-46 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
2.4 Aspen HYSYS

Petroleum Refining
Unit Tags
Tags are case sensitive. You must use the correct name for
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining to recognize the unit tags
in the PIMS assay file.
In a PIMS assay file, there are commands to designate units to

the variable values. In the command, you must use the correct
unit tag name recognized by Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining.
The following table is the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining unit

tag along with the description of what units the tag represent:
Tag Name = Unit Tag Name = Unit Tag Name = Unit

kPa = kilo pascals psia = pounds per bar = bar
MPa = mega pascals square inch absolute mbar = millibar
psi = pound per square N/m2 = newton per lbf/ft2 = pounds-force
inch square meter per square foot
kg/cm2 = kilogram per torr = millimeter of atm = technical
square centimeter mercury atmosphere
mmHg = millimeter of at = physical
mercury atmosphere
cmH2O(4C) = inHg(32F) = inch of MJ/h = mega joule per
centimeter of water at mercury at 32 degrees hour
4 degrees Celsius Fahrenheit kJ/min = kilo joule per
inH2O(60F) = inch of inHg(60F) = inch of minute
water at 60 degrees mercury at 60 degrees kJ/s = kilo joule per
Fahrenheit Fahrenheit second
kW = kilo watt kcal/h = kilo calories Btu/h = british thermal
MW = mega watt per hour unit per hour
cal/h = calories per MMBtu/hr = millions of
hour british thermal unit per
hour
hp = horse power Mkcal/h = mega kilo kgmole/m3 = kilogram
calories per hour mole per cubic meter
C = Celsius gmole/L = gram mole lbmole/ft3 = pound
per litre mole per cubic foot
K = Kelvin g/cm3 = gram per lb/ft3 = pound per
cubic centimeter cubic foot
2-46
Tag Name = Unit Tag Name = Unit Tag Name = Unit

F = Fahrenheit API = american SG_60/60api =
petroleum institute standard gravity
R = Rankine cP = centipoise dyne/cm = dyne per
mP = millipoise centimeter
microP = micropoise dyn/cm = dyne per
centimeter
cSt = centistokes Pa-s = pascal second lbf/ft = pound force per
foot
kgmole/min = kilogram lbmole/hr = pound MMSCFH = million
mole per minute mole per hour standard cubic feet per
gmole/h = gram mole lbmole/h = pound mole minute
per hour per hour MMSCFD = million
standard cubic feet per
day
g/s = gram per second tonne/d = metric tonne lb/hr = pound per hour
kg/d = kilogram per per day klb/day = kilo pound
day tonne/h = metric tonne per day
per hour
tn(short)/h = short ton m3/h = cubic meter per L/d = litre per day
per hour hour
barrel/day = barrel per kbpd = thousand USGPM = US gallons
day barrels per day per minute
ft3/day = cubic fee per in = inch miles = mile
day
m = meter ft = feet km/h = kilometer per
hour
ft/s = feet per second MPH = miles per hour seconds = second
weeks = week months = month years = year
days = day hours = hour minutes = minute
2-47
2-48 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
2-48
Assay Manipulator 3-1
3 Assay Manipulator
3.1 Introduction................................................................................... 2
3.2 Assay Manipulator Property View .................................................. 3

3.2.1 Design Tab .............................................................................. 4
3.2.2 Assay Tab................................................................................ 6
3.2.3 Worksheet Tab ....................................................................... 10
3-1
3-2 Introduction
3.1 Introduction
The Assay Manipulator allows you to change the petroleum
assay properties of a material stream, without the need to
supply any theoretical equations or calculations to obtain the
property values.
The common reasons to change the petroleum assay property

values are:
• HYSYS does not have an operation that simulates a piece
of equipment, in the actual plant, which changes the
petroleum assay properties.
• There are no petroleum assay data that mimic the actual
petroleum assay curves.
• The output petroleum properties of a HYSYS operation
does not imitate the output petroleum properties from an
actual plant operation.
• There is a need to conduct a sensitivity analysis on the
simulation plant to see if a slight change in petroleum
properties will affect the quality of the products.
Assay Manipulator supplies two ways to modify the petroleum

assay properties:
• Change properties. In this option, you can modify values
of an individual petroleum property (for example, sulfur
content of a hypothetical component).
• Shift properties. In this option, you can specify a target
bulk value of a petroleum property in the stream (for
example, the RON of a stream), and the assay
manipulator automatically adjusts the values of all the
individual petroleum properties to meet the new bulk
value.
3-2
3.2 Assay Manipulator

Property View
There are two methods to add an Assay Manipulator to your
simulation:
1. From the Flowsheet menu, select Add Operation [or press
F12]. The UnitOps property view appears.
2. Click the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Ops radio
button.
3. From the list of available unit operations, select
Manipulator.
4. Click the Add button.
OR
1. Press F6 to access the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
object palette.
2. Double-click the Assay Manipulator icon.
The Assay Manipulator property view appears.

Assay Manipulator icon
Figure 3.1
3-3
3-4 Assay Manipulator Property View
There are three common objects at the bottom of the

Manipulator property view, the following table describes these
objects:
Object Description
Delete button Allows you to delete the operation.
Status bar Displays the current status of the operation (for
example, missing information or errors
encountered during calculation).
Ignored checkbox Allows you to ignore the operation during
calculations.
When the checkbox is selected, HYSYS completely
disregards the operation (and cannot calculate the
outlet stream) until you clear the checkbox.
3.2.1 Design Tab

The Design tab contains four pages:
• Connections
• Parameters
• User Variables
• Notes
Connections Page
On the Connections page, you can specify the feed and product
streams attached to the Assay Manipulator. You can change the
name of the operation in the Name field.
Figure 3.2
3-4
Parameters Page
On the Parameters page, the following information appears:
Object Description
Transfer Temperature When selected, the temperatures of the feed
checkbox stream and the product stream are equal.
Transfer Pressure When selected, the pressures of the feed
Transfer Flow Rate When selected, the flow rates of the feed
Figure 3.3
User Variables Page

For more information on The User Variables page allows you to create and implement
implementing the User
Variables, refer to variables in the HYSYS simulation case.
Section 1.2.4 - User
Variables Page/Tab.
Notes Page
For more information The Notes page provides a text editor where you can record any
refer to Section 1.2.3 -
Notes Page/Tab.
comments or information regarding the specific unit operation or
the simulation case in general.
3-5
3.2.2 Assay Tab

The Assay tab allows you to specify the changes in petroleum
properties. The options available in this tab are grouped into the
following pages:
• Options
• Change Props
• Shift Props
• Composition
Options Page
In the Options page, you can select the petroleum property you
want to modify and select the type of modification method using
the drop-down lists in the table.
Figure 3.4
The table in the Properties/Options group contains the following:
Column Description
Property You can select the petroleum property you want to
manipulate using the drop-down list in the cells under this
column.
Options You can select the method of modification using the drop-
down list in the cells under this column. There are two
methods to choose from: Change Props and Shift Props.
3-6
You can only apply one type of modification method for each
petroleum property.
Change Props Page

The Change Props page allows you to specify the exact value
changes to the selected petroleum property.
Figure 3.5
The following table lists and describes the objects available on

this page:
Object Description
Drop-down list You can activate the selected the petroleum property
for modification.
Table Allows you to type the modified values for the selected
petroleum property in the drop-down list.
The table also displays the selected petroleum property
values from the feed stream.
Plot Displays both the original and manipulated petroleum
property values.
The drop-down list will be blank if you had not selected

Change Props method for any of the petroleum properties in
the Options page.
3-7
Shift Props Page

The Shift Props page allows you to specify shift value of the
selected petroleum property.
Figure 3.6
The following table lists and describes the objects available on

this page:
Object Description
Drop-down list You can activate the selected the petroleum property
for modification.
Reference Assay You can choose the base/reference point(s) for the
table selected petroleum property to be shifted by doing one
of the following:
• Select the Use Feed checkbox to use the feed
stream’s property values as the base point(s).
• Use the drop-down list in the Use Assay cell to
select the assay you want to use as the base
point(s).
You cannot select a different assay as the base point(s)
if you have selected the Use Feed checkbox.
Targets table You can type in the amount of shift for the selected
petroleum property by doing one of the following:
• Type the amount of shift for the product stream in
the Product cell.
• Type the difference amount between the product
stream and the feed stream in the Prod - Feed
cell.
Calculated Displays the calculated values based on the
Values table information entered in the Reference and Targets
tables.
Plot Displays both the original and manipulated petroleum
property values.
3-8
The drop-down list will be blank if you had not selected Shift
Props method for any of the petroleum properties in the
Options page.
Composition Page
The Composition page enables you to manipulate the product
composition. Using this feature, you can change the distillation
curve (TBP, D86, D1160, and D2887) of a process stream in
your flowsheet.
Figure 3.7
To activate and access the options in the Composition page,

select the Manipulate Product Composition checkbox.
The following tables lists and describes the options available in

the Composition page:
Object Description
Manipulate Product Enables you to toggle between activating or
Composition ignoring the modified variable for the product
checkbox stream composition.
Plus Fraction radio Enables you to toggle between accessing or hiding
button the options to manipulate the temperature vs.
percent yield data.
Light Ends radio Enables you to toggle between accessing or hiding
button the options to manipulate the mass or volume
fraction of the light ends composition.
3-9
Object Description
Mass/Volume drop- Enables you to select mass or volume for the
down list percent yield or composition fraction.
Right drop-down list Enables you to select between four different
temperature data that affects the percent yield.
The four options are: TBP, ASTM D86, D2887, and
D1160.
This drop-down list is only available for the Plus
Fraction option.
Yield column Enables you to specify the mass or volume percent
yield associated to the specified temperature.
This column is only available for the Plus Fraction
option.
Right column Enables you to specify the temperature of the
selected option from the Left drop-down list.
This column is only available for the Plus Fraction
option.
Fraction column Enables you to specify the mass or volume fraction
of the light ends composition.
This column is only available for the Light Ends
option.
Plot Displays the composition vs. NBP data of both feed
and product streams.
3.2.3 Worksheet Tab

Refer to Section 1.2.2 - The Worksheet tab contains a summary of the information
Worksheet Tab for more
information.
attached to the Assay Manipulator.
3-10
Catalytic Reformer 4-1
4 Catalytic Reformer
4.1 Introduction................................................................................... 3
4.1.1 Theory.................................................................................... 6
4.2 Overall Operation Structure/Environment ................................... 16

4.2.1 Main Environment .................................................................. 17
4.2.2 Catalytic Reformer Environment ............................................... 21
4.2.3 Calibration Environment .......................................................... 23
4.3 Reformer Configuration Wizard.................................................... 24

4.3.1 Configuration Page ................................................................. 26
4.3.2 Geometry Page ...................................................................... 27
4.3.3 Calibration Factors Page .......................................................... 28
4.4 Catalytic Reformer Property View ................................................ 29

4.4.1 Design Tab ............................................................................ 30
4.4.2 Reactor Section Tab ................................................................ 33
4.4.3 Stabilizer Tower Tab................................................................ 44
4.4.4 Results Tab............................................................................ 47
4.5 Feed Type Library Property View ................................................. 56
4.6 Reactor Section Property View..................................................... 58

4.6.1 Design Tab ............................................................................ 59
4.6.2 Feed Data Tab........................................................................ 61
4.6.3 Operation Tab ........................................................................ 64
4.6.4 Results Tab............................................................................ 73
4.7 Feed Type Property View ............................................................. 80
4.8 Calibration Set Library Property View .......................................... 81

4.8.1 Factor Set Property View ......................................................... 82
4-1
4-2 Catalytic Reformer
4.9 Calibration Property View .............................................................86

4.9.1 Design Tab .............................................................................91
4.9.2 Feed Data Tab ........................................................................94
4.9.3 Operation Tab.........................................................................95
4.9.4 Measurement Tab..................................................................103
4.9.5 Calibration Control Tab...........................................................107
4.9.6 Analysis Tab .........................................................................109
4-2
4.1 Introduction
The Reformer model in Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining is a
state-of-the-art Catalytic Naphtha Reformer Unit simulation
system that can be used for modeling a CCR or Semi-
regenerative reformer unit as a standalone unit operation or as
part of a refinery-wide flowsheet.
The Catalytic Reformer operation includes feed characterization

system, reactor section, stabilizer and product mapper. The
reactor section includes reactors, heaters, compressor,
separator, and recontactor. The reactor model is based on
rigorous kinetics. The feed characterization system and product
mapper are designed to work together with the Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining assay system so the Reformer model can be
simulated in a refinery-wide flowsheet.
Figure 4.1
4-3
4-4 Introduction
Feed Characterization System

The Reformer within Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining has its
own set of library and hypothetical components. The table below
list the components for the Catalytic Reformer environment:
Hydrogen Cyclopentane 24-Mpentane O8* 6N9* N12*

Methane 22-Mbutane 2-Mhexane n-Octane IP10* A12*
Ethane 23-Mbutane 3-Mhexane 5N8* n-Decane P13*
Ethylene 2-Mpentane 3-Epentane E-Benzene 5N10* N13*
Propane 3-Mpentane n-Heptane o-Xylene A10* A13*
Propene n-Hexane O7* m-Xylene 6N10* P14*
i-Butane O6* 11Mcycpentan p-Xylene IP11* N14*
n-Butane Mcyclopentan Ecyclopentan 6N8* n-C11 A14*
1-Butene Benzene Toluene IP9* 5N11*
i-Pentane Cyclohexane Mcyclohexane n-Nonane A11*
n-Pentane 22-Mpentane MBP8* 5N9* 6N11*
O5* 23-Mpentane SBP8* A9* P12*
The hypothetical component names can be interpreted by

identifying the prefix with the component type and the suffix
with the carbon number. The prefix component types are:
• O: Olefin
• MBP: Multi-branch paraffin
• SBP: Single-branch paraffin
• 6N: 6-Carbon Ring Naphthenic
• IP: Isoparaffin (no distinction on number of branches)
• A: Aromatic
• P: Paraffinic (no distinction on isomer type)
• N: Naphthenic (no distinction on number of carbons in
ring)
These components are either used directly in the kinetic reactor

model or they are easily mapped into the components used
within the kinetic reactor model.
The transition between the Main Environment and the

Catalytic Reformer Environment will handle the calculation
of the composition of the Reformer components. In order to do
this, however, you must specify the feed type. The feed type will
specify the ratios of various isomers within the feed to the
4-4
Reformer. These ratios, along with the distillation and PONA data
from the attached inlet stream will be used to calculate the
Reformer component compositions.
Feed Component Ratios

• nP5 /Total C5 Ratio • N7 N5/[N5+N6 Ring] Ratio
• Normal P6 / Total P6 Ratio • Normal P8 / Total P8 Ratio
• MB P6 / Total P6 Ratio • MB P8 / Total P8 Ratio
• MCP / [MCP+CH] Ratio • N8 N5/[N5+N6 Ring] Ratio
• Normal P7 / Total P7 Ratio • iP9 / Total P9 Ratio
• MB P7 / Total P7 Ratio • N9 N5/[N5+N6 Ring] Ratio
• iP5 /Total C5 Ratio • iP10 / Total P10 Ratio
• N10 N5/[N5+N6 Ring] Ratio • N11 N5/[N5+N6 Ring] Ratio
• iP11 / Total P11 Ratio
In the Catalytic Reformer Environment, you have more

options for calculating the composition of the feed. The you can
calculate the composition based on a boiling range of an assay,
based on the specified bulk properties, or based on the specified
the kinetic lumps.
• For the assay option, you select an assay to associate
with the feed. The feed type is specified along with the
initial and final boiling point to generate a composition of
the feed.
• For the bulk properties option, you specify the feed type
along with distillation data and total naphthenics and
aromatics in the feed.
• For the kinetic lumps option, you specify the feed type
along with the composition of the components that is
desired. You may optionally input a value for N+2A or
N+3A to adjust the composition. If no value is entered
for either N+2A or N+3A, the composition entered will be
used directly.
4-5
4-6 Introduction
4.1.1 Theory
Reaction Kinetics - Components
The components used for the reaction pathways in the Reformer
model are either present in the Reformer component list, or can
be easily calculated by summing the appropriate components.
Below is a list of the components used in the reaction network:
• H2 • NP6 • O8 • IP11
• P1 • 5N6 • 5N8 • NP11
• P2 • A6 • A8 • 5N11
• O2 • 6N6 • 6N8 • A11
• P3 • MBP7 • IP9 • 6N11
• O3 • SBP7 • NP9 • P12
• P4 • NP7 • 5N9 • N12
• O4 • O7 • A9 • A12
• P5 • 5N7 • 6N9 • P13
• O5 • A7 • IP10 • N13
• 5N5 • 6N7 • NP10 • A13
• MBP6 • MBP8 • 5N10 • P14
• SBP6 • SBP8 • A10 • N14
• O6 • NP8 • 6N10 • A14
The component names can be interpreted by identifying the

prefix with the component type and the suffix with the carbon
number. The prefix component types are:
• P: Paraffinic (no distinction on isomer type)
• O: Olefin
• MBP: Multi-branch paraffin
• SBP: Single-branch paraffin
• NP: Normal paraffin
• IP: Isoparaffin (no distinction on number of branches)
• A: Aromatic
• N: Naphthenic (no distinction on number of carbons in
ring)
4-6
The components P4, P5, and A8 are further delumped after the
reaction network. P4 and P5 are mapped into their
corresponding normal and isoparaffin components. A8 is
mapped into ethylbenzene, o-xylene, m-xylene, and p-xylene.
Reaction Kinetic - Paths

Nine fundamental reaction types are used in reformer kinetics:
Reaction Type Example

Isomerization
NP6 ⇔ SBP6
Ring Close/Open
NP6 ⇔ 5N6
Ring Expansion
5N6 ⇔ 6N6
Dehydrogenation
6N6 ⇔ A6 + 3H2
Hydrogenolysis
6N7 + H2 ⇒ 6N6 + P1
Hydrocracking
P5 + H2 ⇒ P2 + P3
Hydrodealkylation
A7 + H2 ⇒ A6 + P1
Polymerization
A7 + P5 ⇒ A12 + H2
Condensation
4-7
4-8 Introduction
The reaction paths used for C6 through C8 are shown in the

diagram below:
Figure 4.2
where:
x: carbon number from 6 to 8
nP: normal paraffins
SP: single-branch paraffins
MP: multi-branch paraffins
5N: 5-carbon ring naphthenics
6N: 6-carbon ring naphthenics
A: aromatics
As the carbon number increases beyond 8, the complexity of

the paths is reduced.
4-8
Reaction Kinetic - Expressions

The reaction kinetic expressions for the Reformer are power law
rate expressions based on concentrations. Here the
dehydrogenation reaction is used as an example to illustrate the
reaction kinetic expressions used to model these reactions.
CycloHexane ⇔ Benzene + 3 H2
3 x
(4.1)
Rate = Activity × k f × ( [ 6N6 ] – [ A6 ] × [ H2 ] ⁄ K eq ) × PF
where:
Activity = product of catalyst activity, metal site activity, and

dehydrogenation specific activity
kf = Arrhenius form of the forward reaction rate multiplier
[6N6], [A6], [H2] = concentration of cyclohexane, benzene,

and hydrogen
Keq = Arrhenius form of the rate equilibrium factor
PFx = pressure factor, default x=0.02 for dehydrogenation
Deactivation of Reformer Catalyst

Reformer catalyst is a bifunctional catalyst, and the catalyst
activity definition used in modeling must include separate terms
for the metals and acid functions. The activity of the catalyst in
a reformer is a function of several factors, a few of these are:
1. Coke laydown on the catalyst
2. Water/Chloride environment
3. Temporary poisons such as sulfur
4. Permanent poisons such as lead, zinc, and copper
5. Catalyst surface area
6. Platinum crystal size
7. Sintering
8. Shift from gamma alumina to alpha alumina
9. Catalyst breakage
4-9
4-10 Introduction
Items #5 through #9 are basically mechanical changes in the

catalyst and occur primarily during catalyst regeneration. These
mechanical changes in the catalyst, which effect activity, can
only be accounted for through direct analysis of the catalyst or
indirectly from measurement of plant operation. Fortunately, to
predict reformer operation on an on-going basis, these changes
can be lumped together in the deactivation model and thus do
not create a problem in the reaction modeling.
Permanent catalyst poisons such as those listed in item #4 are

normally very gradual and can be handled with routine activity
model updates, using the same lump mechanism used for items
#5 through #9.
When a significant quantity of permanent poison is deposited
on the catalyst over a short period of time, the deactivation
model will need to be updated from plant operating data.
This is true provided the unit will remain in service. In most
cases where a significant quantity of a permanent poison is
deposited on the catalyst, the reformer is taken off line and
the catalyst replaced.
The changes in catalyst performance due to the factors listed in

items #4 through #9 require that the Reformer model be
updated after each catalyst regeneration of semi-regenerative
units, and every 6 to 12 months for cyclic and continuous
catalyst circulation units.
Temporary sulfur poisoning will need to be addressed in the

Reformer deactivation model. The difficult aspect of this will be
determining how much of a change in catalyst activity is due to
the temporary poison and how much is due to another
mechanism. Once the quantity of sulfur is known, the prediction
of activity recovery will be very straightforward.
The effect of coke laydown on activity creates two areas of

major concern. The first is the actual prediction of coke laydown,
and the second is estimating the impact of coke deposition on
catalyst activity. The following sections describe how these are
handled in the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Reformer
model.
4-10
Coke Make Model

There are several theories on coke laydown, one or more of
them may be correct. The general concept with the greatest
acceptance is that coke is formed from the condensation of
polycyclic hydrocarbons. A second generally accepted concept is
that polycyclics are formed from an intermediate olefin created
primarily during the cyclization (and to some degree during
isomerization) of naphthenes from paraffins, and from
aromatics. The diagram below is a schematic of the coke make
mechanism.
Figure 4.3
Because the reaction rate of C6 ringed naphthenes to aromatics

is extremely high, it can be safely assumed that very little coke
is made from C6 ringed naphthenes. Also, the extremely low
concentrations of naphthenes (both C5 ringed and C6 ringed) in
the second and subsequent reactors, make it nearly impossible
to generate accurate rate data from experimental data.
Correlations of laboratory measurements of coke make and

paraffin of C5 ringed naphthene concentration are further
confused by the fact that the paraffins and naphthenes are
existing in equilibrium, and the concentrations of both species
decrease dramatically through the reactor systems. This is
particularly true of the C9 and heavier material where:
• the vast majority of the coke originates
4-11
4-12 Introduction
• both species approach zero concentration in the last

reactor where the majority of the coke is formed.
Literature reports give the reaction rates of the paraffin/

naphthene intermediate olefin in terms of the paraffin (or
paraffin and naphthene) concentration. For commercial catalytic
reformer modeling purposes, it can be assumed that the coke
make is a function primarily of the C5 ring naphthenes and
aromatics.
Coke make in the Reformer is modeled via the reaction of

paraffins, C5 ringed naphthenes, and aromatics to coke via a
first order reaction mechanism. All C5 ringed naphthenes share
a common activation energy as do the aromatics and paraffins.
The frequency factors vary by carbon number and species. Each
reactor has a coke make activity, as well as a total coke make
activity for all reactors. The reaction rate is in the general form:
–EP
------------
-
R×T
k P = A S × A RXI × F Pi × e
–EN
------------
R×T
- (4.2)
k N = A S × A RXI × F Ni × e
–EA
------------
-
R×T
k A = A S × A RXI × F Ai × e
where:
kP = rate factor of paraffins, carbon number i to coke

kN = rate factor of C5 ringed naphthenes, carbon number i to
coke
kA = rate factor of Aromatic, carbon number i to coke
AS = Coke Activity of the Reactor System
ARXI = Coke Activity of the individual Reactor
FNi, FAi = Frequency Factors for C5 ringed naphthenes and

aromatics, carbon number i
EN, EA = C5 ringed naphthenes and Aromatics activation

energies
4-12
The rate factors are then used in the reaction equations in the
following general format:
dC
------- = ( k P [ TotalP ] + k N [ Total5N ] + k A [ TotalA ] ) × PF × H2HCF (4.3)
dt
where:
dC
------- = coke/time
dt
kP = Paraffin to coke rate factor
[TOTALP] = concentration of total paraffins
kN = C5 ringed naphthene to coke rate factor
[TOTAL5N] = concentration of total C5 ringed naphthenes
kA = Aromatics to coke rate factor

[TOTALA] = concentration of total aromatics
PF = factor to adjust for changes in pressure
H2HCF = factor to adjust for changes in H2/HC ratio
Each feed has an associated coke make multiplier. Default

values are 1.0. This allows you to put a linear weighting on
feeds with higher or lower coking tendencies than the base feed
stock. This term is a simple multiplier on the coke rate
expressions.
Catalyst Activity Model

Catalyst activity is divided into a metals activity and an acid
activity. These activities affect the reaction mechanisms as
shown in the following table:
Reaction Type Acid Metal Pressure Multiplier

Isomerization X X
Ring Closure/Open X X X
Ring Expansion X
Dehydrogenation X
Hydrogenolysis - Para X X
4-13
4-14 Introduction
Reaction Type Acid Metal Pressure Multiplier

Hydrogenolysis - Naph X X
Hydrocracking X X
Hydrodealkylation X
Polymerization X
Also shown in the table above are the reaction mechanisms that
are affected by pressure changes.
The acid and metals activities are independent functions of

carbon on catalyst (COC) expressed as percent of catalyst. The
general form for both the acid and metals activity functions is:
2
Activity = Intercept + Poly1 × COC + Poly2 × COC + (4.4)
3 4
Poly3 × COC + Poly4 × COC
System Pressure Control

The pressure points through the system are all based upon a
single specified pressure. For the Catalytic Reformer in Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining this is the product separator
pressure. The Catalytic Reformer uses a modified Bernoulli
equation to calculate the following pressure drops based upon
the base case pressure drops and flowing conditions and the
specified flowing conditions:
• Product Separator to last Reactor Outlet
• Last Reactor Outlet to Last Reactor Inlet
• Last Reactor Inlet Pressure to Reactor(i) Inlet Pressure
• Reactor(i) Inlet Pressure to Reactor(i+1) Inlet Pressure
• First Reactor Inlet Pressure to Compressor Discharge
4-14
Reactor Temperature Control

The reactor inlet temperatures are calculated based upon the
delta inlet temperature entered for each reactor. In this model a
base temperature is used as a reference temperature for biasing
the individual reactor inlet temperatures.
Reactor(i) Inlet Temperature = Base Temperature

(4.5)
+ Reactor(i) Temperature Bias
This allows any one of the following to be a constant and the

severity target:
• Base Temperature
• WAIT
• WABT
• RON for C5+ or C6+
• Aromatics Production
Stabilizer Configuration
The stabilizer is a conventional rigorous tower simulation using
the HYSYS Petroleum Tower model. A vapor and liquid draw are
taken off the overhead receiver, and the reformate off the
reboiler.
4-15
4-16 Overall Operation Structure/
4.2 Overall Operation

Structure/Environment
In the HYSYS, the Catalytic Reformer operation appears as an
object icon in the Main environment PFD.
Figure 4.4
The Catalytic Reformer operation is actually a subflowsheet

containing the required reactor and stabilizer tower (if
applicable) that make up a catalytic reformer.
Figure 4.5
4-16
In the Catalytic Reformer subflowsheet environment, you can

access another sublevel environment called Calibration
Environment.
Figure 4.6
4.2.1 Main Environment

In the Simulation/Main environment, the following features are
available for the Catalytic Reformer:
• create a catalytic reformer template
• create or add a catalytic reformer
• access Catalytic Reformer property view
• access Catalytic Reformer environment/subflowsheet
• delete existing catalytic reformer
4-17
Create Catalytic Reformer Template

HYSYS enables you to create templates of catalytic reformers,
so you can import them in existing HYSYS process flowsheet
diagram (PFD).
To create a catalytic reformer template:

1. Select File | New | Catalytic Reformer Template in the
menu bar.
The Reformer Configuration Wizard property view appears.
HYSYS automatically creates a catalytic reformer fluid

package with predetermined component list for the Catalytic
Reformer template.
2. In the first page of the Reformer Configuration Wizard

property view, you can configure the reactor part of the
Catalytic Reformer.
3. Click Next.
4. In the second page of the Reformer Configuration Wizard
property view, you can specify the reactor and heater
parameters.
5. Click Next.
6. In the third and final page of the Reformer Configuration
Wizard property view, you can select or specify a set of
calibration factors.
7. Click Done.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining completes the Catalytic
Reformer subflowsheet, based on the specified information
from the Reformer Configuration Wizard, and opens the
Catalytic Reformer subflowsheet environment.
8. In the Catalytic Reformer environment, you can:
• Access and modify the reactor by double-clicking the
reactor object icon in the Catalytic Reformer PFD.
• Access and modify the stabilizer tower by double-clicking
on the stabilizer tower object icon in the Catalytic
Reformer PFD.
• Access the Calibration environment and calibrate the
Reformer model.
4-18
9. In the menu bar, select File | Save As or File | Save

command to save the Catalytic Reformer template as a *.ref
file.
Create/Add Catalytic Reformer

To add a catalytic reformer into a PFD:
1. Open the appropriate simulation case.
2. Open the UnitOps property view.
3. In the Categories group, select the Refinery Ops radio
button.
4. In the Available Unit Operations group, select Catalytic
Reformer and click Add.
The Reformer Template Option property view appears
5. In the Reformer Template Option property view, do one of
the following:
• Click Read an Existing CAT Template to add a
Catalytic Reformer operation based on an existing
template.
The Catalytic Reformer operation appears on the PFD.
• Click Configure a New Reformer Unit to add a
Catalytic Reformer operation and configure it from
scratch.
The Reformer Configuration Wizard property view
appears, and you have to configure the basic structure of
the Catalytic Reformer operation using the features
available in the Reformer Configuration Wizard. After you
have specified the minimum information required, the
Catalytic Reformer operation appears on the PFD.
6. Open the Catalytic Reformer property view and make the
necessary changes/specifications/connections for the
simulation case.
4-19
Access Catalytic Reformer Property

View
To open the Catalytic Reformer property view, do one of the
following:
• On the PFD property view, right-click the Catalytic
Reformer operation icon and select View Properties
command from the Object Inspect menu.
• On the Workbook property view, click the Unit Ops tab,
select the Catalytic Reformer under the Name column,
and click the View UnitOp button.
• On the Object Navigator property view, select UnitOps
radio button in the Filter group, select the applicable
flowsheet in the Flowsheet group, select the Catalytic
Reformer operation in the Unit Operations group, and
click the View button.
Access Catalytic Reformer

Environment
To access the Catalytic Reformer subflowsheet environment:
1. In the Main PFD, open the Catalytic Reformer property view.
2. In the Catalytic Reformer property view, click the Reformer
Environment button.
Delete Catalytic Reformer Operation

To delete an existing Catalytic Reformer operation, do one of the
following:
• On the PFD property view, select the Catalytic Reformer
operation icon and press DELETE.
• On the PFD property view, right-click the Catalytic
Reformer operation icon and select Delete command
from the Object Inspect menu.
• On the Catalytic Reformer property view, click the
Delete button.
select the Catalytic Reformer under the Name column,
and click the Delete UnitOp button.
4-20
4.2.2 Catalytic Reformer

Environment
In the Catalytic Reformer environment, the following features
are available for the Catalytic Reformer:
• access the individual operation property views that make
up the Catalytic Reformer operation
• access Reformer Configuration Wizard
• select calibration factor set
• access the Calibration Environment
• access Results property view
Access Operation Property View

1. In the Catalytic Reformer environment, open the PFD
property view.
2. On the PFD, do one of the following:
• Double-click on the operation’s icon.
• Right-click on the operation’s icon, and select View
Properties command in the object inspect menu.
Access Reformer Configuration

Wizard
To access the Reformer Configuration Wizard, do one of the
following:
• In the Catalytic Reformer environment, select Reformer
| Configuration Wizard command in the menu bar.
• Open the Reformer Reactor Section property view, click
the Design tab, select the Configuration page, and
click the Configuration Wizard button.
4-21
Select Calibration Factor Set

To select the Calibration Factor Set for the Catalytic Reformer
operation:
1. Select Reformer | Calibration Factor command from the
menu bar.
The Calibration Factor Set property view appears.
Figure 4.7
2. Open the Select a calibration factor set to use for

simulation drop-down list and select a calibration factor
set.
You can click the Library button to open the Calibration
Set Library Property View to create, clone, and modify a
calibration factor set.
Access Calibration Environment

To access the Calibration environment:
1. In the Main environment, open the Catalytic Reformer
property view.
2. Click the Reformer Environment button to access the
Catalytic Reformer environment.
3. Select Reformer | Calibration command in the menu bar.
4-22
4.2.3 Calibration Environment

In the Calibration environment, you can calibrate the Catalytic
Reformer operation without affecting the actual operation in the
simulation environment.
After calibrating the operation to the desired performance, you

can export the new parameter/variable values to the Catalytic
Reformer operation in the simulation environment and view the
new results.
The following features are available in the Calibration

environment:
• Calibrate the Catalytic Reformer
Calibrate the Catalytic Reformer

To calibrate the Catalytic Reformer:
1. In the Calibration environment, select Calibration |
Calibration Workbook command from the menu bar to
open the Calibration property view.
2. Open the Data Set drop-down list and select a data set to
be used on the calibration run.
The default data set is based on the current Catalytic
Reformer configuration.
The features/options available in the first three tabs are
available for you to make modifications to the existing
Catalytic Reformer, if you want/need to:
• In the Design tab, you can make any modifications to
the configuration and geometry parameters of the
reactor.
• In the Feed Data tab, you can make any modifications
to the feed stream.
• In the Operation tab, you can make any modifications
to the overall operation performance of the Catalytic
Reformer.
You can make changes to the Catalytic Reformer

configuration and save the modifications as a separate data
set.
4-23
4-24 Reformer Configuration Wizard
3. In the Operation tab, specify values for the variables that

affect the reactor performance/results.
4. In the Measurement tab, specify the reactor, compressor,
and product stream parameters.
5. In the Calibration Control tab, select and specify the
parameter and objective function values that will be used in
the calibration calculation/run.
6. Click the Run Calibration button.
• If you only have one data set, the Validation Wizard
Property View appears. Validate the data set and click
the OK button to continue with the calibration run.
• If you have more than one data set, the Select Data
Sets for Calibration Property View appears. On the
Select Data Sets for Calibration property view, select and
validate the data set you want, and click the Run
Calibration button to continue with the calibration run.
7. After the calibration run has finish, click the Analysis tab to
view the calibration calculation results.
4.3 Reformer
Configuration Wizard
The Reformer Configuration Wizard enables you to quickly set
up the Catalytic Reformer operation.
The Reformer Configuration Wizard is made up of three

sequential pages. You enter information in a page, then move on
to the next page in order.
The following table list the common buttons available at the

bottom of the Reformer Configuration Wizard property view:
Button Description
Next> Enables you to move forward to the next page.
<Prev Enables you to move backward to the previous page.
Cancel Enables you to exit the Reformer Configuration Wizard without
saving any changes or creating a catalytic reformer operation.
4-24
Button Description
Close Enables you to exit the Reformer Configuration Wizard and keep
any specifications or changes made to the catalytic reformer
operation.
Done Enables you to exit the Reformer Configuration Wizard and
finish configuring the catalytic reformer operation.
To access the Reformer Configuration Wizard:

1. In the HYSYS desktop menu bar, select FILE | New |
Reformer command.
HYSYS automatically completes the Simulation Basis
environment specifications and then enters the Simulation
environment.
or
1. In the Main Environment, press the F12 to open the
UnitOps property view.
2. In the Available Unit Operations group, select Catalytic
Reformer and click Add.
The Reformer Template Option property view appears.
3. Click the Configure a New Reformer Unit button.
or
1. In the Catalytic Reformer Environment, select Reformer
| Configuration Wizard command from the menu bar.
or
1. In the Reactor Section Property View, click the Design
tab and select the Configuration page.
2. Click the Configuration Wizard button.
or
1. In the Calibration Environment, select Calibration |
Calibration Workbook to open the Calibration property
view.
2. Click the Design tab and select the Configuration page.
4-25

4.3.1 Configuration Page

The Configuration page 1 of the Reformer Configuration Wizard
property view, enables you to specify the basic configuration of
the Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.8
Object Description
Catalyst Type group Contains two radio buttons that enables you to
select the catalyst in the reactor:
• CCR
• Semi-Regen
Reaction Section Contains two radio buttons that enables you to
group select how many beds in the reactor:
• 3 Beds
• 4 Beds
Include Hydrogen Enables you to toggle between including or
Recontactor excluding a recontactor in the catalytic reformer.
checkbox
Include Stabilizer Enables you to toggle between including or
Tower checkbox excluding a stabilizer tower in the catalytic
reformer.
4-26
4.3.2 Geometry Page

The Geometry page 2 of the Reformer Configuration Wizard
property view, enables you to specify the geometry information
for the reactors.
Figure 4.9
Object Description
Length row Enables you to specify the length of each reactor
bed.
Cat. Wt. row Enables you to specify the catalyst weight of each
reactor bed.
Void Fraction field Enables you to specify the void fraction of the
catalyst.
Catalyst Density field Enables you to specify the density of the catalyst.
4-27
4.3.3 Calibration Factors Page

The Calibration Factors page 3 of the Reformer Configuration
Wizard property view, enables you to select or specify a
calibration factor.
Figure 4.10
Object Description
Use an existing set of Enables you to select an existing calibration factor
calibration factors set. The default selection is the default calibration
drop-down list factor set provided by HYSYS.
Library button Enables you to access the Calibration Set
Library Property View.
4-28
4.4 Catalytic Reformer

Property View
The Catalytic Reformer property view contains features used to
manipulate the overall Catalytic Reformer operation and enable
you to enter the Catalytic Reformer environment.
To access the Catalytic Reformer property view:

1. In the Main environment, open the PFD property view.
2. In the PFD property view, double-click on the Catalytic
Reformer object icon.
Figure 4.11
The following table lists and describes the common features in

the Catalytic Reformer property view:
Object Description
Delete button Enables you to delete the Catalytic Reformer
operation.
Reformer Enables you to enter the Catalytic Reformer
Environment button Environment.
4-29
4-30 Catalytic Reformer Property View
Object Description
Status bar Displays the status of the reactor section of the
catalytic reformer operation.
Ignore checkbox Enables HYSYS to ignore the Catalytic Reformer
operation during the process flowsheet calculation.
4.4.1 Design Tab

The Design tab contains features used to configure the overall
structure of the Catalytic Reformer operation.
The features are grouped into the following pages:

• Connections
• Calibration Factors
• Notes
Connections Page
The Connections page enables you to rename the operation, and
connect/disconnect streams flowing into and out of the Catalytic
Reformer.
Figure 4.12
4-30
Depending on the configuration of the Catalytic Reformer,

the image of the operation will vary.
Object Description
Name field Enables you to specify a name for the Catalytic
Reformer operation.
Reformer Feeds table Enables you to connect feed streams to the
Catalytic Reformer, specify the internal feed
stream names, and select the type for the feed
streams.
Products table(s) Enables you to connect product streams to the
Catalytic Reformer and specify the internal feed
stream name.
Feed Type Library Enables you to access the Feed Type Library
button Property View and modify the feed stream type
and data.
Calibration Factors Page

The Calibration Factors page enables you to create, edit, view,
and apply a calibration factor set to the Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.13
4-31
Object Description
Calibration Factor Enables you to select and apply a calibration factor
Set drop-down list set to the Catalytic Reformer.
Initially, Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
provides a default calibration factor set. The
calibration factors in the default set are read
only.
If you want to manipulate the factor values, you
have to create your own calibration factor set.
Calibration Factors Enables you to access the Calibration Set
Library button Library Property View.
The Calibration Set Library property view enables
you to create, import, clone, edit, export, and
delete a calibration factor set.
Calibration Factors Displays the following calibration factors:
table • Isomerization Tuning Factors
• Olefin Distribution Factor
• Equilibrium Constant Tuning Factors
• Light Ends Tuning Factors
• Kinetic Pathways Tuning Factors
• Dehydrogenation Tuning Factors
• Ring Closure Tuning Factors
• Cracking Tuning Factors
• Paraffin Isomerization Tuning Factors
• Ring Expansion Tuning Factors
• General Coke Activities
• DP Factors
• Base Heat Flux
• Pinning Coefficients
• RON Activity Factors
Notes Page
Notes Page/Tab. comments or information regarding the specific unit operation or
4-32
4.4.2 Reactor Section Tab

The Reactor Section tab contains features used to configure the
reactor in the Catalytic Reformer operation.

• Feeds
• Reactor Control
• Catalyst
• Recontactor
• Product Heater
• Solver Options
• Solver Console
• Advanced
Feeds Page
The Feeds page enables you to modify the properties of the feed
streams entering and exiting the Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.14
4-33
Object Description
Feed Enables you to modify the following properties of the feed
Conditions stream(s) entering the Catalytic Reformer:
table • volume flow rate
• mass flow rate
• standard volume flow rate
• temperature
Combined Displays the total value for each of the following columns:
row • Volume Flow
• Mass Flow
• Std Vol Flow
Reactor Control Page

The Reactor Control page enables you to modify the variables
that control the reactor in the Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.15
4-34
Object Description
Reactor Temperature Enables you to specify the following variables that
Specification table control the reactor temperature:
• WAIT (weight average inlet temperature)
• WABT (weight average bed temperature)
• Reactor Inlet Reference Temperature
• Rx 1 Temperature Bias
• Rx 1 Inlet Temperature
• C5+ RON
• C6+ RON
• Sum of Aromatics, Wt.% of Feed
Hydrogen Recycle Enables you to configure the Hydrogen recycle
table performance:
• Recycle Compressor Flow
• H2HC Ratio (mol/mol)
Product Separator Enables you to configure the product separator:
table • Product Separator Temperature
• Product Separator Pressure
4-35
Catalyst Page
The Catalyst page enables you to specify catalyst parameters for
the reactor beds.
The features available in the Catalyst page varies depending on

which type of reactor you selected for the Catalytic Reformer:
• For the CCR reactor, you can specify the regenerator
condition, and either specify the catalyst circulation rate
or the coke on catalyst weight %.
Figure 4.16
Object Description
CatCircRate field Enables you to specify the catalyst circulation rate.
Coke on Catalyst Enables you to specify the Coke on Catalyst weight
(wt%) rows percentage for each reactor beds.
Coke Laydown Rate Enables you to specify the Coke Laydown rate for
(kg/h) rows each reactor beds.
Percent Pinning (%) Enables you to specify the Pinning percent for
rows each reactor beds.
4-36
• For the Semi-regen reactor, you can specify the start and
end time for the reaction, the initial coke on catalyst, and
the coke on catalyst equilibrium distribution factor.
Figure 4.17
Object Description
Simulation End/Start Enables you to specify the start and end time for
Times table the simulation reaction.
COC at Start of Enables you to specify the initial coke on catalyst
Simulation table value for all the reactor beds.
Equilibrium Enables you to specify the equilibrium distribution
Distribution Factors factor of the coke on catalyst for all the reactor
table beds.
Average COC table Enables you to specify the average coke on
catalyst value for all the reactor beds.
Rate of Coke Enables you to specify the coke laydown rate for
Production table all the reactor beds.
4-37
Recontactor Page
The Recontactor page enables you to configure the booster
compressors and recontactor drums.
If the Catalytic Reformer does not have a recontactor, the

Recontactor page appears blank.
Figure 4.18
Object Description
Outlet Pressure Enables you to specify the outlet pressure of the
row booster compressor for the following:
• low pressure
• high pressure
Inlet Stream DP Enables you to specify the inlet stream pressure
row difference of the recontactor drum for the following:
• low pressure
• high pressure
Product Enables you to specify the product stream temperature
Temperature row of the recontactor drum for the following:
• low pressure
• high pressure
Murphree Enables you to specify the Murphree efficiency of the
Efficiency row recontactor drum for the following:
• low pressure
• high pressure
4-38
Product Heater Page

The Product Heater Page enables you to specify the temperature
or heat duty of the heater, and the outlet stream pressure or
pressure difference of the heater.
Figure 4.19
4-39
Solver Options Page

The Solver Options page enables you to modify the calculation
variables used to determine the reaction results of the reactor.
Figure 4.20
Object Description
Convergence Contains the Residual field that enables you to specify the maximum
Tolerance group residual value allowed for the convergence calculation.
Iteration Limits Contains two fields that enable you to control the iteration range for the
group OOMF Solver performance:
• Maximum Iterations field enables you to specify the maximum
number of iterations.
• Minimum Iterations field enables you to specify the minimum number
of iterations.
Creep Step Contains three fields that enable you to configure the creep function of the
Parameters OOMF Solver:
group • On/Off Switch drop-down list. Enables you to select On (enable) or
Off (disable) option for the creep feature.
• Iterations field. Enables you to specify the number of iterations per
creep step.
• Step Size field. Enables you to specify the size of each creep step.
Completeness Contains the Override Spec Group Completeness checkbox that enables
Checking group you to toggle between:
• HYSYS overriding its normal behaviour of requiring that spec groups be
complete before solving.
• HYSYS retaining its normal behaviour of requiring that spec groups be
complete before solving.
4-40
Object Description
SQP Hessian Contains features used to manipulate the SQP Hessian parameters:
Parameters • Initialization drop-down list. Enables you to select one of four options
group to initialize the Hessian value:
Normal (default). Hessian initialized with identity matrix. This setting
balances efficiency and robustness. It is well suited for general purpose
optimization problems. Typical applications are offline optimization and
online problems that start very far from a solution.
Aggressive. Hessian initialized with small values. This setting moves
the problem to bounds faster than the Normal mode. This setting is
preferred for highly constrained optimization problems with few Degrees
of Freedom at solution. Ideal applications are well-posed online real-
time optimization problems.
Scaled. A combination of the Aggressive and Advanced modes.
Recommended for highly constrained optimization problems with few
Degrees of Freedom at solution and a nonlinear objective function.
Advanced. Hessian initialized with 2nd order information.
Recommended for problems with many Degrees of Freedom at solution
and/or quadratic objective function. Ideal for data reconciliation
problems, both online and offline.
• Scaling factor field. Enables you to specify the scaling factor.
• Updates stored field. Enables you to specify the number of updates
stored during calculation (default value is 10).
Line Search Contains features used to configure the line search parameters:
Parameters • Algorithm drop-down list. Enables you to select one of four methods
group for the line search algorithm:
Normal (default). A proprietary line search designed to balance
robustness with efficiency.
Exact. A well-known exact penalty line search. It is too conservative for
most practical problems.
Residual. A proprietary line search designed to initially favour the
convergence of residuals over the objective function improvement.
Square. A line search designed to attempt to enforce bounds on cases
with no Degrees of Freedom. It should be used only in cases where
there are multiple solutions to a problem, and the desired solution lies
within the bounds.
• Step Control drop-down list. Enables you to select one of three options
for the step size:
Normal (default). The original method.
Aggressive. A modified method that tends to take larger steps.
Conservative. A modified method that tends to take smaller steps.
• Step Control Iterations field. Enables you to specify the number of
step iterations.
Variable Scaling Contains the On/Off Switch drop-down list that enables you to select one of
Parameter group the following options:
• On. Activates the variable scaling parameter.
• Off. Deactivates the variable scaling parameter.
Failure Recovery Enables you to select one of the following action in case of failure:
Action drop- • Do nothing.
down list • Revert to the previous results before the solve (this is the default
option).
• Revert to the default input and results.
4-41
Solver Console Page

The Solver Console page enables you to view the solver
message generated by the reactor and run script commands.
Figure 4.21
Object Description
Simulation Engine Displays the messages and commands from the
Message and Script solver of the FCC reactor.
Commands field
Enter Script Enables you to enter the text code for a command
Command field for the solver.
Clear Message Enables you to clear the messages in the
button Simulation Engine Message and Script Commands
field.
Get Prev. Command Enables you to retrieve a previous command from
button the command history and place the text code in
the Enter Script Command field.
Get Next Command Enables you to retrieve the next command from
Run Command Enables you to run the command code in the Enter
button Script Command field.
Clear Command Enables you to clear the command history.
button
4-42
Advanced Page
The Advanced page displays in detail the parameters that affect
the performance of the Catalytic Reformer.
The features in the Advanced page are intended for expert

users who have detailed knowledge on the Catalytic
Reformer.
Figure 4.22
The following table lists and describes the variables available in

the Advanced page:
Parameter Description
FOE Densities The Fuel Oil Equivalent (FOE) density of the
following components: H2, Methane, Ethane, and
Ethylene.
Heater Efficiencies The Heater efficiency variables enable you to
specify the heat transfer efficiencies of the heater
in each reactor.
4-43
Parameter Description
General Kinetic The General Kinetic calibration factors enable you
Calibration Factors to adjust the activities for a specific reaction type
(using the activity for the reaction type) or to
adjust the reactions rates of all reactions
simultaneously (using the Global Activity).
Activity Profile The Activity Profile Constants enable you to adjust
Constants the activity profile through a reactor.
The only real valid reason for adjusting the Activity
Distribution is to match measured internal reactor
temperatures. Great care must be taken in this
effort to insure that the exact locations of internal
thermocouples are known.
It is not recommended to tune to internal
temperatures unless duplicate thermocouples are
located in the beds at the same levels but in
different quadrants of the reactor.
4.4.3 Stabilizer Tower Tab

The Stabilizer Tower tab contains features used to manipulate
the tower in the Catalytic Reformer. The features are grouped
into the following pages:
• Zone Pressures
• Specs
If the Catalytic Reformer does not contain a stabilizer tower,

the above pages are blanked.
4-44
Zone Pressures Page

The Zone Pressures page enables you to specify the top
pressure values for the fractionator zones and the bottom
pressure of the fractionator.
Figure 4.23
Specs Page
Refer to Specs Page The Specs page enables you to specify the values of the product
section from Chapter 6 -
output streams of the fractionator. These are the values that the
Petroleum Column for
more information. Column algorithm tries to meet.
There are two specs options to choose from: TBP Cut Point or
Product Flow Fraction. Depending on which option you select in
the Spec Option group, the features available in the Specs page
varies.
4-45
• TBP Cut Point option
Figure 4.24
• Product Flow Fraction option
Figure 4.25
4-46
4.4.4 Results Tab

The Results tab displays the calculated simulation results of the
Catalytic Reformer.
The information are grouped in the following pages:

• Summary
• Feed Blend
• Product Yields
• Product Properties
• Reactors
• Heaters
• Recontactor
• Product Streams
Summary Page
The Summary page displays the calculated results of the
Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.26
4-47
Feed Blend Page

The Feed Blend page displays the detailed characterization of
each individual feed and blended feed streams entering the
Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.27
Properties
• mass flowrate • components
• volume flowrate • paraffins
• standard volume flowrate • naphthenics
• moles flowrate • aromatics
• molecular weight • D86 Initial point
• specific gravity • D86 cut points
• API gravity • TBP Initial point
• TBP cut points
4-48
Product Yields Page

The Product Yields page displays the Net Reactor yields from the
simulation.
Figure 4.28
The Grouped Yield, Detailed Yield, and Fractionated radio

buttons enables you to select how the information is displayed in
the Product Yields page.
• Grouped Yields option displays the following
properties:
Table Properties
Grouped Displays the weight% and volume% values for the following properties:
Yields
• sum of normal paraffins • sum of C4+
• sum single-branched paraffins • sum of C5+
• sum of multi-branch paraffins • sum of C6+
• sum of all paraffins • sum of C8 aromatics
• sum of Olefins • sum of C5 paraffins
• sum of 5 ring Naphtha • sum of C6 paraffins
• sum of 6 ring Naphtha • sum of C7 paraffins
• sum of all Naphtha • sum of C8 paraffins
• sum of all aromatics • sum of C9 paraffins
• sum of C10 paraffins
4-49
Table Properties
Isomer Displays the isomer to normal weight ratios for the following components:
Weight
• C4 • C6+
Ratios
• C5 • C6+ single-branch to multi-
• C6 branch
• C7 • A8 para-xylene %
• C8 • A8 meta-xylene %
• C9 • A8 ortho-xylene %
• A8 ethyl-benzene %
• Detailed Yields option displays the following properties:
Table Properties
Detailed Displays the weight% and volume% values for the
Yields following properties:
• H2 • MBP7 • A9
• P1 • SBP7 • 6N9
• P2 • NP7 • IP10
• OL2 • O7 • NP10
• P3 • 5N7 • 5N10
• O3 • A7 • A10
• IP4 • 6N7 • 6N10
• NP4 • MBP8 • IP11
• O4 • SBP8 • NP11
• IP5 • NP8 • 5N11
• NP5 • O8 • A11
• O5 • 5N8 • 6N11
• 5N5 • ETHYLBENZENE • P12
• MBP6 • O-XYLENE • N12
• SBP6 • M-XYLENE • A12
• NP6 • P-XYLENE • P13
• O6 • 6N8 • N13
• 5N6 • IP9 • A13
• A6 • NP9 • P14
• 6N6 • 5N9 • N14
• A14
4-50
• Fractionated option displays the following properties:
Table Properties
Vapor Displays the weight% and mole% (of net H2, Stab O/H
Streams vapor, and vent H2) for the following properties:
• MASS • 6N6 • A9
• VOLUME • MBP7 • 6N9
• H2 • SBP7 • IP10
• P1 • NP7 • NP10
• P2 • O7 • 5N10
• OL2 • 5N7 • A10
• P3 • A7 • 6N10
• O3 • 6N7 • IP11
• IP4 • MBP8 • NP11
• NP4 • SBP8 • 5N11
• O4 • NP8 • A11
• IP5 • O8 • 6N11
• NP5 • 5N8 • P12
• O5 • ETHYLBEN • N12
• 5N5 • O-XYLENE • A12
• MBP6 • M-XYLENE • P13
• SBP6 • P-XYLENE • N13
• NP6 • 6N8 • A13
• O6 • IP9 • P14
• 5N6 • NP9 • N14
• A6 • 5N9 • A14
Liquid Displays the mass, volume, and mole basis (of Stab O/H
Streams liquid and Stab btms) for the following properties:
• Flow Rate • MBP7 • 6N9
• H2 • SBP7 • IP10
• P1 • NP7 • NP10
• P2 • O7 • 5N10
• OL2 • 5N7 • A10
• P3 • A7 • 6N10
• O3 • 6N7 • IP11
• IP4 • MBP8 • NP11
• NP4 • SBP8 • 5N11
• O4 • NP8 • A11
• IP5 • O8 • 6N11
• NP5 • 5N8 • P12
• O5 • ETHYLBEN • N12
• 5N5 • O-XYLENE • A12
• MBP6 • M-XYLENE • P13
• SBP6 • P-XYLENE • N13
• NP6 • 6N8 • A13
• O6 • IP9 • P14
• 5N6 • NP9 • N14
• A6 • 5N9 • A14
• 6N6 • A9
4-51
If the Catalytic Reformer does not contain a stabilizer tower,

the Fractionated option displays a blank page.
Product Properties Page

The Product Properties page displays the properties of the net
reactor yield from the simulation and the fractionated cuts if a
fractionator is included.
Figure 4.29
The Net Yield Properties group a table that displays the following
properties:
• C5+ RON
• C6+ RON
• sum of aromatics, weight% of feed
4-52
If a stabilizer tower is attached, the following tables appear:
Table Properties
Stabilizer • molecular weight • specific gravity
Overhead Liquid • API gravity
Stabilizer • RON • Normal Paraffins wt%
Bottoms • MON • Total Paraffins wt%
• RVP • Total Olefins wt%
• specific gravity • 5C-Ring Naphthenics wt%
• API gravity • 6C-Ring Naphthenics wt%
• molecular weight • Total Naphthenics wt%
• Single-Branched Paraffins wt% • Total Aromatics wt%
• Multi-Branched Paraffins wt%
Reactors Page
The Reactors page displays the key simulation results of the
reactors.
Figure 4.30
The following calculated variable results are displayed for each

reactor:
• Inlet Temperature
• Outlet Temperature
• Delta T. Temperature difference between the inlet stream
and outlet stream.
4-53
• Inlet Pressure
• Outlet Pressure
• Delta P. Pressure difference between the inlet stream and
outlet stream.
• Inlet Moles. Inlet stream flow rate in moles.
• Outlet Moles. Outlet stream flow rate in moles.
• Residence Time. The length of time the fluid stream
remains within the reactor.
Heaters Page
The Heaters page displays the calculated results of the heater
properties after the reaction.
Figure 4.31
Recontactor Page
The Recontactor page displays calculated results of the
recontactor.
If the Catalytic Reformer does not contain a recontactor,

then the Recontactor page appears blank.
4-54
Figure 4.32
The following properties are displayed for the Booster

Compressor and Recontactors at low and high pressures:
• For Booster Compressor: inlet stream moles flow rate,
inlet stream temperature, inlet stream pressure, outlet
stream temperature, outlet stream pressure, and gas
power.
• For Recontactors: inlet vapour temperature, inlet vapour
temperature, inlet vapour delta pressure, inlet liquid
moles flow rate, inlet liquid temperature, inlet liquid
pressure, inlet liquid delta pressure, heat loss, product
temperature, product vapour fraction, Murphree
efficiency, vapor mass, vapor moles, liquid temperature,
liquid pressure, and liquid H2.
The following properties are displayed for the H2 Vent at low

pressure: H2 to vent splitter, H2 to HP recontactor drum,
fraction of H2 to HP recontactor drum, H2 Vent stream, and
fraction of H2 to Vent H2.
4-55
4-56 Feed Type Library Property View
Product Streams Page

The Product Streams page displays the properties of the product
stream exiting the Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.33
4.5 Feed Type Library

Property View
The Feed Type Library property view enables you to import,
export, delete, and configure the feed type data.
You cannot delete the default feed type provided by Aspen

HYSYS Petroleum Refining.
To access the Feed Type Library property view:

1. Open the Catalytic Reformer Property View.
2. Click the Design tab and select the Connections page.
3. Click the Feed Type Library button.
4-56
The Feed Type Library property view appears.
Figure 4.34
The following table lists and describes the options available in

the Feed Type Library property view.
Object Description
Feed Types list Displays the names of the feed type available in
the Catalytic Reformer
Import button Enables you to import feed types (from *.csv files)
into the Catalytic Reformer.
Export button Enables you to export a selected feed type, in the
Feed Types list, to a *.csv file.
Delete button Enables you to delete a selected feed type, in the
Feed Types list, from the Catalytic Reformer.
Properties of Enables you to modify the property information of
Selected Feed Type a selected feed type in the Feed Types list.
table
4-57
4-58 Reactor Section Property View
4.6 Reactor Section

Property View
The Reactor Section property view enables you to configure and
modify the reactor part of the catalytic reformer operation.
To access the Reactor Section property view:

1. Enter the Catalytic Reformer subflowsheet environment.
2. Access the PFD by clicking the PFD icon.
3. On the PFD property view, right-click the Reactor Section
PFD icon object icon.
4. Select View Properties command from the object inspect
menu.
The Reformer Reactor Section property view appears.
Figure 4.35
4-58

the Reactor Section property view:
Object Description
Delete button Enables you to delete the reactor section.
catalytic reformer operation.
Ignore checkbox Enables HYSYS to ignore the reactor section
during the process flowsheet calculation.
4.6.1 Design Tab

The Design tab contains the features used to configure the
reactor section of the Catalytic Reformer operation.
These features are grouped into the following pages:

• Configuration
• Geometry
• Notes
Configuration Page
The Configuration page enables you to specify the reactor name,
and displays the reactor type, number of reactor beds, and
whether the reactor contains a recontactor.
To modify the configuration, click the Configuration Wizard

button to access the Reformer Configuration Wizard property
view.
4-59
Figure 4.36
Geometry Page
The Geometry page enables you to specify detailed information/
structure of the reactor beds and heaters.
Figure 4.37
4-60
Object Description
Length Enables you to specify the length of the reactor bed.
Cat. Wt. Enables you to specify the weight of the catalyst in the
reactor bed.
Void Fraction Enables you to specify the ratio/fraction between
empty space in the reactor vs. space taken by the
tubes.
Catalyst Density Enables you to specify the density of the catalyst in the
reactor beds.
Notes Page
4.6.2 Feed Data Tab

The Feed Data tab contains features used to configure and
modify the feed stream properties entering the Reformer
Reactor Section.

• Library
• Properties
You can also access the features in the Feed Data tab by
clicking the Feed Type Library button in the Connections
page of the Catalytic Reformer property view.
4-61
Library Page
The Library page enables you to create, copy, modify, import,
export, and delete feed data types entering the reactor
operation.
Figure 4.38
Object Description
Feed Types Displays the list of feed data types available for the
group reactor.
Import button Enables you to import a feed data from a file. The feed
data are saved in *.csv type files.
Export button Enables you to export the selected feed data (from the
Available Feed Types group) into a *.csv file. The
exported feed data can be imported into a different
applicable operation.
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected feed data in the
Available Feed Types group.
Properties of Enables you to modify the property information of a
Selected Feed selected feed type in the Feed Types list.
Type table
4-62
Properties Page
The Properties page enables you to specify properties for virtual
feeds. The virtual feeds are feeds not represented by internal or
external streams in the subflowsheet and flowsheet respectively.
Figure 4.39
Object Description
Feeds group Displays both real and virtual feed streams connected
to the Catalytic Reformer.
Add button Enables you to create a virtual feed stream.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining automatically assigns
a default name to the virtual feed stream and treats
the virtual stream as an internal stream.
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected feed stream from
the Feeds group.
If the selected feed stream is a real stream, then both
the internal and external streams will be deleted.
Assay radio Enables you to specify assay properties of the selected
button feed type in the Feed Type list.
Bulk Properties Enables you to specify bulk properties of the selected
radio button feed type in the Feed Type list.
Kinetic Lumps Enables you to specify kinetic lumps properties of the
radio button selected feed type in the Feed Type list.
4-63
Object Description
Use GC Data Enables you to use the GC data (from the selected feed
checkbox stream) to derived the composition.
This checkbox is only available if you select the Assay
radio button and if the selected feed stream contains
GC data.
Assay drop-down Enables you to select the assay associated to the
list selected feed type in the Feed Type list.
This drop-down list is only available if you select the
Assay radio button.
Feed Properties Contains a table that displays the list of properties
group available for you to view or modify of the selected feed
stream.
The variables available in this table varies depending
on which radio button you select in the Selected Feed
group.
4.6.3 Operation Tab

The Operation tab contains features used to manipulate the
operation parameters of the Catalytic Reformer operation.

• Feeds
• Reactor Control
• Catalyst
• Recontactor
• Product Heater
• Solver Options
• Solver Console
• Advanced
4-64
Feeds Page
Refer to Feeds Page The Feeds page enables you to modify the physical properties of
section for more
information. the feed streams entering and exiting the reactor section of the
Catalytic Reformer operation.
Figure 4.40
4-65

Refer to Reactor Control The Reactor Control page enables you to modify the variables
Page section for more
information. that control the reactor.
Figure 4.41
4-66
Catalyst Page
Refer to Catalyst Page The Catalyst page enables you to modify the catalyst properties
section for more
information. in the reactor.
The options in the Catalyst page varies depending on which

Catalytic Reformer configuration you selected.
Figure 4.42
4-67
Recontactor Page
Refer to Recontactor The Recontactor page enables you to configure the recontactor
If the Catalytic Reformer does not contain a recontactor, the

Recontactor page will appear blank.
Figure 4.43
4-68
Product Heater Page

The Product Heater page enables you to specify the outlet
pressure, pressure difference, outlet temperature, and/or heater
duty.
Figure 4.44
4-69
Solver Options Page

Refer to Solver Options The Solver Options page enables you to modify the calculation
information. variables used to determine the reaction results of the reactor.
Figure 4.45
4-70
Solver Console Page

Refer to Solver Console The Solver Console page enables you to view the solver
information. message generated by the reactor and run script commands.
Figure 4.46
4-71
Advanced Page
Refer to Advanced Page The Advanced page enables you to view in detail the parameters
section for more
information. that affect the performance of the Catalytic Reformer.
The features in the Advanced page are intended for expert

users who have detailed knowledge on the Catalytic
Reformer.
Figure 4.47
4-72
4.6.4 Results Tab

The Results tab enables you to view the calculated variable
results of the Catalytic Reformer.
The information are grouped into the following pages:

• Summary
• Feed Blend
• Product Yields
• Reactor Section
• Heaters
• Recontactor
• Product Streams
Summary Page
The Summary page displays the calculated results of the
Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.48
4-73
Feed Blend Page

The Feed Blend page displays the calculated physical properties
of the feed stream entering the reactor.
Figure 4.49
4-74
Product Yields Page

The Product Yields page displays the calculated yield results of
the product stream exiting the reactor.
Figure 4.50
4-75

The Product Properties page displays the calculated physical
properties of the product stream exiting the reactor.
Figure 4.51
4-76
Reactors Page
For more information, The Reactors page displays the key simulation results of the
refer to Reactors Page
section. riser and reactor.
Figure 4.52
4-77
Heaters Page
The Heaters page displays the calculated results of the heater
properties after the reaction.
Figure 4.53
Recontactor Page
The Recontactor page displays calculated results of the
recontactor.

4-78
Figure 4.54

stream exiting the Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.55
4-79
4-80 Feed Type Property View
4.7 Feed Type Property

View
The Feed Type property view enables you to modify the selected
feed data.
Figure 4.56
Object Description
Name field Enables you to specify the name of the feed data.
Description field Enables you to provide an explanation/description
of the feed data.
Created field Displays the date and time when the feed data
was created.
Modified field Displays the date and time when the feed data
was last modified.
Kinetic Lump Weight Enables you to specify the value of the kinetic
Percents table lumps ratio in the feed data.
Normalize button Enables you to normalize the values in the Ratio
Value column so the sum of the ratio equals 1.
Delete button Enables you to delete the current feed type in the
Feed Type property view.
To access the Feed Type property view, in the Reformer Reactor

Section property view, click the Feed Data tab, select the
Library page, and click the Add button.
4-80
4.8 Calibration Set Library

Property View
The Calibration Set Library property view enables you to
manage the calibration factor sets.
There are several methods to access the Calibration Set Library

property view:
• In the Reformer Configuration Wizard property view,
go to the Calibration Factors (3 of 3) page and click the
Library button.
• In the Catalytic Reformer Property View, select the
Design tab, select the Calibration Factors page, and
click the Calibration Factors Library button.
• In the Catalytic Reformer Environment, select
Reformer | Calibration Factor command from the
menu bar, and click the Library button in the Calibration
Factor Set property view.
Figure 4.57

the Calibration Set Library property view:
Object Description
Available Calibration Displays all the factor sets available in the current
Factor Sets list calibration environment.
View/Edit button Enables you to view or modify the data of the
selected factor set in the Available Calibration
Factor Sets list.
4-81
4-82 Calibration Set Library Property
Object Description
Add button Enables you to add a new factor set and access
the Factor Set Property View.
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected factor set in the
Available Calibration Factor Sets list.
Clone button Enables you to create a copy/clone of the selected
factor set in the Available Calibration Factor
Sets list.
Import button Enables you to import a calibration factor set data
from a *.csv file.
Export button Enables you to export/save the selected factor set
(in the Available Calibration Factor Sets list) to
a file *.csv.
HYSYS provides a default calibration factor set with values in

the Calibration Set Library.
The calibration factor values, in the Default calibration factor
set, are read only.
To modify the calibration factors, you need to make a clone
of the Default Calibration Factor set, and modify the
calibration factor values in the cloned set.
4.8.1 Factor Set Property View

The Factor Set property view displays the variable values that
make up the calibration factor set. You can also edit the variable
values in the Factor Set property view.
You cannot modify the variable values of the default

calibration factor set provided by HYSYS.
To access the Factor Set property view:

1. Open the Calibration Set Library Property View.
• Click the Add button to create a new calibration factor
set.
• Select the calibration factor set you want to view in the
Available Calibration Factor Sets list and click the View/
Edit button.
• Select the calibration factor set you want to edit in the
Available Calibration Factor Sets list and click the Clone
button.
4-82
The Factor Set property view appears.
Figure 4.58
The options in the Factor Set property view is grouped into three
pages:
• Reactor
• Advanced
• Stabilizer
All three pages in the Factor Set property view contains the
following common options:
Object Description
Name field Enables you to specify the name of the calibration
factor set.
Description field Enables you to provide a brief description on the
4-83
Object Description
Date Created Displays the date and time when the calibration factor
field set was created.
Date Modified Displays the date and time when the calibration factor
field set was last modified.
Reactor Page
The Reactor page enables you to access the Reactor Factors
group and specify variable values associated to the reactor.
Figure 4.59
4-84
Advanced Page
The Advanced page enables you to access the Advanced Factors
group and specify variable values associated to the advanced
options.
Figure 4.60
Stabilizer Page
The Stabilizer page enables you to enables you to access the
Fractionator Cuts group and specify variable values associated
to the stabilizer tower.
The Stabilizer page is blank if the Catalytic Reformer does

not contain a stabilizer tower.
4-85
4-86 Calibration Property View
Figure 4.61
4.9 Calibration Property

View
The Calibration property view enables you to calibrate the
Catalytic Reformer.
Figure 4.62
4-86
The Calibration property view is only accessible in the

Calibration Environment.

the Calibration property view:
Object Description
Run Calibration Enables you to select one or more data set for the
button calibration run and access the Validation Wizard
feature.
This button is unavailable until all required data is
entered.
Data Set drop-down Enables you to select different data sets for
list entering the data or viewing the results for the
calibration or the prediction run.
Manage Data Sets Enables you to access the Data Set Manager
button Property View to manage the data set.
Push Data to Enables you to export input data from the current
Simulation button data set in the calibration property view to the
property view in the Catalytic Reformer
environment.
Any existing simulation data will be overwritten
with the current calibration data.
Pull Data from Enables you to import input data from the
Simulation button property view in the Catalytic Reformer
environment into the current data set in the
Calibration property view.
Any existing calibration data will be overwritten
with the current simulation data.
Return to Simulation Enables you to exit the Calibration environment
button and return to the Catalytic Reformer environment.
Status bar Displays the current status of the calibration/
prediction run.
Validation Wizard
When you click the Run Calibration button, HYSYS lets you
select the data set you want to use for the calibration run, and
validate the selected data set before the calibration is actually
run.
The Run Calibration button in the Calibration property view

is unavailable until all necessary calibration input is
complete.
4-87
Depending on how many data sets are available for the

calibration run one of the following property views appears when
you click the Run Calibration button:
• Select Data Sets for Calibration property view
• Validation Wizard property view
Select Data Sets for Calibration Property

View
This property view displays status and names of data sets
available with the calibration run.
Figure 4.63
The Select Data Sets for Calibration property view appears

only when there is more than one data set for the calibration
run.
Object Description
Include column Contains a checkbox that enables you to include or
exclude the data sets for the calibration run.
When a clear checkbox is selected, the Validation
Wizard property view appears.
Data Set Name Displays the name of the data sets available for the
column calibration run.
Status column Displays the status of the associate data set.
Run Calibration Enables you to run the calibration using the selected
button data set in the Select Data Sets for Calibration group.
This button is not active until you have selected and
validated a data set.
4-88
Object Description
Stop button Enables you to stop the calculation process during a
calibration run.
This button is only active during the calibration run
calculation.
Close button Enables you to close the Select Data Sets for
Calibration property view without performing any
calibration run.
Validation Wizard Property View

This property view displays the mass flows and hydrogen flows
of feed and product streams (derived from the input data).
Figure 4.64
If there is only one data set for the calibration run, the
Validation Wizard property view appears when you click the
Run Calibration button.
4-89
Object Description
Feed group Displays the following properties for the feed
streams of the data set:
• stream name
• mass flowrate
• total mass flowrate
• feed hydrogen
• total hydrogen
Mass and Hydrogen Displays the mass and hydrogen closure before
Balance group and after the product masses are adjusted.
Product group Displays the following properties for the product
streams of the data set:
• stream name
• measured mass flowrate
• adjusted mass flowrate
• measured hydrogen flow rate
• adjusted hydrogen flow rate
• total measured mass flowrate
• total adjusted mass flowrate
• total measured hydrogen flow rate
• total adjusted hydrogen flow rate
You can also assign or not assign bias to the
product stream by clicking the appropriate
checkbox in the Assign Bias column.
OK button Enables you to close the Validation Wizard
property view and accept the changes made in the
property view.
Cancel button Enables you to close the Validation Wizard
property view without accepting any changes
made in the property view.
The information displayed in the Validation Wizard property view

enables you to analyse the measurement data before accepting
the data set for the calibration run.
If the total product mass rate is greater than the total feed
mass rate by about 2-3%, you should review the flow rate
and gravity information of the products.
If you think the error is acceptable, you can decide how you
would like to distribute the mass imbalance by assigning the
bias to any of the product streams (except coke). Once the
bias is assigned, the Validation Wizard adjusts the mass flow
of the selected product stream(s) to match the feed total
mass flow by re-normalization.
4-90
Data Set Manager Property View

The Data Set Manager property view enables you to add,
modify, clone, delete, or rename the Catalytic Reformer data
sets associated to the calibration run.
Figure 4.65
Object Description
Available Data Sets Displays all the data sets available in the associate
list calibration/prediction run.
Add button Enables you to add a new data set to the
calibration/prediction run.
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected data set in the
Available Data Sets list.
Clone button Enables you to clone the selected data set in the
Rename button Enables you to rename the selected data set in the
4.9.1 Design Tab

The Design tab contains features used to configure the reactor
in the Catalytic Reformer operation. The features are grouped
into the following pages:
• Configuration
• Geometry
• Notes
4-91
Configuration Page
The Configuration page enables you to access the Reformer
Configuration Wizard and modify reactor type, number of
reactor beds, and whether the reactor contains a recontactor.
Figure 4.66
4-92
Geometry Page
For more information, The Geometry page enables you to specify detailed information/
refer to Geometry Page
section.
structure of the reactor beds and heaters.
Figure 4.67
Notes Page
4-93
4.9.2 Feed Data Tab

The Feed tab contains features used to configure and modify the
feed stream properties entering the FCC Reactor Section.

• Library
• Properties
Library Page
For more information, The Library page enables you to create, copy, modify, import,
refer to Library Page
section.
export, and delete feed data types entering the reactor
operation.
Figure 4.68
4-94
Properties Page
For more information, The Properties page enables you to specify properties for virtual
refer to Properties Page
section.
Figure 4.69
4.9.3 Operation Tab

operation parameters of the Catalytic Reformer operation.

• Feeds
• Reactor Control
• Catalyst
• Recontactor
• Product Heater
• Stabilizer
• Solver Options
• Solver Console
• Advanced
4-95
Feed Page
Refer to Feeds Page The Feeds page enables you to modify the physical properties of
section for more
Catalytic Reformer operation.
Figure 4.70
4-96

Refer to Reactor Control The Reactor Control page enables you to modify the variables
information. that control the reactor.
Figure 4.71
4-97
Catalyst Page
Refer to Catalyst Page The Catalyst page enables you to modify the catalyst properties
section for more
Figure 4.72
Recontactor Page
Refer to Recontactor The Recontactor page enables you to configure the recontactor
If the Catalytic Reformer does not contain a recontactor, the

Recontactor page will appear blank.
4-98
Figure 4.73
Product Heater Page

The Product Heater page enables you to modify the outlet
pressure, pressure difference, outlet temperature, and/or heater
duty.
Figure 4.74
4-99
Stabilizer Page
The Stabilizer page enables you to modify the feed temperature,
top vapour pressure, bottom pressure, and reboiler duty (if
applicable).
Figure 4.75
The Stabilizer page is blank if the Catalytic Reformer

configuration does not include a stabilizer.
4-100
Solver Options Page

Refer to Solver Options The Solver Options page enables you to modify the calculation
information. variables used to determine the reaction results of the reactor.
Figure 4.76
4-101
Solver Console Page

Refer to Solver Console The Solver Console page enables you to view the solver
information. message generated by the reactor and run script commands.
Figure 4.77
Advanced Page
The Advanced page enables you to view the detail parameters
that affect the performance of the Catalytic Reformer.
The information in the Advanced page are intended for

expert users who have detailed knowledge on the Catalytic
Reformer.
4-102
Figure 4.78
4.9.4 Measurement Tab

The Measurement tab contains features used to configure the
operations, manipulate the product streams, and analyse the
production measurement results.

• Operation
• Products
• Analysis
4-103
Operation Page
The Operation page enables you to modify the parameters of the
reactor, compressor, and recycle stream.
Figure 4.79

the Operation page:
Object Description
Inlet Pressure Enables you to modify the inlet pressure of the
column stream entering each reactor.
Pressure Drop Enables you to modify the pressure drop in each
column reactor.
Delta T Enables you to modify the temperature difference
in each reactor.
Discharge Pressure Enables you to modify the pressure of the stream
cell exiting the compressor.
Suction Pressure cell Enables you to modify the suction pressure of the
compressor.
4-104
Object Description
H2 Purity of Recycle Enables you to modify the purity of hydrogen in
cell the recycle stream.
Measured Octanes Enables you to modify the RON and MON values of
group the product stream for C5+ and C6+.
If you do not have values for the measured
octanes on a C5+ and C6+ basis, the model will
estimate values from the reformate values entered
in the Products page, Measurement tab. The
estimated values are displayed on the Analysis
page, Measurement tab.
Products Page
The Products page enables you to modify the product stream
parameters.
Figure 4.80

the Products page:
Object Description
Gas Rate row Enables you to modify the gas flow rate of the
applicable product stream.
Liquid Rate row Enables you to modify the liquid flow rate of the
4-105
Object Description
Mass Rate row Enables you to modify the mass flow rate of the
RON row Enables you to modify the RON (research octane
number) value of the applicable product stream.
MON row Enables you to modify the MON (motor octane
number) value of the applicable product stream.
Composition row Enables you to select the basis used to specify the
composition of the product stream. There are
three options:
• percentage in moles
• percentage in weight
• percentage in volume
component rows Enables you to modify the composition of the
product streams.
Analysis Page
The Analysis page enables you to view the analysis results of the
product measurement data.
Figure 4.81
The information is split into four groups:

• The Mass and Hydrogen Balances group displays the
mass flow rate and hydrogen flow rate for the feed
stream, product stream and closure.
4-106
• The Ring Generation group displays the flow rate for the
number of carbons in the feed and reformate stream,
and the percentage change between the two streams.
• The Light Ends Ratios group displays the molar flow rate
of the light end components in the product stream,
percentage value of the light ends in the product stream,
and the Iso to Normal butane ratio.
• The Estimated Octanes group displays octanes estimated
from the measured reformate on a C5+ and C6+ basis.
4.9.5 Calibration Control Tab

The Calibration Control tab contains features used to control the
calibration calculation.

• Parameter
• Objective Function
Parameter Page
The Parameter page enables you to modify the initial, lower
bound, and upper bound parameter value, and select which
parameters are used in calibrating the reactor model.
Figure 4.82
4-107

the Parameter page:
Object Description
First column Displays the list of available calibration parameters
for you to select and/or modify.
Included column Enables you to toggle between considering or
ignoring the calibration parameter by selecting or
clearing the appropriate checkboxes.
Initial Value column Enables you to modify the initial value of the
calibration parameters.
Lower Bound column Enables you to specify the lower bound value of
the calibration parameters.
Upper Bound column Enables you to specify the upper bound value of
the calibration parameters.
HYSYS provides default factor set values for the initial values
of the parameters (in the Initial Value column).
Objective Function Page

The Objective Function page enables you to construct the
objective function for the calibration.
Figure 4.83
4-108
The first column contains the list of available variables for the
calibration objective function and the second column enables
you to specify the sigma value for each variables.
4.9.6 Analysis Tab

The Analysis tab displays the calculated results of the
calibration.
The calibration results are grouped into the following pages:

• Calibration Factors
• Mass Balance
• Summary
• Feed Blend
• Product Yields
• Reactors
• Heater
• Recontactor
• Stabilizer
• Product Streams
4-109
Calibration Factors Page

Refer to Section 4.9.5 - The Calibration Factors page enables you to save, export, and
Calibration Control Tab
for more information on
edit the current calibration factor set in the calibration run.
the Parameter and
Objective Function Figure 4.84
pages.
The Calibration Factors page also contains two groups:

• The Parameter group displays the whether the variable
was used as a reconciliation variable in the calibration,
the initial and final values of the variable and the upper
and lower bounds used for the reconciliation variables.
• The Objective Function group displays the sigma used for
each term in the objective function, the measured value,
the model value and the delta (model - measured) value.
4-110
Save Calibration Factor Set

To save the current calibration factors:
1. Click the Save for Simulation button.
The Save for Simulation button is activated only when the

calibration of the current set (as indicated in the Data Set
drop-down list) is successfully completed.
The Save Calibration Factor Set property view appears.
Figure 4.85
2. Enter a name of the calibration factor set in the Set Name

field.
To export the current calibration factor set values into the
simulation environment, select the Use this set for current
simulation checkbox.
3. Click OK.
Export Calibration Factor Set

To export the calibration factor set into a file:
1. Click the Export button.
The Export button is activated only when the calibration of

the current set (as indicated in the Data Set drop-down list)
is successfully completed.
4-111
The File selection for exporting Factor Sets property view

appears.
Figure 4.86
2. Use the Save in drop-down list to select the location and

folder for the exported calibration factor set file.
3. Enter the name of the calibration factor set file in the File
name field.
The calibration factor set data is saved as a *.csv file.
4. Click Save.
Modify Calibration Factor Set

To modify the current calibration factor set:
1. Click the Calibration Factors Library button.
The Calibration Set Library Property View appears.
2. In the Calibration Set Library property view, select the
calibration factor set you want to modify.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining automatically assigns the

following name to the current calibration factor set “Set-n”,
where n is an integer number.
4-112
3. Click the Edit button to open the Factor Set Property

View.
The Calibration Set Library also enables you to add, delete,
clone, import, and export calibration factor sets.
4. In the Factor Set property view, make the modifications and
accept the modified values by closing the property view.
Mass Balance Page

The Mass Balance page displays the calculated flow rate of the
feed and product streams, and the mass and hydrogen balance.
Figure 4.87
4-113
Summary Page
The Summary page displays the calculated values of the WAIT,
yields and RON of the octane and reformate, recycle H2
properties, Hydrogen yield properties, and aromatic yield
properties.
Figure 4.88
4-114
Feed Blend Page

of the feed stream from the calibration run.
Figure 4.89
4-115
Product Yields Page

the product stream from the calibration run.
Figure 4.90
4-116
Reactors Page
For more information, The Reactors page displays the key simulation results of the
refer to Reactors Page
section. riser and reactor from the calibration run.
Figure 4.91
4-117
Heater Page
The Heater page displays the calculated results of the heater
parameters from the calibration run.
Figure 4.92
4-118
Recontactor Page
For more information, The Recontactor page displays calculated results of the
refer to Recontactor
Page section. recontactor from the calibration run.
Figure 4.93

4-119
Stabilizer Page
The Stabilizer page displays the calculated results of the
stabilizer from the calibration run.
Figure 4.94
If the Catalytic Reformer does not contain a stabilizer, then

the Stabilizer page appears blank.
4-120

stream from the calibration run.
Figure 4.95
4-121
4-122
Hydrocracker 5-1
5 Hydrocracker
5.1 Introduction................................................................................... 3
5.1.1 Feed Characterization System .................................................... 3
5.1.2 Reaction Kinetics...................................................................... 6
5.2 Overall Operation Structure/Environment ................................... 17

5.2.1 Main Environment .................................................................. 18
5.2.2 HCR Environment ................................................................... 21
5.3 HCR Configuration Wizard............................................................ 23

5.3.1 Configuration Page ................................................................. 24
5.3.2 Geometry Page ...................................................................... 26
5.3.3 Calibration Factors Page .......................................................... 27
5.4 HCR Property View....................................................................... 28

5.4.1 Design Tab ............................................................................ 29
5.4.2 Reactor Section Tab ................................................................ 31
5.4.3 Fractionator Tab ..................................................................... 39
5.4.4 Results Tab............................................................................ 41
5.5 Feed Type Library Property View ................................................. 46
5.6 HCR Reactor Section Property View ............................................. 48

5.6.1 Design Tab ............................................................................ 49
5.6.2 FeedData Tab......................................................................... 51
5.6.3 Operation Tab ........................................................................ 53
5.6.4 Results Tab............................................................................ 59
5.7 Calibration Set Library Property View .......................................... 63

5.7.1 Factor Set Property View ......................................................... 64
5-1
5-2 Hydrocracker
5.8 Results Property View ..................................................................67

5.8.1 Feed Blend Page .....................................................................67
5.8.2 Product Yields Page .................................................................68
5.8.3 Product Properties Page ...........................................................69
5.8.4 Reactor Page ..........................................................................69
5.8.5 Hydrogen System Page ............................................................70
5.8.6 Hydrogen Balance Page ...........................................................70
5.9 Calibration Property View..............................................................71

5.9.1 Design Tab............................................................................76
5.9.2 Feed Data Tab.......................................................................79
5.9.3 Operation Tab..........................................................................87
5.9.4 Operation Measure Tab .............................................................95
5.9.5 Product Measure Tab ................................................................96
5.9.6 Calibration Control Tab............................................................101
5.9.7 Analysis Tab ..........................................................................102
5.10 References................................................................................113
5-2
Hydrocracker 5-3
5.1 Introduction
The Hydrocracker model in Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining is a
state-of-the-art Hydrocracker Unit simulation system that can
be used for modeling a single-stage, two-stage Unicracker, or
two-stage Isocracker hydrocracker unit as a standalone unit
operation or as part of a refinery-wide flowsheet. The
Hydrocracker unit operation includes feed characterization
system, reactor section, recycle gas loop(s), product separation,
and product mapper. The reactor model is based on rigorous
kinetics. The feed characterization system and product mapper
are designed to work together with the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining assay system so the Hydrocracker model can be
simulated in a refinery-wide flowsheet.
5.1.1 Feed Characterization

System
For more information The Hydrocracker within Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining has
about the Hydrocracker
its own set of library and hypothetical components. The
subflowsheet, refer to
Section 5.2.2 - HCR following is the component list for the Hydrocracker
Environment. subflowsheet:
Nitrogen C9A* MAN2HI* HNNITA2* IC9-2*
H2S C10A* HN1* HA4* NC10*
Hydrogen LTHA* HA1* C47P* NC11*
Ammonia MBNITN* MTHA2* VN1* NC12*
Methane MBNITA* HN2* VA1* NC14*
Ethane MTHN* HN3* VN2* NC16*
Propane MTHA* HN4* VN3* C10N-1*
C4* MS12* MA2NHI* VN4* C10N-2*
C5* MNNITA* HAN* VAN* C12N*
C6P* MN3LO* MANAHI* VBNITA2N* C14N*
C6N* MANLO* HA2* VA2* C16N*
5-3
5-4 Introduction
C6A* MA2LO* HAN2* VTHA2N* C12A*
C7P* MAN2LO* C26P* VAN2* C14A*
C7N* C18P* HAN3* VAN3* C16A*
C7A* MA2NLO* HA2N* VA2N* IC10*
LTH* MN1HI* HANA* VANA* IC11*
LBNIT* MA1HI* HA2N2* VA2N2* IC12*
C8P* MANALO* HA3* VA3* IC14*
C8N* MN2HI* HTHAN* VA4* IC16*
LNNIT* MN3HI* HBNITAN* VNNITA3* 12N2*
C8A* MANHI* HS28* VTHA3* 14N2*
C9N* MTHAN* HTHA2* NC9* 16N2*
LS8* MA2HI* HBNITA2* IC9-1*
Below is a legend to help you decode the meaning of the above

list:
• For components starting with C, the number beside the C
indicates the carbon number of the component. These
components end in P, N, or A indicating whether they are
paraffins, naphthenes, or aromatics.
There are two isomers for C10N.
• For components starting with NC, they are normal

paraffins. The number beside the C indicates the number
of carbon atoms.
• For components starting with IC, they are isoparaffins.
The number beside the C indicates the number of carbon
atoms.
• For components ending in N2, they are two ring
naphthenic compounds. The prefix number indicates the
number of carbon atoms.
• For components starting with L, they boil in the gasoline
range.
• For components starting with M, they boil in the distillate
range.
For these components with LO ending, they boil toward
the beginning of the distillate temperature range.
For these components with HI ending, they boil toward
5-4
Hydrocracker 5-5
the end of the distillate temperature range.

• For components starting with H, they boil in the gas-oil
range.
• For components starting with V, they boil in the vacuum
resid range.
• A Th in the component indicates a thiophene ring.
• A BNit indicates a ring structure containing a basic
nitrogen.
• An NNit indicates a ring structure containing a non-basic
nitrogen.
• An N followed by a number indicates the number of
naphthenic rings in a component.
• An A followed by a number indicates the number of
aromatic rings in a component.
• An ANA indicates two aromatic rings separated by a
naphthenic ring.
• An S in a compound indicates a sulfidic structure followed
by a number indicating the number of carbon atoms.
• Medium (M) components ending with LO have 14 carbon
atoms, medium components ending with HI have 18
carbon atoms.
• Heavy (H) components have 21 carbon atoms.
• Vacuum Resid (V) components have 47 carbon atoms.
These components are either used directly in the kinetic reactor

model or mapped into the components used within the kinetic
reactor model.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining provides a transition command

between the main flowsheet environment and the Hydrocracker
subflowsheet environment to handle the calculation of the
composition of the Hydrocracker components. In order to use
the transition command, you must specify a feed type. The feed
type will specify a base composition of components in the kinetic
reactor model basis. This base fingerprint, along with the
distillation, gravity, sulfur content, nitrogen and basic nitrogen
content, and bromine number can be used to generate the
composition of the kinetic lumps used by the model.
In the Hydrocracker subflowsheet environment, you have more

options for calculating the composition of the feed. For example,
you can calculate the composition based on a boiling range of an
assay by specifying bulk properties or by specifying the kinetic
lumps.
5-5
5-6 Introduction
• For the assay option, you can select an assay to be

associated with the feed. The feed type is specified along
with the initial and final boiling point to generate a
composition of the feed.
• For the bulk properties option, you can specify the feed
type along with distillation data, gravity, sulfur content,
nitrogen and basic nitrogen content, and bromine
number. You can optionally input data for refractive
index, viscosity, and Ca content.
• For the kinetic lumps option, you can specify the feed
type along with the composition of the components that
is desired. You can also enter a bromine number to
generate the inlet composition of olefins in the feed.
5.1.2 Reaction Kinetics

The reactor model in the Hydrocracker model in Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining is based on rigorous kinetics. There are 97
components in the reaction network and 177 reaction pathways.
The components and reaction networks are consistent with
typical Hydrocracking reactions.
Components
The component slate chosen to represent the feed and the
product streams of the Hydrocracker plant is comprised of 116
components covering the full range from hydrogen to
hydrocarbons with 47 carbon atoms (B.P. 1300 C).
In the reactor model, the 19 olefin components are assumed to

be completely saturated in the first reactor bed. These olefins
are saturated in an Aspen extended reaction block before the
kinetic model for the first reactor bed. The Aspen extended
reaction block calculates the enthalpy of reaction for the olefin
saturation. This heat is distributed through the first reactor bed.
This method reduces the number of components throughout the
reactor section in order to improve the model performance.
• The Component Slate for the Hydrocracker Reactor
Model table shows the corresponding components in the
reactor model. The total number of components in the
reactor model is 97.
5-6
Hydrocracker 5-7
• The Component Slate for Hydrocracker Model only

in the feed table shows the corresponding olefin
components in the feed but not in the reactor model.
The light ends will be defined using discrete components

through C3. For C4 to C10 hydrocarbons, one pure component is
used to represents several isomers. For example, the n-butane
represents both n-butane and iso-butane. For higher boiling
point components, only compounds with carbon number 14, 18,
26, and 47 are used to represent a wide range of boiling point
components.
The components also cover different classes of hydrocarbons

that include one-ring naphthenics to 4-ring aromatics.
The 13 sulfur components are separated into 8 groups:

thiophenes, sulfides, benzothiophenes, tetrahydro-
benzothiophenes, dibenzothiophenes, tetrahydro-
dibenzothiophenes, naphthabenzothiophenes, and tetrahydro-
naphthabenzothiophenes.
The nitrogen compounds are represented by 10 components

that include both basic and non-basic nitrogen compound.
Component Slate for the Hydrocracker Reactor Model
Component Formula Abbreviation Class

Nitrogen N2 N2
Ammonia NH3 NH3
Hydrogen Sulfide H2S H2S
Hydrogen H2 H2
Paraffins
Methane CH4 C1 CnH2n+2
Ethane C2H6 C2
Propane C3H8 C3
N-Butane C4H10_2 C4
N-pentane C5H12_2 C5
2,3-dimethylbutane C6H14_2 C6P
2,3-dimethylpentane C7H16_5 C7P
2,3-dimethylhexane C8H18_6 C8P
2,6-dimethylheptane C9H20_4 C9P
5-7
5-8 Introduction

2,5-dimethyloctane C10H22-1 C10P
n-tetradecane C14H30 C14P
n-octadecane C18H38 C18P
Tetracosane C26H54 C26P
C47 Paraffins C47H96 C47P
Naphthenes
Methylcyclopentane C6H12-2 C6N CnH2n
Methylcyclohexane C7H14-6 C7N
Cyclohexane, 1,4- C8H16-7 C8N
dimethyl
1-trans-3,5- C9H18-1 C9N
trimethylcyclohexane
C14-1-ring-cycloheaxane C14H28 MN1Lo
C18-1-ring-cycloheaxane C18H36 MN1Hi
C21-1-ring-cycloheaxane C21H42 HN1
C47-1-ring-cycloheaxane C47H94 VN1
Trans-decaline (two C10H18-2 C10N CnH2n-2
Ring)
C14-2-ring-cyclohexane C14H26 MN2LO
C18-2-ring-cycloheaxane C18H34 MN2HI
C14-3-ring-cyclohexane C14H24 MN3Lo CnH2n-4
C18-3-ring-cycloheaxane C18H32 MN3Hi
C21-4-ring-cycloheaxane C21H36 HN4 CnH2n-6
Aromatics
Benzene C6H6 C6A CnH2n-6
Toluene C7H8 C7A
Para Xylene C8H10_3 C8A
2-methyl-3- C8H12-3 C9A
ethylbenzene
1,2,3,4,- C10H12 C10A
tetrahydronaphthalene
n-octylbenzene C14H22 MA1Lo
C18-1ring-Arom C18H30 MA1Hi
C21-1ring-Arom C21H36 HA1
C47-1ring-Arom C47H88 VA1
C14- C14H20 MANLo CnH2n-8
5-8
Hydrocracker 5-9

C18- C18H28 MANHi
C21- C21H34 HAN
C47- C47H86 VAN
C14-naphthalene C14H16 MA2Lo CnH2n-12
C18-naphthalene C18H24 MA2Hi
C21-naphthalene C21H30 HA2
C47-naphthalene C47H82 VA2
C14-1 ring-Arom-2-ring C14H18 MAN2Lo CnH2n-10
Naphthene
C18-1 ring-Arom-2-ring C18H26 MAN2Hi
Naphthene
C21-1 ring-Arom-2-ring C21H32 HAN2
Naphthene
C47-1 ring-Arom-2-ring C47H32 VAN2
Naphthene
C14-2 ring-Arom-1-ring C14H14 MA2NLO CnH2n-14
Naphthene
C18-2 ring-Arom-1-ring C18H22 MA2NHi
Naphthene
C21-2 ring-Arom-1-ring C21H28 HA2N
Naphthene
C47-2 ring-Arom-1-ring C47H80 VA2N
Naphthene
C21-3ring-Arom C21H24 HA3 CnH2n-18
Fluorene, 9-methyl C14H12 MANALo CnH2n-16
C18H20 MANAHi
C21H26 HANA
C47H78 VANA
C21-4ring-Arom C21H18 HA4 CnH2n-24
C21-1 ring-Arom-3-ring C21H30 HAN3 CnH2n-12
Naphthene
C47-1 ring-Arom-3-ring C47H82 VAN3
Naphthene
C21-2 ring-Arom-2-ring C21H24 HA2N2 CnH2n-18
Naphthene
C47-2 ring-Arom-2-ring C47H76 VA2N2
Naphthene
Sulfur Components
Thiophene C4H4S LTH
5-9
5-10 Introduction

C8-Cyclo-sulfide C8H16S LS8
C12-Cyclo-sulfide C12H24S MS12
C28-Cyclo-sulfide C28H56S HS28
Benzothiophene C8H6S LTHA
Benzothiophene, C10H10S MTHA
dimethyl-
C10-tetarhydro- C10H12S MTHN
benzothiophene
C14-trtrahydro- C14H16S MTHAN
dibenzothiophene
C21-trtrahydro- C21H30S HthAN
dibenzothiophene
C14- dibenzothiophene C14H12S MthA2
C21- dibenzothiophene C21H26S HthA2
C47-tetrahydro- C47H84S VthA2N
naphthabenzothiophene
C47- C47H72S2 VTHA3
naphthabenzothiophene
Nitrogen Components
Pyrrolidine (non-basic C4H9N LBNit
Nitrogen)
Pyrrole (basic nitrogen) C4H5N LNNit
Quinoline, 1,2,3,4- C9H11N MBNITN
tetrahydro- (non-basic)
Quinoline (basic) C9H7N MBNITA
C9H9N MNNitA
Phenanthridine, C21H33N HBNitAN
tetrahydro-
Phenanthridine C21H25N MBNitA2
Carbazole, dimethyl- C21H27N MNNitA2
C35H55N VBNitA2N
C47H73N VNNitA3
Component Slate for Hydrocracker Model only in the feed
Component Formula Abbreviation

C6H12 C6-olef
C7H14 C7-olef
C8H16 C8_OLEF
Cumene C8H8 C8A_OLEF
C10H20 C10_OLEF
5-10
Hydrocracker 5-11
Component Formula Abbreviation

C10H16 C10N_OLE
C10H10 C10A_OLE
C14H28 C14_OLEF
C14H26 MN1Lo_OL
C14H20 MA1Lo_OL
C18H36 C18_OLEF
C18H34 MN1Hi_OL
C18H28 MA1Hi_OL
C21H40 HN1_OLEF
C21H34 HA1_OLEF
C26H52 C26_OLEF
C47H94 C47_OLEF
C47H92 VN1_OLEF
C47H86 VA1_OLEF
Reaction Paths
The Hydrocracker model in Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
includes the following reaction types:
• Hydrodesulfurization (HDS)
• Hydrodenitrogenation (HDN)
• Saturation of aromatics (Hydrogenation)
• Ring opening
• Ring dealkylation
• Paraffin hydrocracking
• Saturation of olefins
Saturation of olefin reaction calculations are done in a
separate Aspen extended reaction block before the
stream flows into bed 1. In the reactor bed 1, the heat of
reaction calculated for the olefin saturation reactions is
distributed through the bed.
The Hydrocracker reaction scheme has the following important

characteristics:
• 45 reversible aromatics saturation reactions
• 19 irreversible olefins saturation reactions
• Saturation and dealkylation of non-basic nitrogen lumps
• Dealkylation and HDN for basic nitrogen lumps
• Saturation and dealkylation for hindered sulfur lumps
5-11
5-12 Introduction
• Dealkylation and HDS for unhindered sulfur lumps
The figure below shows the importance of modeling aromatics

saturation reversible.
Figure 5.1
Hydrocracker Example for Aromatics Crossover
Above a certain temperature, equilibrium effects start to out-

weigh kinetic effects, and additional saturation becomes
difficult. This temperature-dependent aromatics crossover
causes the degradation of middle distillate properties - kerosene
smoke point and diesel cetane - near the end of hydrocracker
catalyst cycles.
5-12
Hydrocracker 5-13
The figure below illustrates the importance of including both

hindered and unhindered sulfur components in the reaction
scheme.
Figure 5.2
Reaction Pathway Illustration: Sulfur-Containing Components
As discussed in recent publications:

• aliphatic sulfur compounds are relatively easy to remove
with hydroprocessing
• thiophenes, benzothiophenes, and dibenzopthiopenes
are somewhat more difficult
• substituted benzo- and dibenzothiophenes are very hard
to remove.
In the Direct Mechanism for the hydrodesulfurization of

dibenzothiophene:
• Dibenzothiophene adsorbs to the catalyst surface
• The catalyst abstracts sulfur
• Biphenyl desorbs from the catalyst surface
• Hydrogen removes sulfur from the catalyst as H2S
Alkyl substitution of dibenzothiophene at the 4-position, the 6-

position - or both - sterically hinders this pathway. Before these
hindered molecules can be desulfurized, they must first be
saturated (which converts a planar aromatic ring into a more
flexible saturated ring) or dealkylated.
5-13
5-14 Introduction
As shown in the previous figure, the reaction scheme for the

Hydrocracker in Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining prohibits
direct desulfurization of 4,6-alkyl dibenzothiophenes. The figure
below reflects this feature of the models.
Figure 5.3
Hydrocracker Example of H2 Consumption vs. Product Sulfur
As the extent of desulfurization increases, hydrogen

consumption rises geometrically, in part because the model
requires alternative HDS pathways for substituted
dibenzothiophenes, and in part because at the higher required
temperatures other saturation and cracking reactions are
accelerated.
Reaction Kinetic Expression

Rate equations are based on the Langmiur-Hinshelwood
(adsorption-adsorption/reaction/ desorption) mechanism. H2S
inhibits HDS reactions, and both NH3 and organic nitrogen
inhibit acid-catalysed reactions. For each reaction type, an
adsorption term is calculated as a multiplier for the rate
expression. Each reaction type is first order with respect to the
hydrocarbon and each reaction type has a unique order for
hydrogen. There are also a set of activity factors that affect
various reactions based on the type of reaction and the boiling
point of the component.
5-14
Hydrocracker 5-15
Activity Class Description

SAT Overall saturation activity
HSAT Bottoms saturation activity
MSAT Distillation saturation activity
LSAT Naphtha saturation activity
HDS Overall hydro-desulfurization activity
HHDS Bottoms hydro-desulfurization activity
MHDS Distillate hydro-desulfurization activity
LHDS Naphtha hydro-desulfurization activity
HDN Overall hydro-denitrogenation activity
HHDN Bottoms hydro-denitrogenation activity
LHDN Naphtha hydro-denitrogenation activity
PCR Overall paraffin cracking activity
HPCR Bottoms paraffin cracking activity
MPCR Distillate paraffin cracking activity
LPCR Naphtha paraffin cracking activity
RDA Overall ring dealkylation activity
HRDA Bottoms ring dealkylation activity
MRDA Distillate ring dealkylation activity
LRDA Naphtha ring dealkylation activity
For example, the rate expression for hydro-denitrogenation of

LNNIT would have the following form:
[ LNNIT ]- = ACT × ADS

d------------------------- n (5.1)
NIT × k f × [ LNNIT ] × [ H 2 ]
dt
where:
[LNNIT] = Concentration of LNNIT
ACT = Total activity for the reaction

This is a product of each activity that affects the
reaction. In this case, the activities affecting the
reaction are the HDN and LHDN.
ADSNIT = LHHW Adsorption term
[H2] = Hydrogen concentration
n = Power for H2 for denitrogenation reactions

This value is unique for each reaction type.
5-15
5-16 Introduction
Deactivation of Hydrocracker
Catalyst
The Hydrocracker model includes a deactivation model which
allows the model to predict the number of days remaining in a
catalyst cycle. The deactivation is a function of the severity, the
amount of multi-ring aromatics in the feed, and the H2 partial
pressure of the system. The user specifies the number of days in
service and the weight average boiling point (WABP) for the end
of the cycle.
System Pressure Control

For the Hydrocracker in Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining, the
user always specifies the High Pressure Separator pressure and
the pressure for the recycle gas loop compressors. The
pressures are calculated backwards from the High Pressure
Separator based on specified pressure difference.
Reactor Temperature Control

The Hydrocracker model in Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
allows the user to control the severity of the reactors in a
variety of ways:
• Specify the inlet temperature for each reactor bed.
• Specify the outlet temperature for each reactor bed.
• Specify the WABT (weight average bed temperature) for
each reactor bed.
• Specify the WART (weight average reactor temperature)
for each reactor and the temperature difference rise
between each bed within each reactor.
The nitrogen in the effluent from reactor 1 can be used
instead of the WART for reactor 1. Similarly, the
conversion and bottoms flow can be used instead of the
WART's for reactors 2 and 3.
5-16
Hydrocracker 5-17
5.2 Overall Operation

Structure/Environment
In HYSYS, the Hydrocracker operation appears as an object icon
in the Main environment PFD.
Figure 5.4
The Hydrocracker operation is actually a subflowsheet (HCR

Environment) containing the required reactor and fractionator
(if applicable) that make up a hydrocracker.
Figure 5.5
5-17
5.2.1 Main Environment

In the Simulation/Main environment, the following features are
available for the Hydrocracker:
• create a Hydrocracker template
• create or add a Hydrocracker
• access Hydrocracker (HCR) property view
• access HCR environment/subflowsheet
• delete existing Hydrocracker
Create Hydrocracker Template

HYSYS enables you to create templates of Hydrocracker
operations, so you can import them in existing HYSYS process
flowsheet diagram (PFD).
To create a Hydrocracker template:

1. Select File | New | Hydrocracker in the menu bar.
The HCR Configuration Wizard property view appears.
HYSYS automatically creates a Hydrocracker fluid package

with predetermined component list for the Hydrocracker
template.
2. In the first page of the HCR Configuration Wizard property

view, you can configure the design of the Hydrocracker.
3. Click Next.
4. In the second page of the HCR Configuration Wizard
property view, you can specify the reactor parameters.
5. Click Next.
6. In the third and final page of the HCR Configuration Wizard
property view, you can select or specify a set of calibration
factors.
7. Click Done.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining completes the
Hydrocracker subflowsheet, based on the specified
information from the HCR Configuration Wizard, and opens
the HCR environment.
5-18
Hydrocracker 5-19
8. In the HCR environment, you can:

• Access and modify the reactor by double-clicking the
reactor object icon in the HCR PFD.
• Access and modify the fractionator by double-clicking on
the fractionator object icon in the HCR PFD.
• Access the Calibration environment and calibrate the
HCR model.
9. In the menu bar, select File | Save As or File | Save
command to save the Hydrocracker template as a *.hcr file.
Create/Add Hydrocracker
To add a Hydrocracker into a PFD:
1. Open the appropriate simulation case.
2. Open the UnitOps property view.
3. In the Categories group, select the Refinery Ops radio
button.
4. In the Available Unit Operations group, select HCR Reactor
and click Add.
The HCR Template Option property view appears
5. In the HCR Template Option property view, do one of the
following:
• Click Read an Existing HCR Template to add a
Hydrocracker operation based on an existing template.
The Hydrocracker operation appears on the PFD.
• Click Configure a New HCR Unit to add a Hydrocracker
operation and configure it from scratch.
The HCR Configuration Wizard property view appears,
and you have to configure the basic structure of the
Hydrocracker operation using the features available in
the HCR Configuration Wizard. After you have specified
the minimum information required, the Hydrocracker
operation appears on the PFD.
6. Open the Hydrocracker property view and make the
necessary changes/specifications/connections for the
simulation case.
5-19
Access HCR Property View

To open the Hydrocracker (HCR) property view, do one of the
following:
• On the PFD property view, right-click the Hydrocracker
operation icon and select View Properties command
from the Object Inspect menu.
select the Hydrocracker under the Name column, and
click the View UnitOp button.
• On the Object Navigator property view, select UnitOps
radio button in the Filter group, select the applicable
flowsheet in the Flowsheet group, select the
Hydrocracker operation in the Unit Operations group, and
click the View button.
Access HCR Environment

To access the Hydrocracker subflowsheet (HCR environment):
1. In the Main PFD, open the HCR property view.
2. In the HCR property view, click the HCR Environment
button.
Delete Hydrocracker Operation

To delete an existing Hydrocracker operation, do one of the
following:
• On the PFD property view, select the Hydrocracker
operation icon and press DELETE.
• On the PFD property view, right-click the Hydrocracker
operation icon and select Delete command from the
Object Inspect menu.
• On the HCR property view, click the Delete button.
select the Hydrocracker under the Name column, and
click the Delete UnitOp button.
5-20
Hydrocracker 5-21
5.2.2 HCR Environment

In the HCR environment, the following features are available for
the Hydrocracker:
• access the individual operation property views that make
up the Hydrocracker operation
• access HCR Configuration Wizard
• select calibration factor set
• access Results property view
Access Operation Property View

1. In the HCR environment, open the PFD property view.
2. On the PFD, do one of the following:
• Double-click on the operation’s icon.
• Right-click on the operation’s icon and select View
Properties command in the object inspect menu.
Access HCR Configuration Wizard

To access the HCR Configuration Wizard, do one of the
following:
• In the HCR environment, select HCR | Configuration
Wizard command in the menu bar.
• Open the HCR Reactor Section property view, click the
Design tab, select the Configuration page, and click
the Configuration Wizard button.
5-21
Select Calibration Factor Set

To select the Calibration Factor Set for the Hydrocracker
operation:
1. Select HCR| Calibration Factor command from the menu
bar.
The Calibration Factor Set property view appears.
Figure 5.6
2. Open the Select a calibration factor set to use for

simulation drop-down list and select a calibration factor
set.
You can click the Library button to open the Calibration
Set Library Property View to create, clone, and modify a
Access Results Property View

To access the Results property view, select HCR | Results
command in the menu bar. The Results property view displays
the Hydrocracker simulation summary.
5-22
Hydrocracker 5-23
5.3 HCR Configuration

Wizard
The HCR Configuration Wizard enables you to quickly set up the
Hydrocracker operation.
The HCR Configuration Wizard is made up of three sequential

pages. You are required to enter information in a page, then
move on to the next page in order.
The following table lists the common buttons available at the

bottom of the HCR Configuration Wizard property view:
Button Description
Next> Enables you to move forward to the next page.
<Prev Enables you to move backward to the previous page.
Cancel Enables you to exit the HCR Configuration Wizard without
saving any changes or creating a Hydrocracker operation.
Close Enables you to exit the HCR Configuration Wizard and keep any
specifications or changes made to the Hydrocracker operation.
Done Enables you to exit the HCR Configuration Wizard and finish
configuring the Hydrocracker operation.
To access the HCR Configuration Wizard:

1. In the HYSYS desktop menu bar, select FILE | New | HCR
command.
HYSYS automatically completes the Simulation Basis
environment specifications and then enters the Simulation
environment.
or
1. In the Main Environment, press the F12 to open the
UnitOps property view.
2. In the Available Unit Operations group, select Hydrocracker
and click Add.
The HCR Template Option property view appears.
3. Click the Configure a New HCR Unit button.
5-23
5-24 HCR Configuration Wizard
or
1. In the HCR Environment, select HCR | Configuration
Wizard command from the menu bar.
or
1. In the HCR Reactor Section Property View, click the
Design tab and select the Configuration page.
5.3.1 Configuration Page

The Configuration page (first page) of the HCR Configuration
Wizard property view enables you to specify the configuration of
the Hydrocracker.
Object Description
Basic Configuration Contains two radio buttons that enables you to
group select a single or two stage Hydrocracker unit
operation.
Number of Reactors Enables you to select the number of reactors per
drop-down list stage in the Hydrocracker.
Number of Treating Enables you to select the number of treating beds
Beds drop-down list per stage in the Hydrocracker.
Number of beds row Enables you to select the number of beds per
reactor in the Hydrocracker.
Number of high Enables you to select the number of separators in
pressure separators the Hydrocracker.
drop-down list
Include amine Enables you to toggle between including or
scrubber checkbox excluding amine scrubber to the separator in the
Hydrocracker.
Naphtha Cuts drop- Enables you to select the number of naphtha cuts
down list in the separator.
Distillation Cuts Enables you to select the number of distillation
drop-down list cuts in the separator.
Cut column Displays and enables you to modify the names of
the cuts in the separator.
Recycle column Enables you to toggle between including or
excluding a recycle stream to the cut.
5-24
Hydrocracker 5-25
Object Description
PA column Enables you to toggle between including or
excluding a pump around to the cut.
Side Stripper column Enables you to toggle between adding or removing
a side stripper to the cut.
Energy column Enables you to select the type of heat transfer
method (reboiled or steam stripped) used in the
side stripper.
The drop-down list is only available in this column
for cuts with side stripper.
Figure 5.7
5-25
5-26 HCR Configuration Wizard
5.3.2 Geometry Page

The Geometry page (second page) of the HCR Configuration
Wizard property view enables you to specify the internal
diameter, catalyst load, catalyst density, and bed voidage for the
beds in each reactor.
Figure 5.8
5-26
Hydrocracker 5-27
5.3.3 Calibration Factors Page

The Calibration Factors page (third page) of the HCR
Configuration Wizard property view enables you to select or
specify a calibration factor.
Figure 5.9
Object Description
Use an existing set of Enables you to activate the feature used to select
calibration factors an existing calibration factor set.
radio button
Drop-down list Enables you to select an existing calibration factor
set. The default selection is the default calibration
factor set provided by HYSYS.
Library button Enables you to access the Calibration Set
Library Property View.
5-27
5-28 HCR Property View
5.4 HCR Property View

The Hydrocracker (HCR) property view contains features used to
manipulate the overall Hydrocracker operation and enable you
to enter the HCR environment.
To access the HCR property view:

1. In the Main environment, open the PFD property view.
2. In the PFD property view, double-click on the Hydrocracker
object icon.
Figure 5.10

the HCR property view:
Object Description
Delete button Enables you to delete the Hydrocracker operation.
HCR Environment Enables you to enter the HCR Environment.
button
Status bar Displays the status of the Hydrocracker operation.
Ignore checkbox Enables HYSYS to ignore the Hydrocracker
operation during the process flowsheet calculation.
5-28
Hydrocracker 5-29
5.4.1 Design Tab

The Design tab contains features used to configure the overall
structure of the Hydrocracker operation.

• Connections
• Tuning Factors
• Notes
Connections Page
The Connections page enables you to configure the stream
flowing into and out of the Hydrocracker and specify the name of
the Hydrocracker unit operation.
Figure 5.11
Object Description
Hydrogen Enables you to select or specify the hydrogen makeup
Makeup table stream flowing into the stages of the Hydrocracker.
Fractionated Enables you to specify or connect the product stream
Products table from the Hydrocracker subflowsheet to the external
product streams of the main flowsheet.
This table is only available if the Hydrocracker
operation contains a fractionator.
5-29
Object Description
Reactor Effluent Enables you to specify or connect the reactor effluent
table stream from the Hydrocracker subflowsheet to an
external stream in the main flowsheet.
This table is not available if the Hydrocracker contains
a fractionator.
Name field Enables you to modify the name of the Hydrocracker
unit operation.
Feed Type Enables you to access the Feed Type Library
Library button Property View and modify the feed type available for
the Hydrocracker.
Feeds table Enables you to select or specify the feed stream
flowing into the Hydrocracker. You can also select the
feed type of the feed stream.
Recycle Gas Enables you to specify or connect the purge stream
Purge table from the hydrocracker subflowsheet to the external
purge streams of the main flowsheet.
Tuning Factors Page

The Tuning Factors page enables you to create, edit, view, and
apply a calibration factor set to the Hydrocracker.
Figure 5.12
5-30
Hydrocracker 5-31
Object Description
Calibration Factor Enables you to select and apply a calibration factor
Set drop-down list set to the Hydrocracker.
Initially, Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
provides a default calibration factor set. The
calibration factors in the default set are read
only.
If you want to manipulate the factor values, you
have to create your own calibration factor set.
Calibration Factors Enables you to access the Calibration Set
Library button Library Property View.
The Calibration Set Library property view enables
you to create, import, clone, edit, export, and
delete a calibration factor set.
Reactor Section table Displays the following calibration factors:
• Global activity
• HDS activity
• HDN activity
• SAT activity
• Cracking activity
• Ring opening activity
• Light gas tuning factors
• Catalyst deactivation
• Reactor pressure drop factors
Fractionator Key Displays the top and bottom index of the zones in
Parameters table the fractionator.
This table does not appear if the Hydrocracker
does not contain a fractionator.
Notes Page
5.4.2 Reactor Section Tab

The Reactor Section tab contains features used to configure the
reactor in the Hydrocracker operation.

• Feed
• Specification
• Recycle Gas Loop
5-31
• Catalyst Deactivation
• Solver Options
• Solver Console
Feed Page
The Feed page enables you to modify the properties of the feed
streams entering and exiting the Hydrocracker.
Figure 5.13
Object Description
Conditions stream(s) entering the Hydrocracker:
table • volume flow rate
• mass flow rate
• temperature
• pressure
• entry location
If you select Split option, the Select Feed Location
Property View appears and enables you to specify
the feed stream flow ratio between the reactors.
Total Feed Enables you to modify the following properties of the
table reactors:
• total feed preheat duty
• total feed pressure
• gas to oil ratio
5-32
Hydrocracker 5-33
Select Feed Location Property View

The Select Feed Location property view enables you to select the
entry location of the feed stream and (if applicable) specify the
fraction of the feed stream entering each reactor.
Figure 5.14
Displays the selected

feed stream.
Object Description
Reactor radio Enables you to select the reactor for feed stream
buttons to enter.
Split radio button Enables you to activate the split option.
Split table Enables you to specify the fraction of the feed
stream entering each reactor.
Normalize button Enables you to normalize the sum of the feed
fraction to equal 1.
Accept button Enables you to apply the specifications in the
Select Feed Location property view to the
Hydrocracker and close the Select Feed Location
property view.
Cancel button Enables you to exit the Select Feed Location
property view without accepting the specifications.
5-33
Specification Page
The Specification page enables you to modify the temperature of
the beds in each reactor of the Hydrocracker.
Figure 5.15
Recycle Gas Loop Page

The Recycle Gas Loop page enables you to configure the
parameters of the Hydrogen makeup and recycle gas streams.
Figure 5.16
5-34
Hydrocracker 5-35
Object Description
HPS and Enables you to modify the following properties of the
Recycle Gas recycle gas loops:
Compressor • stream temperature
table • stream pressure
• outlet pressure of the stream exiting the compressor
• pressure difference between the stream and the
reactor stage
Product Enables you to modify the following properties of the
Heater table heater:
• temperature of exiting stream
• duty
• pressure of exiting stream
• pressure difference in heater
Hydrogen Enables you to modify the following properties of the
Makeup hydrogen makeup stream:
Stream table • mole flow rate
• temperature
• pressure
• composition
• hydrogen purge fraction
Catalyst Deactivation Page

The Catalyst Deactivation page enables you to modify two
catalyst deactivation parameters: weight average bed
temperature at the end of a cycle and Day on Stream.
Figure 5.17
5-35
Solver Options Page

Figure 5.18
Object Description
of iterations.
creep step.
• Overriding the normal calculation behaviour.
• Retaining the normal calculation behaviour.
The normal calculation behaviour requires the spec groups be completed
before solving the unit operation.
5-36
Hydrocracker 5-37
Object Description
Scaled. A combination of the Aggressive and Advanced modes. This
setting is recommended for highly constrained optimization problems
with few Degrees of Freedom at solution and a nonlinear objective
function.
Advanced. Hessian initialized with 2nd order information. This setting is
recommended for problems with many Degrees of Freedom at solution
within the bounds.
for the step size:
step iterations.
option).
5-37
Solver Console Page

Figure 5.19
Object Description
Commands field
field.
button
5-38
Hydrocracker 5-39
5.4.3 Fractionator Tab

The Fractionator tab contains options for the fractionator in the
Hydrocracker. The options are split into the following pages:
• Zone Pressures
• Specs
If the Hydrocracker does not contain a fractionator the above

pages appear blank.
Zone Pressures Page

The Zone Pressures page enables you to specify the top
pressure values for the fractionator zones and the bottom
pressure of the fractionator.
Figure 5.20
Specs Page
Refer to Specs Page The Specs page enables you to specify the values of the product
section from Chapter 6 -
output streams of the fractionator. These are the values that the
Petroleum Column for
more information. Column algorithm tries to meet.
5-39
There are two specs options to choose from: TBP Cut Point or
Product Flow Fraction. Depending on which option you select in
the Spec Option group, the features available in the Specs page
varies.
• TBP Cut Point option
Figure 5.21
• Product Flow Fraction option
Figure 5.22
5-40
Hydrocracker 5-41
5.4.4 Results Tab

The Results tab displays the calculated simulation results of the
Hydrocracker.
The information is grouped in the following pages:

• Feed Blend
• Product Yields
• Reactor
• Hydrogen System
• Fractionator
• Hydrogen Balance
Feed Blend Page

The Feed Blend page displays the detailed characterization of
each individual feed and the blend of feeds going to each
reactor.
Figure 5.23
If there is more than one reactor, there will be a drop-down list

that allows you to select the reactor and view the values
corresponding to the selected reactor.
5-41
Product Yields Page

The Product Yields page displays the standard cut yields from
the simulation.
Figure 5.24
If the Hydrocracker contains a fractionator, there will be two

radio buttons: Standard Cut Products and Fractionated Products.
Depending on the radio button selected, the Yields group
displays the yields for standard cuts or the fractionated yields.
The liquid product cuts for the Fractionated Products option

correspond to those specified in the Specs Page of the
Fractionator tab.
5-42
Hydrocracker 5-43

The Product Properties page displays the properties of liquid
cuts from the simulation.
Figure 5.25

Depending on the radio button selected, the Product Properties
group displays the properties for standard cuts or the properties
for the fractionated products.

Fractionator tab.
5-43
Reactor Page
The Reactor page displays the calculated parameter results of
the reactors in the Hydrocracker operation.
Figure 5.26
Hydrogen System Page

The Hydrogen System page displays the calculated results of the
hydrogen makeup stream and recycle gas stream.
Figure 5.27
5-44
Hydrocracker 5-45
Fractionator Page
The fractionator page displays the calculated results of the
product stream cut points from the fractionator.
Figure 5.28
If the Hydrocracker does not contain a fractionator, this

page is blank.
5-45
5-46 Feed Type Library Property View
Hydrogen Balance Page

The Hydrogen Balance page displays the calculated results of
the hydrogen balance and hydrogen consumption.
Figure 5.29
5.5 Feed Type Library

Property View
The Feed Type Library property view enables you to import,
export, delete, and configure the feed type data.
You cannot delete the default feed type provided by Aspen

To access the Feed Type Library property view:

1. Open the HCR Property View.
2. Click the Design tab and select the Connections page.
3. Click the Feed Type Library button.
5-46
Hydrocracker 5-47
The Feed Type Library property view appears.
Figure 5.30

the Feed Type Library property view.
Object Description
Feed Types list Displays the names of the feed type available in
the Hydrocracker
Import button Enables you to import feed types (from *.csv files)
into the Hydrocracker.
Export button Enables you to export a selected feed type, in the
Feed Types list, to a *.csv file.
Delete button Enables you to delete a selected feed type, in the
Feed Types list, from the Hydrocracker.
Properties of Enables you to modify the property information of
Selected Feed Type a selected feed type in the Feed Types list.
table
Lump Weight Enables you to modify the percent lump weight
Percents radio value of the selected feed type.
button
Biases radio button Enables you to modify the following properties of
the selected feed type:
• light, medium, and heavy WABP
• light, medium, and heavy WABP bias
• Light and heavy cut point bias
• total Ca and Cn bias
5-47
5-48 HCR Reactor Section Property View
5.6 HCR Reactor Section

Property View
The HCR Reactor Section property view enables you to configure
and modify the reactor part of the Hydrocracker operation.
To access the HCR Reactor Section property view:

1. Enter the HCR environment.
2. Access the PFD by clicking the PFD icon.
3. On the PFD property view, right-click the Reactor Section
PFD icon object icon.
4. Select View Properties command from the object inspect
menu.
The HCR Reactor Section property view appears.
Figure 5.31
5-48
Hydrocracker 5-49

the HCR Reactor Section property view:
Object Description
Delete button Enables you to delete the reactor section.
Ignore checkbox Enables HYSYS to ignore the reactor section during the
process flowsheet calculation.
5.6.1 Design Tab

The Design tab contains the features used to configure the
reactor section of the Hydrocracker operation.
These features are grouped into the following pages:

• Configuration
• Geometry
• Notes
Configuration Page
The Configuration page enables you to specify the reactor name,
and displays the reactor type and number of reactor beds.
Figure 5.32
5-49
To modify the configuration, click the Configuration Wizard

button to access the HCR Configuration Wizard property
view.
Geometry Page
The Geometry page enables you to specify the following
parameters of each reactor beds:
• internal diameter
• catalyst loading
• catalyst density
• bed voidage
Figure 5.33
Notes Page
5-50
Hydrocracker 5-51
5.6.2 FeedData Tab

The FeedData tab contains features used to configure and
modify the feed stream properties entering the HCR Reactor
Section.

• Library
• Properties
Library Page
The Library page enables you to modify, import, export, and
delete feed data types entering the reactor operation.
Figure 5.34
Object Description
Feed Types Displays the list of feed data types available for the
group reactor.
Import button Enables you to import a feed data from a file. The feed
data are saved in *.csv type files.
Export button Enables you to export the selected feed data (from the
Available Feed Types group) into a *.csv file. The
exported feed data can be imported into a different
applicable operation.
5-51
Object Description
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected feed data in the
Available Feed Types group.
Properties of Enables you to modify the property information of a
Selected Feed selected feed type in the Feed Types list.
Type table
You can also access the features in the Library page by

clicking the Feed Type Library button in the Connections
page of the HCR property view.
Properties Page
The Properties page enables you to specify properties for virtual
Figure 5.35
Object Description
Feeds group Displays both real and virtual feed streams connected
to the Hydrocracker.
Add button Enables you to create a virtual feed stream.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining automatically assigns
a default name to the virtual feed stream and treats
the virtual stream as an internal stream.
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected feed stream from
the Feeds group.
If the selected feed stream is a real stream, then both
the internal and external streams will be deleted.
5-52
Hydrocracker 5-53
Object Description
Assay radio Enables you to specify assay properties of the selected
button feed type in the Feed Type list.
Bulk Properties Enables you to specify bulk properties of the selected
radio button feed type in the Feed Type list.
Kinetic Lumps Enables you to specify kinetic lumps properties of the
radio button selected feed type in the Feed Type list.
Assay drop-down Enables you to select the assay associated to the
list selected feed type in the Feed Type list.
This drop-down list is only available if you select the
Assay radio button.
Feed Properties Contains a table that displays the list of properties
group available for you to view or modify of the selected feed
stream.
The variables available in this table vary depending on
which radio button you select in the Selected Feed
group.
5.6.3 Operation Tab

operation parameters of the Hydrocracker operation.

• Feeds
• Specifications
• Recycle Gas Loop
• Catalyst Deactivation
• Solver Options
• Solver Console
5-53
Feeds Page
Refer to Feed Page The Feeds page enables you to modify the physical properties of
section for more
Figure 5.36
Specifications Page
The Specifications page enables you to modify the reactor bed
parameters of the Hydrocracker operation.
Figure 5.37
5-54
Hydrocracker 5-55

Refer to Recycle Gas The Recycle Gas Loop page enables you to modify the recycle
Loop Page section for
more information. gas parameters of the Hydrocracker operation.
Figure 5.38

Refer to Catalyst The Catalyst Deactivation page enables you to modify the
Deactivation Page
section for more catalyst parameters of the Hydrocracker operation.
information.
Figure 5.39
5-55
Solver Options Page

Figure 5.40
Object Description
of iterations.
creep step.
before solving.
5-56
Hydrocracker 5-57
Object Description
function.
within the bounds.
for the step size:
step iterations.
option).
5-57
Solver Console Page

Figure 5.41
Object Description
Commands field
field.
button
5-58
Hydrocracker 5-59
5.6.4 Results Tab

The Results tab enables you to view the calculated variable
results of the Hydrocracker.
The information is grouped into the following pages:

• Feed Blend
• Product Yields
• Reactor
• Hydrogen System
• Hydrogen Balance
Feed Blend Page

Figure 5.42
For multiple reactors, use the drop-down list to view the feed
blend properties in each reactor.
5-59
Product Yields Page

the product streams exiting the Hydrocracker.
Figure 5.43

properties of the product streams exiting the Hydrocracker.
Figure 5.44
5-60
Hydrocracker 5-61
Reactor Page
reactor (s) in the Hydrocracker.
Figure 5.45

Hydrogen make-up streams and Hydrogen recycled gas.
Figure 5.46
5-61

Hydrogen consumption in the reactor(s) and Hydrogen balance
in each streams.
Figure 5.47
5-62
Hydrocracker 5-63
5.7 Calibration Set Library

Property View
The Calibration Set Library property view enables you to
manage the calibration factor sets.
There are several methods to access the Calibration Set Library

property view:
• In the HCR Configuration Wizard property view, go to
the Calibration Factors (3 of 3) page and click the
Library button.
• In the HCR Property View, select the Design tab,
select the Calibration Factors page, and click the
Calibration Factors Library button.
• In the HCR Environment, select HCR | Calibration
Factor command from the menu bar, and click the
Library button in the Calibration Factor Set property
view.
Figure 5.48

the Calibration Set Library property view:
Object Description
Available Calibration Displays all the factor sets available in the current
Factor Sets list calibration environment.
View/Edit button Enables you to view or modify the data of the
selected factor set in the Available Calibration
Factor Sets list.
5-63
Object Description
Add button Enables you to add a new factor set and access
the Factor Set Property View.
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected factor set in the
Available Calibration Factor Sets list.
Clone button Enables you to create a copy/clone of the selected
factor set in the Available Calibration Factor
Sets list.
Import button Enables you to import a calibration factor set data
from a *.csv file.
Export button Enables you to export/save the selected factor set
(in the Available Calibration Factor Sets list) to
a file *.csv.
HYSYS provides a default calibration factor set with values in

the Calibration Set Library.
The calibration factor values, in the Default calibration factor
set, are read only.
To modify the calibration factors, you need to make a clone
of the Default Calibration Factor set, and modify the
calibration factor values in the cloned set.
5.7.1 Factor Set Property View

The Factor Set property view displays the variable values that
make up the calibration factor set. You can also edit the variable
values in the Factor Set property view.
You cannot modify the variable values of the default

calibration factor set provided by HYSYS.
To access the Factor Set property view:

1. Open the Calibration Set Library Property View.
• Click the Add button to create a new calibration factor
set.
• Select the calibration factor set you want to view in the
Available Calibration Factor Sets list and click the View/
Edit button.
• Select the calibration factor set you want to edit in the
Available Calibration Factor Sets list and click the Clone
button.
5-64
Hydrocracker 5-65
The Factor Set property view appears.
Figure 5.49
The options in the Factor Set property view is grouped into two
pages:
• Reactor
• Fractionator
Both pages in the Factor Set property view contain the following
common options:
Object Description
Name field Enables you to specify the name of the calibration
factor set.
Description field Enables you to provide a brief description on the
Date Created Displays the date and time when the calibration factor
field set was created.
Date Modified Displays the date and time when the calibration factor
field set was last modified.
5-65
Reactor Page
The Reactor page enables you to access the Reactor Factors
group and specify variable values associated to the reactor.
Figure 5.50
Fractionator Page
The Fractionator page enables you to access the Fractionator
Cuts group and specify variable values associated to the
stabilizer tower.
Figure 5.51
5-66
Hydrocracker 5-67
The Fractionator page is blank if the Hydrocracker does not

contain a fractionator.
5.8 Results Property View

The Results property view contains and displays the same
information in the Results Tab of the HCR Reactor Section
Property View.
To access the Results property view:

1. Access HCR Environment.
2. Select HCR | Results in the menu bar.
The Results property view appears.
The information displayed in the Results property view will

appear blank, if the Hydrocracker unit operation is not
solved or completed.
5.8.1 Feed Blend Page

Figure 5.52
5-67
5-68 Results Property View
For multiple reactors, use the drop-down list to view the feed
blend properties in each reactor.
5.8.2 Product Yields Page

Figure 5.53
5-68
Hydrocracker 5-69
5.8.3 Product Properties Page

properties of the product streams exiting the Hydrocracker.
Figure 5.54
5.8.4 Reactor Page

reactor (s) in the Hydrocracker.
Figure 5.55
5-69
5-70 Results Property View
5.8.5 Hydrogen System Page

Figure 5.56
5.8.6 Hydrogen Balance Page

Hydrogen consumption in the reactor(s) and Hydrogen balance
in each streams.
Figure 5.57
5-70
Hydrocracker 5-71
5.9 Calibration Property

View
The calibration property view allows you to:
• Specify feeds, catalyst, operating conditions and
measurements for a calibration run.
• Perform a calibration run.
• Save the calculated Calibration Factors for use in the
simulation run.
• Push data from a calibration run to the HCR Reactor
Section property view.
• Pull data from the HCR Reactor property view to the
Calibration property view.
Figure 5.58
To access Calibration property view:

1. Access the HCR environment
2. Select HCR | Calibration command in the menu bar.
The Calibration view of the active HCR operation appears.
5-71
Note: When you access the Calibration view, you also enter the
Calibration Environment.
The HCR Calibration view contains the following objects below

the tabs:
Object Description
Run Calibration Enables you to select one or more data set for the
Button calibration run and access the Validation Wizard
property view. This button is unavailable until all
necessary input data is complete.
Run Prediction Enables you to select one or more data set for the
button prediction run and access the Specification
Wizard property view. This button is unavailable
until all necessary input data is complete.
Data Set Enables you to select different data sets for
drop-down list entering the data or viewing the results for the
calibration or the prediction run.
Manage Data Sets Enables you to access the Data Set Manager
button Property View to manage the data set.
Push Data to Enables you to export input data from the current
Simulation button data set in the calibration property view to the
property view in the HCR environment.
Any existing simulation data will be overwritten
with the current calibration data.
Pull Data from Enables you to import data from the property view
Simulation button in the HDC environment into the current data set in
the Calibration property view.
Any existing calibration data will be over written
with the current simulation data.
Return to Enables you to exit the Calibration environment
Simulation and return to the HCR environment.
Status Bar Displays the current status of the calibration run.
Validation Wizard
When you click the Run Calibration button, Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining lets you select the data set you want to use
for the calibration run, and validate the selected data set before
the calibration is actually run.
Note: The Run Calibration button in the Calibration view is

unavailable until all necessary calibration input is complete.
The Select Data Sets for Calibration view displays status and
names of data sets available with the calibration run.
5-72
Hydrocracker 5-73
This view will appear only when there is more than one data set.
If there’s only one data set, Validation Wizard view will appear
instead.
Object Description
Run Calibration Enables you to run the calibration using the
selected data set in the Select Data Sets for
Calibration group.
Stop Enables you to stop the calculation process during a
calibration run. This button is only active during the
calibration run calculation.
Close Enables you to close the Select Data Sets for
Calibration view without performing any calibration
run.
Select the appropriate checkbox under the Include column to

select the data set you want to use in the calibration run. When
you select the checkbox, the Validation Wizard view of the
selected data set appears.
The Validation Wizard property view displays the mass flows of

feed and product streams (derived from the input data), and
coke flow and wt% hydrogen in coke (calculated using air rate
and flue gas analysis).
The information displayed enables you to analyse the

measurement data before accepting the data set for the
calibration run.
• If the total product mass rate is greater than the total
feed mass rate by about 2-3%, you should review the
flow rate and gravity information of the products. If you
think the error is acceptable, you can decide how you
would like to distribute the mass imbalance by assigning
the bias to any of the product streams (except coke).
Once the bias is assigned, the Validation Wizard adjusts
the mass flow of the selected product stream(s) to match
the feed total mass by re-normalization.
• If the coke flow and wt% hydrogen in code values are not
reasonable, the air rate measurement and flue gas
analysis should be reviewed before calibration is run.
In the Coke and Sulfur Balance group, you must specify the
following values for the Calibration of coke and sulfur balance:
• Wt% feed sulfur in code (default = 5%)
• Wt% coke from stripper (default = 15%)
• Stripper efficiency (default = 75%)
5-73
When all the information in the Validation Wizard view appears

satisfactory, click the OK button to accept the values in the
selected data set. The Validation Wizard view closes and you
return to the Select Data Sets for Calibration view.
Note: You can click the Cancel button to close the Validation
Wizard View without saving/accepting any changes made in the
view.
Once the data set has been selected and validated, you can click
the Run Calibration button on the Select Data Sets for
Calibration view to start the Calibration run.
Specification Wizard
When you click the Run Prediction button, Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining lets you select a calibration factor set, and
select data set you want to use for prediction calculation.
Note: The Run Prediction button in the Calibration view is

unavailable until all necessary input is complete.
The Select Data Sets for Prediction view displays status and
names of data sets available with the calibration run. The
following table lists and describes the options in the Select Data
Sets for Prediction view:
Object Description
Select Calibration Enables you to select a calibration factor set to use
Factor Set to Use for in the prediction calculation.
Prediction
drop-down list.
Library button Enables you to access the Calibration Set Library
view to manage the calibration factor set.
Run Prediction Enables you to run the prediction calculation using
button the selected calibration factor set for data sets
included in the Select Data Sets for Prediction
group. The button is not active until you have
selected and validated a data set.
Stop button Enables you to stop the process during a prediction
calculation.
Close button Enables you to close the Select Data Sets for
Prediction view without performing any prediction
calculation.
5-74
Hydrocracker 5-75
Select the appropriate checkbox under the Include column to

select the data set you want to use in the prediction. When you
select the checkbox, the Specification Wizard view of the
selected data set appears.
• The Specification Wizard property view enables you to
select the variable(s) that is specified for the prediction
calculation, the rest of the variables will be calculated.
• In the Regenerator group, select the appropriate
checkbox of the variable you want the prediction
calculation to accept the specified value, while the rest of
the variables are calculated based on the specified value.
• If a fractionator is included into HCR, then the TBP cut
point specs appears in the Specification Wizard view. you
can modify the values in the Specify TBP Cut Points
group and the new data will be used in the prediction
run.
• Click the OK button to close the Specification Wizard
view and accept the modification/selections.
• Click the Cancel button to close the Specification Wizard
view and not accept the modification/selections.
Data Set Manager Property View

The Data Set Manager property view enables you to add,
modify, clone, delete, or rename the calibration data sets
associate to the calibration run.
The following table lists and describes the options in the Data
Set Manager view:
Object Description
Available Data Sets Displays all the data sets available in the associate
list calibration/prediction run.
Add button Enables you to add a new data set to the
calibration/prediction run.
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected data set in the
Clone button Enables you to clone the selected data set in the
Rename button Enables you to rename the selected data set in the
5-75
5.9.1 Design Tab

The Design tab is the same as the Design tab in the HCR Reactor
Section property view. This tab enables you to enter specific
information about the HCR unit you are modeling. This
information is used in a calibration run.
Figure 5.59
Use the Design tab to view the following types of information

about the HCR:
Use this page to

Configuration View the configuration of the HCR
Geometry View the geometry of the following elements of the
HCR:
• Internal Diameter
• Catalyst Loading
• Catalyst Density
• Bed Voidage
Notes Enter notes about calibration
5-76
Hydrocracker 5-77
Configuration Page
The Configuration page on the Design tab of the Calibration
property view is a read-only page.
This page displays the flowsheet configuration information:

• The number of reactors
• The number of HPS
• The type AMINE Scrubber
• The presence and type of fractionator
• The number of beds
Note: To change configuration specifications, you need to go

back to the HCR environment.
Figure 5.60
5-77
Geometry Page
The Geometry page on the Design tab of the Calibration
property view displays the flowsheet geometry information.
Figure 5.61
Note: If you selected the Allow Midpoint Injection option on

the HCR Configuration Wizard Configuration Page (page 1),
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining displays the Injection Point in
the Reactor group.
The groups in the Geometry page contains the following

information:
Group[ Description
Internal Diameter The internal diameter of the reactor.
Catalyst Loading The loading KG of the reactor.
Catalyst Density The density of the reactor.
Bed Voidage The Bed Voidage of the reactor.
5-78
Hydrocracker 5-79
If mid-point injection is allowed, then:
Field Description
Total Length The total length of the riser.
Top Section The diameter of the top section of the riser (from
Diameter injection point to riser top).
Bottom Section The diameter of the bottom section riser (from riser
Diameter bottom to injection point).
Injection Point Location of injection point from the bottom of the
riser.
Notes Page
For more information Use the Notes page to make any notes about the calibration of
Notes Page/Tab. the HCR and related matters. Notes can be useful for informing
other people working with your case about changes and
assumptions you have made. You can:
• Enter notes in the Notes window
• Add objects, for example, a formatted Word document,
in the Notes window.
5.9.2 Feed Data Tab

Use the Feed Data tab on the Calibration property view to enter
specific information about the feed(s) to the HCR unit you are
modeling. This information is used in a calibration run.
The following table lists and describes the pages in the Feed
Data tab view:
Use this page to

Library Specify Feed Data information for a calibration run.
Properties Specify properties for virtual feeds, which is to say
feeds that are not represented by an internal and
external stream in the subflowsheet and flowsheet
respectively.
5-79
Library Page
Use the Library page on the Feed Data tab of the Calibration
property view to manage the Feed Type Library.
Figure 5.62
A library of feed types is provided in the HCR/Feed Library sub

folder on your installation folder. You can import one or more of
them to your simulation.
The following table lists and describes the options in the Library
page:
Objects Description
Feed Types Displays the type of feeds associated with the HCR
operation.
Properties of Displays the following information:
Selected Feed Types • Lump Weight Percents
• Biases
Import button Enables you to import a feed type from a file in the
HCR operation.
5-80
Hydrocracker 5-81
Objects Description
Export button Enables you to export a selected feed type (from
the Feed Types list) into a separate file. The
exported feed type can be imported into a different
HCR operation.
Delete button Enables you to delete a selected field type in the
Feed Types list.
Properties Page
Use the Properties page on the Feed Data tab of the Calibration
property view to specify properties for virtual feeds, which is to
say feeds that are not represented by an internal and external
stream in the subflowsheet and flowsheet respectively. The real
feed streams also appear here, but there are restrictions.
Figure 5.63
5-81
the Properties page:
Object Description
Feeds List Displays the feed stream associated with the HCR
operation.
Add button Enables you to create/add a new virtual feed
stream and assign it a default name as if it were an
internal stream.
Clone button Enables you to create a copy of the selected feed
stream in the feed list.
If the selected feed stream is a real stream, the
copy is flagged as a virtual feed.
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected field stream in
the feed list.
If the selected feed stream is a real stream, then
both the internal and external streams will be
deleted.
Selected Feed group Contains three radio buttons that enables you to
select different methods to manipulate the selected
feed stream in the Feeds list.
The HCR model uses these feed types and Feed
Type properties to generate kinetic lumps of the
feed for the simulation.
Feed Properties Displays all the properties of the selected feed
Group stream in the Feeds list.
Various stream properties can be modified,
depending on the method you selected in the Feed
Properties group.
• If you selected the Assay radio button:
The feed properties calculated from the assay and the cut points
are displayed.
Field Description
Feed Type The feed type. Select the feed type from the drop-
down list. The feed types available are those in the
Feed Types list on the Library page of the Feed
Data tab.
Assay The name of the assay.
Initial Point Initial point of the distillation.
Final Point [C] Final point of the distillation.
API Gravity The API gravity of the feed.
Specific Gravity The specific gravity of the feed.
(60F/60F)
5-82
Hydrocracker 5-83
Field Description
Distillation Type • TBP
• D86
• D1160
• D2887
0% Point [C] 0% point of the distillation.
Total Nitrogen Total Nitrogen content in the feed, ppmwt.
[ppmwt]
Basic Nitrogen Basic Nitrogen content in the feed, ppmwt.
[ppmwt]
Total/Basic Ratio of total basic nitrogen content.
Nitrogen Ration
Sulfur Content% Sulfur content in the feed, wt%
• If you selected the Bulk Properties radio button:
Field Description
Name The name of the feed.
Feed Type The feed type. Select the feed type from the drop-
down list. The feed types available are those in the
Feed Types list on the Library page of the Feed
Data tab.
API Gravity The API gravity of the feed.
Specific Gravity The specific gravity of the feed.
(60F/60F)
Distillation Type • TBP
• D86
• D1160
• D2887
5-83
Field Description
Total Nitrogen Total Nitrogen content in the feed, ppmwt.
[ppmwt]
Basic Nitrogen Basic Nitrogen content in the feed, ppmwt.
[ppmwt]
Total/Basic Ratio of total basic nitrogen content.
Nitrogen Ratio
Sulfur Content% Sulfur content in the feed, wt%
• If you selected the Kinetic Lumps radio button:
If the feed is connected to an external stream, then you cannot

choose a Property Method. You can only change the feed name
and the feed type.
Operation Tab
The Operation tab in the Calibration property view is the same
as the Operation tab in the HCR Reactor Section property view.

operation parameters of the Hydrocracker operation.
Feeds Page
The Feeds page of the Operation tab of the Calibration property
displays the calculated physical properties of the feed stream
entering the reactor. This data is used for calibration runs.
The following table lists and describes the options in the Feed
page view:
5-84
Hydrocracker 5-85
Object Description
Conditions stream(s) entering the Hydrocracker:
• volume flow rate
• mass flow rate
• temperature
• pressure
• entry location
If you select Split option, the Select Feed Location
Property View appears and enables you to specify
the feed stream flow ratio between the reactors.
Total Feed Enables you to modify the following properties of the
reactors:
• total feed preheat duty
• total feed pressure
• gas to oil ratio
Specification Page
The Specification page on the Operation tab of the Calibration
property enables you to modify the reactor bed parameters of
the Hydrocracker operation.
Figure 5.64
5-85

The Recycle Gas Loop page on the Operation tab of the
Calibration property view enables you to modify the recycle gas
parameters of the Hydrocracker operation.
Figure 5.65
The Recycle Gas Loop page contains the following groups:
Group Description
HPS and Enables you to modify the following properties of the
Recycle Gas recycle gas loops:
Compressor • stream temperature
• stream pressure
• outlet pressure of the stream exiting the compressor
• pressure difference between the stream and the
reactor stage
5-86
Hydrocracker 5-87
Group Description
Product Enables you to modify the following properties of the
Heater heater:
• temperature of exiting stream
• duty
• pressure of exiting stream
• pressure difference in heater
Hydrogen Enables you to modify the following properties of the
Makeup hydrogen makeup stream:
Stream • mole flow rate
• temperature
• pressure
• composition
• hydrogen purge fraction

The Catalyst Deactivation page enables you to modify the
catalyst parameters of the hydrocraker operation.
Figure 5.66
5-87
Fractionator Page
The Fractionator tab contains options for the fractionator in the
Hydrocracker. The options are split into the following pages:
• Zone Pressures
• Specs
If the Hydrocracker does not contain a fractionator the

above pages appear blank.
Solver Options Page

The Solver Options page on the Operation tab of the Calibration
property view enables you to modify the calculation variable
used to determine the reaction results of the reactor.
Figure 5.67
5-88
Hydrocracker 5-89
The Solver Option page contains the following information:
Object Description
Tolerance residual value allowed for the convergence calculation.
OOMF Solver performance:
of iterations.
• On/Off Switch drop-down list. Enables you to select On (enable) or
creep step.
Checking you to toggle between:
before solving.
to initialize the Hessian value:
function.
5-89
Object Description
for the line search algorithm:
within the bounds.
for the step size:
step iterations.
Parameter the following options:
option).
5-90
Hydrocracker 5-91
Solver Console Page

The Solver Console page on the Operation tab of the Calibration
property view enables you to view the solver message
generated by the reaction and run script commands.
Figure 5.68
The Solver Console page displays the following information:
Object Description
Commands field
field.
5-91
Object Description
button
5.9.3 Operation Measure Tab

The Operation Measures tab contains the following pages:
• Temp./Press. Page
• Flow
Temp./Press. Page
The Operation Measure tab in the Calibration property view
allows you to input the temperature measurement that will be
used in the objection function for calibration.
Figure 5.69
5-92
Hydrocracker 5-93
The Temperature page contains the following two groups:
Object Description
Temperature Rise The rise in temperature.
Pressure Drop The degree of pressure dropped.
Note: The number of columns depends on the number of

reactors. The number of rows is the maximum number of beds
among all reactors. The filed will be locked as a blank if the
particular bed does not exist in the specific reactor.
For example, if there are three reactors and there are two beds
in Reactor 1, three beds in Reactor 2 and two beds in Reactor 3,
then there will be rows for Bed 1, Bed 2 and Bed 3. However, the
cells for data in Bed 3 of Reactor 1 and Reactor 3 will be blank
and locked.
Flow Page
Use the Flow page on the Operation Measure tab of the
Calibration property view to input flow measurements in the
recycle loop that will be used in the objection function for
5-93
calibration.
Figure 5.70
5.9.4 Product Measure Tab

The Product Measure tab contains the options that enable you to
manipulate the cuts, light ends and heavy ends in the calibration
calculation.
Cuts Page
The Cuts page on the Product Measure tab of the Calibration
property view enables you to specify the number of GC analyses
5-94
Hydrocracker 5-95
and liquid product cuts.
Figure 5.71
The cuts available vary depending on whether the HCR has a

fractionator.
• If the HCR has a fractionator:
The naphtha cuts, LCO cuts and Bottom cuts are those
you specified on the HCR Configuration Wizard.
• If the HCR does not include a fractionator, then you must
specify the number of liquid cuts, which correspond to
the number of liquid product measurements you have.
Name of analysis or
What/how many you can specify
cut
Number of fuel gas up to 5
analyses
Number of LPG up to 4
analyses
Number of naphtha up to 3
cuts
Number of Distillate up to 2
Cuts
Bottom cuts • Bottoms
• HCO and Bottoms
5-95
Light Ends Page

Use the Light Ends page on the Product Measure tab of the
Calibration property view to specify the GC data for:
• Fuel Gases
• LPGs
• Naphthas
Figure 5.72
The table that appears in the Light Ends page enables you to
input measurement data and is based on the number of fuel
gas, LPC analyses and Naptha cuts specified on the Cuts Page.
For example, the Heavy Naphtha column appears only if the
configuration has a Heavy Naphtha draw.
For each type of cut (each cut is represented by a column) you

can enter the flow rate and composition in the appropriate cell.
Notes:
• You only need to enter the Naphthenes, Olefins and
Aromatics data for the naphtha cuts. The HCR model
then extrapolates the curves to the regions where you
did not specify data.
5-96
Hydrocracker 5-97
• For Fuel Gas columns, Liquid Rate variable is not

available and for the other columns, Gas Rate variable is
not available.
• When you enter a value for a composition, the Input
Composition for GC Analysis dialog appears on which
to enter the data.
Heavy Liquids Page

Use the Heavy Liquids page on the Product Measure tab of the
Calibration property view to specify measured data for
fractionated streams, including flows and properties. Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining calculates the TBP cut for reactor
parameterization.
Figure 5.73
Note: You only need to enter the Naphthenes, Olefins and

Aromatics data for the naphtha cuts. The HCR model adjusts the
reference curve for Naphthenes, Olefins and Aromatics to match
the measurements specified. The model then extrapolates the
curves to the regions where you did not specify data.
The streams on the Heavy Liquids page correspond to the
5-97
fractionated draws that you specified:

• on the HCR Configuration Wizard
• on the Cuts Page if the HCR does not have a fractionator
The Olefins, Naphthenes and Aromatics in naphtha cut(s) are

required input. Those for other liquid cuts are optional.
The temperature and pressure are used for fractionator

calibration.
Note: The Heavy Naphtha and Light Naphtha flows appear

both on the Light Ends Page and in the Heavy Liquids Page.
5.9.5 Calibration Control Tab

Use the Calibration Control tab of the Calibration property view
to specify the reactor settings for:
• Parameter
• Object Function
Parameters Page
The Parameters page on the Calibration Control tab of the
Calibration property view displays a list of parameters and a
checkbox for each parameter to allow you to select which
5-98
Hydrocracker 5-99
parameters to be used in calibrating the reactor model.
Figure 5.74
This page contains several columns. The first column displays a

list of parameters. The second column is the initial values of the
parameters and the third column is a checkbox. The initial
values of the parameters are from the default factor set but you
can modify them.
Object Function Page

The Object Function page on the Calibration Control tab of the
Calibration property view allows the user to construct the
objective function for the calibration. This page contains a
matrix of two columns. The first column is the name of the
5-99
variables, the second is the sigma values for the variable.
Figure 5.75
5.9.6 Analysis Tab

The Analysis tab of the Calibration property view displays the
view populated with the results of a calibration run.
Note: Pages on the Analysis tab, except the Worksheet page,

display the calibration results of the current data set. You can
select the current data set from the Data Set drop-down list.
Calibration Summary Page

The Calibrations Summary page on the Analysis tab of the
Calibration property view displays the calculated calibration
factors. You can save these Calibration Factors as a named set
that can then be used in calibration runs. you can also export
5-100
Hydrocracker 5-101
the calibration factors to a file.
Figure 5.76
There are four buttons located on the top of the Calibration

Factor page and two groups. The following table outlines the
buttons:
Button Action
Save for Simulation Save the calibration factors for a simulation run,
by clicking Save for Simulation.
In the normal workflow, after running the
calibration and reviewing the results, you will save
the calculated calibration factors. Therefore, if you
return to the Simulation environment, the system
prompts you with the following question:
Do you want to make the newly calculated
calibration factors available for simulation?
• If you select Yes - Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining proceeds as if you had clicked Save
for Simulation.
• If you select No - the calibration property
view closes.
• If you select Cancel - the Calibration
property view remains open.
Export Export the calibration factors as a file.
5-101
Button Action
Calibration Factors View the Calibration Set Library view.
Library
Re-initialize
The factors are split into two read-only groups.

• The Calibration Factors group displays all calculated
reactor and (if it exists) fractionator calibration factors:
Factors Default Calibration Factor set

Global Activity
Reactor 1- Bed 1 0.7000
Overall HDS Activity
Treating Bed 9.761-eOC
Treating Bed to 0.6336
Cracking Bed Ration
430- HDS Activity
Treating Bed 1.000
Cracking Bed Ration
430-950 HDS
Activity
Treating Bed 0.7581
Cracking Bed Ration
950+ HDS Activity
Treating Bed 1.000
Cracking Bed Ration
Overall HDN Activity
Treating Bed 0.2508
Cracking Bed Ration
430- HDN Activity
Treating Bed 1.217
Cracking Bed Ration
950+ HDN Activity
Treating Bed 1.665
Cracking Bed Ration
5-102
Hydrocracker 5-103

Overall SAT Activity
Treating Bed 7.000e-OC
Cracking Bed Ration
430- SAT Activity
Treating Bed 1.000
Cracking Bed Ration
430-950 SAT
Activity
Treating Bed 0.9032
Cracking Bed Ration
950+ SAT Activity
Treating Bed 0.9182
Cracking Bed Ration
Overall Cracking
Activity
Treating Bed 0.1679
Treating Bed to 1.000e-OC
Cracking Bed Ration
430- Cracking
Activity
Treating Bed 2.200
Cracking Bed Ration
430-950 Cracking
Activity
Treating Bed 2.498
Cracking Bed Ration
950+ Cracking
Activity
Treating Bed 0.8000
Cracking Bed Ration
Overall Ring
Opening Activity
Treating Bed 5.000e-OC
Treating Bed to 1.000e-OC
Cracking Bed Ration
430- Ring Opening
Activity
Treating Bed 1.000
5-103

Cracking Bed Ration
430-950 Ring
Opening Activity
Treating Bed 1.000
Cracking Bed Ration
950+ Ring Opening
Activity
Treating Bed 1.000
Cracking Bed Ration
Light Gas Tuning
Factors
C1 8.900
C2 5.000
C3 1.000
C4 0.1000
Catalyst
Deactivation
Initial Deactivation Included
Constant (Initial Value and Final Value will display if
present.
Long Term Included
Deactivation Constant (Initial Value and Final Value will display if
present.
Activation Energy Included
(Initial Value and Final Value will display if
present.
WABT Bias Included
present.
Reactor Pressure
Drop Factor
Reactor 1- Bed 1 Included
present.
present.
5-104
Hydrocracker 5-105

present.
present.
• The Objective Function group displays the following

information:

Temperature Rise
RIBI Temperature Rise [C] 1.000
RIB2 Temperature Rise [C] 1.000
R2BI Temperature Rise [C] 1.000
R2B2 Temperature Rise [C] 1.000
Recycle Quench Throws
Reactor 1
Bed 1 [STD_m3/h] 720.0
Bed 1 [STD_m3/h] 720.0
Reactor 2
Bed 1 [STD_m3/h] 720.0
Bed 2 [STD_m3/h] 720.0
Purge Gas Flow - Loop 1 36.00
[STD_m3/h]
H2 Makeup 1 rate - Loop 1 36.00
[STD_m3/h]
H2 Consumption 1.000
[STD_m3/m3]
Product Flow and
Properties
Naphtha C6-430F Vol. Flow 1.000
[m3/h]
Diesel 430F-700F Vol. Flow 1.000
[m3/h]
Bottoms 700-1000F Vol. 1.000
Flow [m3/h]
Resid 1000F + Vol. Flow 1.000
[m3/h]
C1C2 Yield [%] 1.00
C3 Yield [%] 1.00
C4 Yield [%] 1.00
5-105

Sulfur in Bottom 700+F 10.00
[ppmwt]
Nitrogen in Bottom 700+F 10.00
[ppmwt]
Mass Balance Page

The Mass Balance page reports the errors in the mass flow
rates. The page also reports the adjusted mass flows that are
used in the calibration, based on how you have decided to
distribute the error in the Validation Wizard.
Figure 5.77
The following table list and describes the groups in the Mass
Balance page:
Section Displays data on

Feed Group • Stream Name
• Mass Flow [kg/h]
• Hydrogen Flow [kg/h]
Material Balance • Closures (Measured/Adjusted)
5-106
Hydrocracker 5-107
Section Displays data on

Product Group • Stream name (Measured Mass Flow/Adjusted
Mass Flow and Ass. Bias)
Chemical Hydrogen • Consumption
Feed Blend Page

The Feed Blend page on the Analysis tab of the Calibration
property view displays the detailed characterization of each
individual feed and the blend of feeds going to each riser
location.
Figure 5.78
Note:
• If there are two reactors, or there is a feed mid-point
injection, you can use the Blend Properties at
Selected Reactor Location list to choose the location
to display.
5-107
Product Yields Page

The Product Yields page on the Analysis tab of the Calibration
property view displays the standard Cut yields from the
simulation.
Figure 5.79

Depending on the radio button selected, the Yields group
displays the yields for standard cuts or the fractionated yields.

Fractionator tab.
5-108
Hydrocracker 5-109

The Product Properties page on the Analysis tab of the
Calibration view displays the calculated physical properties of
Figure 5.80
The Product Properties group displays the following values for

each of the stream(s) listed:
• API Gravity
• Specific Gravity
• Sulfur [%]
• Total Nitrogen [ppmwt]
• Basic Nitrogen [ppmwt]
• Paraffins [%]
• Naphthenes [%]
• Aromatics [%]
• RON
• MON
• Smoke Point [mm}
• Freeze Point [C]
• Flash Point [C]
5-109
• Cetane Index
• Four POint [C]
• Watson K
• Viscosity @ 100F [cP]

Depending on the radio button selected, the Product Properties
group displays the properties for standard cuts or the properties
for the fractionated products.

Fractionator tab.
Reactor Page
The Reactor page on the Analysis tab of the Calibration property
view displays the key simulation results of the reactor. The
results displayed depend on the configuration of the HCR.
Figure 5.81
5-110
Hydrocracker 5-111

Figure 5.82
Fractionator Page
The Fractionator page on the Analysis tab of the Calibration
property view displays the fractionator solver tuning
parameters.
The Section-based solver tuning parameters group displays for

each zone:
• Top Index
• Bottom Index
• Top R2
• Bottom R2
The TBP Cut Points group displays the calculated cut point to
match the specified flow rate of each zone.
5-111

The Hydrogen Balance page on the Analysis tab of the
Calibration property view displays key hydrogen balance
information and hydrogen-balance-related information.
Figure 5.83
The Hydrogen balance page reports the following data:
Group Displays data on

H2 Consumption • Bed 1 [STD-m3/h]
• Bed 2 [STD-m3/h]
• Sum [STD-m3/h]
H2 Balance • H2 Flow in Makeup 1 [STD-m3/h]
• H2 Flow in Makeup 2 [STD-m3/h]
• H2 Flow in Total Makeup [STD-m3/h]
• H2 Makeup per Feed Flow [STD-m3/m3]
• H2 Flow in Purge [STD-m3/h]
• H2 Purge per Feed Flow [STD-m3/m3]
• Total H2 Consumption [STD-m3/h]
• Total H2 Consumption per Feed Flow [STD-
m3/h]
• Total H2 Losses [STD-m3/h]
• H2 Losses per Feed Flow [STD-m3/m3]
5-112
Hydrocracker 5-113
Worksheet Page
The Worksheet page on the Advanced tab of the Calibration
property view displays the summary of the calibration results.
Each row in the table corresponds to each variable from every

other Analysis page, and each column for every included data
sets in the calibration run.
Figure 5.84
5.10 References
1
"The Lower It Goes, The Tougher It Gets," Bradford L. Bjorklund, Neil
Howard, Timothy Heckel, David Lindsay, and Dave Piasecki,
presented at presented at the NPRA 2000 Annual Meeting, Paper
No. AM-00-16, March 26-28, 2000.
2 "Improve Refinery Margins and Produce Low-Sulfur Fuels," Scott W.
Shorey, David A. Lomas, and William H. Keesom, World Refining
Special Edition: Sulfur 2000, Summer 1999, p. 41.
5-113
5-114 References
5-114
Petroleum Column 6-1
6 Petroleum Column
6.1 Introduction................................................................................... 2
6.1.1 Petroleum Column Conventions .................................................. 3
6.2 Petroleum Column Theory.............................................................. 4

6.2.1 Zone-By-Zone Method............................................................... 4
6.2.2 Stage-By-Stage Method ............................................................ 8
6.2.3 TBP Cut Points ......................................................................... 9
6.3 Petroleum Column Installation .................................................... 12

6.3.1 Refinery Column Input Experts................................................. 13
6.4 Petroleum Distillation Column Property View .............................. 20

6.4.1 Design Tab ............................................................................ 22
6.4.2 Worksheet Tab ....................................................................... 37
6.4.3 Performance Tab .................................................................... 37
6.4.4 Calibration Tab....................................................................... 53
6-1
6-2 Introduction
6.1 Introduction
The Petroleum Column provides users with the capability to
model columns in a refinery. The Petroleum Column has been
specifically designed to help users with solving the following
problems:
• Simulation of a Petroleum Column for a wide range of
crude oils within an optimization or gradient generation
scenario. In this situation, the column needs to be
simulated over and over again, and the column should
converge quickly and consistently in all scenarios.
• Manually calibrate the Petroleum Column from plant
data.
If you require significant internal details of the column such

as vapor-liquid traffic or temperature profiles matching very
closely to plant data, or if you are interested in extreme
flexibility in the specifications or the topology of the column,
you need to use the standard HYSYS column.
The focus of the Petroleum Column is to model the imperfect

separation of crude and other feeds that occur in the refining
industry as possible. The modeling of imperfect fractionation
plays a very important role in overall refinery economics.
Conversely the focus is not to use the tool as a detailed design
tool.
The Petroleum Column model has the following capabilities:

• Allows one feed.
• Allows you to place reboiled or steam-striped side-
strippers.
• Allows you to place pump-arounds.
• Allows you to specify the flow-ratio of each product with
respect to the feed, or the TBP cut-point of a product
with respect to the feed.
• Calculates the composition, distillation curves,
temperature and flow for each of the products.
• Calculates the petroleum properties for each of the
products of the Petroleum Column.
• Calculates pump around duties.
The Petroleum Column supports the use of two solution

strategies: Zone-by-zone and Stage-by-stage.
6-2
6.1.1 Petroleum Column

Conventions
Column Tray Sections, Overhead Condensers, and Bottom
Reboilers are each defined as individual unit operations.
Condensers and Reboilers are not numbered stages, as they are
considered to be separate from the Tray Section.
By making the individual components of the column separate

pieces of equipment, there is easier access to equipment
information, as well as the streams connecting them.
The following are some of the conventions, definitions, and

descriptions of the basic columns:
Column Component Description

Tray Section A HYSYS unit operation that represents the series
of equilibrium trays in a Column.
Stages Stages are numbered from the top down or from
the bottom up, depending on your preference.
The top tray is 1, and the bottom tray is N for the
top-down numbering scheme. The stage
numbering preference can be selected on the
Connections page of the Design tab on the
Column property view.
Overhead Vapor The overhead vapour product is the vapour
Product leaving the top tray of the Tray Section in simple
Absorbers and Reboiled Absorbers. In Refluxed
Absorbers and Distillation Towers, the overhead
vapour product is the vapour leaving the
Condenser.
Overhead Liquid The overhead liquid product is the Distillate
Product leaving the Condenser in Refluxed Absorbers and
Distillation Towers. There is no top liquid product
in simple Absorbers and Reboiled Absorbers.
Bottom Liquid The bottom liquid product is the liquid leaving the
Product bottom tray of the Tray Section in simple
Absorbers and Refluxed Absorbers. In Reboiled
Absorbers and Distillation Columns, the bottom
liquid product is the liquid leaving the Reboiler.
Overhead Condenser An Overhead Condenser represents a combined
Cooler and separation stage, and is not given a
stage number.
6-3
6-4 Petroleum Column Theory
6.2 Petroleum Column

Theory
The Petroleum Column has two methods to solve and converge
the column: Zone-by-zone and Stage-by-Stage.
6.2.1 Zone-By-Zone Method

The Zone-by-zone solution strategy is based on fractionation
indices and has the following features:
• Applicable over a very wide range of feeds.
• Consistent between simulation and calibration.
• Moderately accurate beyond the region of calibration.
For example:
Consider a simple distillation column with one feed and two
products only. For near ideal systems such as hydrocarbon
systems, it is possible to correlate the distillate and bottoms
flow as shown in the figure below:
Figure 6.1
6-4
If one plots the quantity ln(Di/Bi) vs. NBPi for each component i,
the plot is typically bilinear.
where:
Di = molar component flow of component i in the distillate
Bi = molar component flow of component flow of component i

in the bottoms
NBP = normal boiling point of the component
The slope of the curve signifies the extent of imperfect

fractionation. As S tends to zero, there is virtually no separation,
and inversely as S tends to negative infinity, the separation is
almost perfect. The position of the curve horizontally is decided
by the overall distillate and bottoms flow distribution.
HYSYS assume that the slopes of the curves drawn above are
only a characteristic of the structure of the column, and are
independent of the feed or the pressure or other operating
conditions. This assumption enables HYSYS to calculate the
product composition of the distillate and bottoms streams, for a
wide range of feed conditions. Furthermore, HYSYS assume that
all Petroleum Columns are in indirect sequence of simple
columns.
Based on these assumptions the composition of the streams

coming out of each sections of the column can be calculated
using the following equations described below:
• For each section:
d N, i –1
ln ⎛⎝ ---------⎞⎠ = ------------ ( NBP i ) + K D, N If d i > b i for all i
b N, i φ D, N
(6.1)
–1
= ⎛ ----------- ( NBP i ) + K B, N⎞ If d i < b i for all i
⎝ φ B, N ⎠
f N, i = d N, i + b N, i for all i (6.2)
DN = ∑ d N, i (6.3)
i
6-5
BN = ∑ b N, i (6.4)
i
F N = DN + B N (6.5)
• For two consecutive sections:
FN – 1 = DN (6.6)
where:
N = section in the column
fN,i = i component flow rate in feed for section N
dN,i = i component flow rate in distillate for section N
bN,i = i component flow rate in bottoms for section N

φ D, N = fractionation index for the distillate section N
φ B, N = fractionation index for the bottom section N
KD,N = intercept for the distillate section N
KB,N = intercept for the bottom section N
DN = total distillate flow for section N
BN = total bottom flow for section N
FN = total feed flow for section N
You are required to specify fractionation indices for each

section, pressure for each section, and product flow fractions
for each product coming out of the column including the
condenser.
The sections are numbered from bottom of the column to the
top of the column.
The above system of equations is then solved for dN,i, bN,i, fN,i,
KD,N, and KB,N.
6-6
Water Handling
The above equations are based on the assumption of a water-
free basis. As a result the quantity of water calculated through
the above equations is zero. A separate water balance is
performed on the whole column after the hydrocarbon
component flow rates have been calculated. It is assumed that
each of the product streams is 75% saturated with water.
Knowing the water-free composition of each (liquid) product
stream, HYSYS compute the saturation amount of water. This
enables HYSYS to calculate the composition of the water in
liquid product streams. The remaining water leaves from the top
of the column.
Condenser Handling
The condenser is dealt with separately. The feed to the
condenser is the distillate from the top section. From your
specification of the amount of vapor and liquid product from the
condenser, HYSYS can calculate the composition of each of the
vapor and liquid products as well as the quantity of the water
that will be in the vapor phase and the quantity of water that will
be in a separate aqueous phase. The temperature of the
condenser will also be calculated.
6-7
6.2.2 Stage-By-Stage Method

The Stage-by-stage solution strategy as the name suggests,
uses the Stage-by-stage HYSIM IO solver to solve the mass and
energy balance in the column. This solution strategy has the
following features:
• Accurate over a wide range of feeds, extrapolates well.
• Accounts for pressure effects of separation.
• Accounts for change in vapor-liquid equilibrium
behaviour with the feed and other operating conditions.
• Will fail to solve if the specifications provided are
infeasible. A typical example of an infeasible spec is a
very low liquid flow in the bottom of the column, even
though the feed is not hot enough.
• A strategy for calibrating with this solution strategy is
under development and is not available in this version.
The Stage-by-stage solver uses the standard HYSIM I/O

algorithm, and the Petroleum Column automatically generates
all the specifications required by the HYSIM I/O solver.
The Petroleum Column applies the following structural

assumptions to generate the specifications:
• Each pump-around draw and return is one theoretical
stage.
• Each side-stripper draw and return is on the same
theoretical stage.
• A pump-around may or may not exist for each separation
zone.
• If the pump-around exists, it is placed on the stage
below the side-stripper draw (and return).
The following set of specifications are generated:

• Bottoms flow rate calculated from the TBP or the flow
spec that you provide.
• Every side-stripper product flow-rate calculated from the
TBP or flow-specs that you provide.
• Each pump-around DT is set to 50°C.
• For each pump-around the liquid flow on the tray above
is set to nearly zero.
• You must specify steam-flow or side-stripper reboiler
duty.
6-8
6.2.3 TBP Cut Points

The petroleum column uses the TBP cut point specification to
determine the quality of the product streams. The TBP cut point
can be best described using the example in the figure below:
Figure 6.2
Overhead Naphtha Kero Gas Oil Residue
100°C 250°C 280°C 320°C 500°C
In the above case, the intention is to inform the column to split

the crude oil into five product streams.
The five product streams will have the following qualities:

• top product is cut from the initial boiling point of the
crude up to 100°C
• naphtha product is cut between 100°C and 250°C
• kero product is cut between 250°C and 280°C
• gasoline product is cut between 280°C and 320°C
• residue product is cut from 320°C to the final boiling
point of the crude
These cut points are translated into molar flow fractions of the
feed.
6-9
The figure below displays an example of the cut points

translated into molar flow fractions:
Figure 6.3
In a crude column, there are no degree of freedom to exactly

achieve the specified cut points at both ends of the column.
Furthermore, the column achieves perfect separation only at
infinite number of stages.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining is able to model the imperfect

separation and therefore achieve the separation as shown in the
6-10
figure below:
Figure 6.4
Portion of Naphtha in
Overhead
Portion of Overhead
in Naphtha.
Overhead Naphtha
Individual cut
The above type of cut is also exemplified in the TBP 5% and

TBP 95% columns of the TBP cut point specification table
(shown in the figure below):
Figure 6.5
The values in the TBP 5% and TBP 95% columns are

calculated by Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining and indicates
what the product stream actually achieve in the simulation.
6-11
6-12 Petroleum Column Installation
6.3 Petroleum Column

Installation
There are two ways to install a Petroleum Column to your
simulation:
1. In the Flowsheet menu, click the Add Operation
command. The UnitOps property view appears.
You can also access the UnitOps property view by pressing
the F12 hot key.
button.
3. From the list of available unit operations, select Petroleum
Distillation.
OR
object palette.
2. Double-click the Petroleum Distillation icon.
The Refinery Column Input Experts property view appears.

Petroleum Distillation
icon
You do not have to install the Petroleum Column through
Refinery Column Input Experts property view. You can turn off
the Input Expert option and configure the Petroleum Column
from the Petroleum Distillation Column property view.
To deactivate the Input Expert option:

1. Click the Tools menu, and select the Preferences
command.
The Session Preferences property view appears.
2. In the Session Preferences property view, click the
Simulation tab and select the Options page.
3. In the General Options group, clear the Use Input Experts
checkbox.
6-12
6.3.1 Refinery Column Input

Experts
The Refinery Column Input Experts (RCIE) guides you through
the installation of a Petroleum Column.
The RCIE contains a series of input pages whereby you must

specify the required information for the page before advancing
to the next one. When you have worked through all the pages,
you have specified the basic information required to build your
Petroleum Column. You are then placed in the Petroleum
Column property view which gives comprehensive access to
most of the column features.
The following sections describe each input page in the RCIE:
Connections Page
The Connections page of the RCIE allows you to specify the
material and energy streams flowing into and out of the
Petroleum Column.
Figure 6.6
6-13
HYSYS recommends you select one of the last few trays at

the bottom of the petroleum column for the Feed Stage.
Side Stripper Page

The Side Stripper page of the RCIE allows you to add, configure,
and delete side strippers connected to the Petroleum Column.
Figure 6.7
The Basis group contains radio buttons that enables you to

select the unit of the flow rate displayed in the Installed Side
Strippers table. There are three units to choose from: molar,
mass, or liquid volume.
The Installed Side Strippers table displays the following

information on each side stripper connected to the Petroleum
column:
• name of the side stripper
• number of stages in the side stripper
• draw and return stage/tray of the side stripper
• configuration of the side stripper (Reboiled or Steam
Stripped)
• reboiler duty (values only available if the configuration is
Reboiled)
• steam flow rate (values only available if the configuration
is Steam Stripped)
6-14
To add a side stripper:

1. Click the Add Side Stripper button.
The Side Strippers page changes and the options for
configuring a side stripper appears.
Figure 6.8
2. Use the top drop-down list to select the stage where the side
stripper stream is withdrawn and pump back into.
3. Enter the number of trays for the side stripper by typing the
total number of trays in the k = field.
4. Select the configuration for the side stripper by clicking the
appropriate radio button in the Configuration group.
• If you selected Reboiled radio button, the side stripper
uses a reboiler.
• If you selected Steam Stripped radio button, the side
stripper requires a steam stream. In the Steam Feed
field, either type in the name of the stream or if you have
pre-defined your stream select it from the drop-down
list.
5. In the Product Stream field, either type in the name of the
stream or if you have pre-defined your stream select it from
the drop-down list.
6. Click the Install button to install the side stripper.
You can click the Clear button to remove all the information
and start configuring the side stripper all over again.
6-15
The Side Strippers page returns to the previous property

view and the information on the new side stripper appears in
the Installed Side Strippers table.
Figure 6.9
7. Repeat all the above steps to add another side stripper.
To delete an existing side stripper:

1. In the Installed Side Strippers table, select a cell
associated to the side stripper you want to modify.
2. Click the Delete Side Stripper button.
3. You will be ask to confirm the deletion:
• Click the Yes button to delete the selected side stripper.
• Click the No button to not delete the selected side
stripper.
6-16
To modify an existing side stripper:

1. In the Installed Side Strippers table, select a cell
associated to the side stripper you want to modify.
2. Click the View Side Stripper button.
The Side Stripper property view appears.
Figure 6.10
3. Make the modifications and click the Close button.

You can also delete the selected side stripper by clicking the
Delete button.
6-17
Zones Page
The Zones page of the RCIE allows you to specify the pressure,
pump around (PA), and tuning parameters in each zone of the
Petroleum Column.
Figure 6.11
HYSYS recommends 5 for the Top and Bottom Intercept

values.
6-18
Specs Page
Refer to Section 6.2.3 - The Specs page of the RCIE allows you to specify the TBP cut
TBP Cut Points for more point or product stream flow fraction of the Petroleum Column.
information on TBP cut
points.
Figure 6.12
Refer to Chapter 12 - It is not necessary to use the RCIE to install a Petroleum

Session Preferences in Column. You can disable and enable the use of RCIE on the
the HYSYS User Guide
for details on how to Options page in the Simulation tab of the Session Preferences
access the Session property view. If you do not use the RCIE, you move directly to
Preferences property
view.
the Petroleum Distillation Column property view when you install
a new Petroleum Column.
6-19
6-20 Petroleum Distillation Column
6.4 Petroleum Distillation

Column Property View
The Petroleum Distillation Column property view is sectioned
into tabs containing pages with information pertaining to the
column. The Petroleum Distillation Column property view is
accessible from the main flowsheet.
Figure 6.13
The column property view is used to define specifications,

provide estimates, monitor convergence, view Stage-by-stage
and product stream summaries, add pump-arounds and side-
strippers, and define other Petroleum Column parameters such
as convergence tolerances.
HYSYS recommends you select one of the last few trays at

the bottom of the petroleum column for the Feed Stage.
6-20
The following table lists and describes the common objects at

the bottom of the Petroleum Column property view:
Object Description
Delete Enables you to delete the Petroleum Column. HYSYS will
button ask you to confirm deletion.
Run button Enables you to start the column calculation to converge the
column. The button hides when the column convergence
calculation is in progress.
Reset button Enables you to reset all calculated values in the column to
the default values. The button hides when the column
convergence calculation is in progress.
Stop button Enables you to stop the column calculation before column
convergence. The button is only available when the column
convergence calculation is in progress.
Status bar Displays the status of the Petroleum Column.
To Rigorous Enables you to switch from Zone-by-zone solver to Stage-
button by-stage solver method.
Ignore Enables you to toggle between ignoring or considering the
checkbox Petroleum Column during process flowsheet calculations.
Column Convergence
The Run and Reset buttons are used to start the convergence
algorithm and reset the Column, respectively. HYSYS first
performs iterations toward convergence of the inner and outer
loops (Equilibrium and Heat/Spec Errors), and then checks the
individual specification tolerances.
If you want to modify the Petroleum Column after you have

converged said column, you should click the Solver Holding
Solver Holding icon icon before modifying the values.
By stopping the Solver option, you can change multiple
values without waiting for the entire Petroleum Column to
solve and converge every time a single value changes.
6-21
6.4.1 Design Tab

The Design tab contains all the options required to configure the
Petroleum Column. The options are grouped into the following
pages:
• Connections
• Zones
• Side Strippers
• Side Draws
• Specs
• SolverOptns
• Notes
Connections page
The Connections page enables you to configure the streams
(material or energy) flowing into and out of the column and
specify the number of trays within the column.
Figure 6.14
6-22

Connections page:
Object Description
Column Name field Enables you to specify a name for the petroleum
distillation column.
Condenser Energy Enables you to specify or select an energy stream
Stream field for the condenser.
Ovhd Outlets fields The top field enables you to specify the vapour
outlet stream of the condenser.
The bottom field enables you to specify the liquid
outlet stream of the condenser.
For more information on Solver group Contains radio buttons that enable you to toggle
Zone-by-zone and Stage- between Zone-by-zone or Stage-by-stage
by-stage solver methods, calculation method.
refer to Section 6.2 -
Inlet Streams table Contains two columns that enable you to connect
Petroleum Column
the streams flowing into the column.
Theory.
• Stream column enables you to specify or
select feed streams.
• Inlet Stage column enables you to select
the stage/tray number the associate feed
stream is entering.
# Stages n field Enables you to specify the number of tray/stages
in the column.
Edit Tray button Enables you to access the Tray Section Details
Property View.
Stripping Steam field Enables you to specify or select the steam stream
entering from the bottom of the petroleum
distillation column.
Water Draw field Enables you to specify or select the water stream
flowing out of the condenser.
Optional Side Draws Contains columns that enable you to configure the
table side draw streams flowing out of the column.
• Stream column enables you to specify or
select the stream exiting the column.
• Type column displays the phase of the
associate side draw stream.
• Draw Stage column enables you to select
the stage/tray the associate stream is flowing
out of.
Stage Numbering Contains two radio buttons that enable you to
group toggle between numbering the stages/trays in the
column top-down or bottom-up format.
• Top Down radio button numbers the top tray
as 1 and increases the number for each tray
below.
• Bottom Up radio button numbers the bottom
tray as 1 and increases the number for each
tray above.
Residue field Enables you to specify or select the waste stream
flowing out from the bottom of the column.
6-23
Tray Section Details Property View

The Tray Section Details property view enables you to edit the
number of trays in the column, and add or delete trays after or
before the tray number of your choice in this property view.
Figure 6.15
Zones Page
In the Zone-by-zone solver method, the number of stages is no
longer specifiable. So you need to specify zone information to
help the column converge. The Zones page enables you to
define zone pressure and tuning parameters in the Petroleum
Column.
Figure 6.16
6-24
The following table lists and describes each object in the Zones
page:
Object Description
Zone Information group
Zone Start cell Displays the starting point of each zone in the
Petroleum Column.
Zone End cell Displays the end point of each zone in the
Petroleum Column.
PA cell Contains a checkbox that enables you to toggle
between connecting or removing a pump around
with the associate zone.
Associated SS cell Displays the name of the side stripper associated
to each zone.
Zone Top Pressure Enables you to specify the top pressure for each
cell zone.
Bottom Pressure Enables you to specify the bottom pressure of the
field Petroleum Column.
Refer to Section 6.4.4 - Copy Column Data to Enables you to export the column data to the
Calibration Tab for Calibration button Calibration tab.
more information.
Tuning Parameters group
For more information, Top Index cell Enables you to specify the top slope value of the
refer to Section 6.2.1 - imperfect fractionation for each zone.
Zone-By-Zone Method. • Index value of 1 indicates perfect separation.
• Larger index value indicates less perfect
separation.
HYSYS recommends an average tuning parameter
value of 5 for the imperfect fractionation value.
Bottom Index cell Enables you to specify the bottom slope value of
the imperfect fractionation for each zone.
• Index value of 1 indicates perfect separation.
• Larger index value indicates less perfect
separation.
HYSYS recommends an average tuning parameter
value of 5 for the imperfect fractionation value.
Refer to Section 6.4.4 - Copy Tuning Enables you to import the tuning parameter data
Calibration Tab for Parameter from from the Calibration tab.
more information. Calibration button
6-25
Side Stripper Page

The Side Stripper page allows you to add, delete, and modify a
reboiler or steam-stripped side stripper attached to the column.
Figure 6.17
For any side stripper, you must specify the number of stages,
the liquid draw-and-return stage, and the steam stream flow
rate or the reboiler duty. These parameters (except for the
number of stages) can be modified in the Side Stripper page and
the Side Stripper property view.
The following table lists and describes each object in the Side
Stripper page:
Object Description
Basis group Contains three radio buttons that enable you to
toggle between the following three types of basis
for the data in the tables: molar, mass, or liquid
volume.
Input group
first column Displays the name of the side strippers.
# Stages column Displays the number of trays in the associate side
stripper.
Liq Draw Stage Enables you to select the draw-and-return stage
column from the main column for the associate side
stripper.
6-26
Object Description
Configuration Displays the side stripper type: reboiler or steam
column stripped.
Reboiler Duty cell Enables you to specify the amount of heat flowing
from the reboiler.
Steam Flow cell Enables you to specify the amount of steam
flowing into the side stripper.
View button Enables you to access the Side Stripper
Property View of the selected side stripper.
Add button Enables you to add a side stripper to the
petroleum distillation column.
Delete button Enables you to delete the selected side stripper
from the petroleum distillation column.
Output group
first column Displays the name of the side strippers.
Liquid Draw Stage Enables you to select the draw-and-return stage
cell from the main column.
Outlet Flow cell Displays the flow rate of the product stream from
the side stripper.
Side Stripper Property View

The Side Stripper property view can be accessed by one of the
following methods:
• On the Side Stripper page, select a cell of a side
stripper and click the View button.
• On the Side Stripper page, click the Add button. A new
side stripper is added.
Figure 6.18
6-27
The following table lists and describes each object in the Side
Stripper property view:
Object Description
Name field Enables you to enter the name of the side stripper.
Tray Location drop- Enables you to select the draw-and-return stage
down list from the main column.
Configuration group Enables you to select the side stripper
configuration by selecting the appropriate radio
button. There are two types available: reboiler and
steam stripped.
This group is only available when you are installing
the side stripper for the first time.
k = field Enables you to specify the number of trays in the
side stripper.
Steam Feed field Enables you to connect the steam stream to the
side stripper. You can either type in the name of
the stream or if you have pre-defined your
streams select them from the drop-down list.
This field is only available if you select the Steam
Stripped radio button.
Reboiler Duty Spec Enables you to specify the amount of heat flow
field from the reboiler into the side stripper.
This field is only available if you select the
Reboiler radio button and click the Install
button.
Product Stream field Enables you to connect the product stream to the
side stripper. You can either type in the name of
the stream or if you have pre-defined your
streams select them from the drop-down list.
Delete button Enables you to delete the side stripper.
Install button Enables you to install the side stripper.
This button is only available when you are
installing the side stripper for the first time.
Close button Enables you to save the changes made in the side
stripper property view.
This button is only available after you have
installed the side stripper.
6-28
Side Draws Page

The Side Draws page enables you to configure the location of
the side draw streams and view the flow rate of the side draw
streams.
Figure 6.19

the Side Draws page:
Object Description
Basis group Contains three radio buttons that enable you to
toggle between the following three types of basis
for the data in the table: molar, mass, or liquid
volume.
Draw Stream column Enables you to specify or select the draw streams
flowing out of the petroleum distillation column.
Draw Stage column Enables you to select the stage/tray the associate
draw stream is connected to.
Type column Displays the phase type of the associate draw
stream.
Draw Stream Flow Displays the flow rate of the associate draw
stream.
6-29
Specs Page
Refer to Section 6.2.3 - The Specs page enables you to specify values used in the
TBP Cut Points for more
information about TBP cut Petroleum Column convergence algorithm. Unlike the other
points. Columns in HYSYS, the Petroleum Column is limited to two types
of specifications: TBP End Points and Product Yields.
Figure 6.20
The following table lists and describes all the objects available in
the Specs page. Depending on which option you select in the
Spec Option group, some of the objects are hidden.
Object Description
TBP End Points radio Enables you to access the TBP End Points
button specification options.
Product Yields radio Enables you to access the Product Yields
button specification options
first column Displays all the streams flowing out of the
petroleum distillation column.
TBP End Point Enables you to specify the boiling point
column temperature for each product stream in the
Petroleum Column.
This object is only available if you select the TBP
Cut Point radio button.
Product Yield column Displays the molar fraction value from the feed
stream to the associate outlet stream.
6-30
Object Description
TBP 5% column Displays the boiling point temperature for each
product stream at 5%.
TBP 95% column Displays the boiling point temperature for each
product stream at 95%.
Product Yield column Enables you to specify the fraction of the feed
stream to the product streams.
This object is only available if you select the
Product Flow Fraction radio button.
Total field Displays the sum of fractions from the feed
stream. The sum value must equal 1.
This object is only available if you select the
Product Flow Fraction radio button.
Product Yield Enables you to select the unit basis for the
Fraction Basis group specified values. There are three options: molar,
mass, and volume.
This option is only applicable to the Product Flow
Fraction specification option.
Minimum Bottom Displays the minimum feed fraction values for the
Spec field residue product stream.
If the minimum fraction value is higher than the
specified fraction value, the petroleum column will
not solve or converge in rigorous/Stage-by-stage
solving method.
To decrease the minimum fraction value, you have
to increase the feed stream temperature, and vice
versa.
Copy Specifications Enables you to populate the specification data with
from Calibration the information from the Products page of the
button Calibration tab.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining automatically normalize

the values in the Feed Fraction column, so that the sum of
the values equal 1.
6-31
SolverOptns Page
The SolverOptns page enables you to manipulate how the
column solves the column variables.
Figure 6.21
There are two groups in the SolverOptns page: Solving Options

and Solving Methods.
Solving Options Group

This group contains parameters that you can manipulate to your
preferences for the column solving behaviour.
Figure 6.22
The Solving Options group contains options only applicable to

the Stage-by-stage solving method.
6-32
If Zone-by-zone solving method is selected, the options in the

Solving Options group are hidden.
Maximum Number of Iterations

The Column convergence process terminates if the maximum
number of iterations is reached. The default value is 10000, and
applies to the outer iterations. If you are using Newton's
method, and the inner loop does not converge within 50
iterations, the convergence process terminates.
Equilibrium and Heat/Spec Tolerances

Convergence tolerances are pre-set to very tight values, thus
ensuring that regardless of the starting estimates (if provided)
for column temperatures, flow rates, and compositions, HYSYS
always converges to the same solution. However, you have the
option of changing these two values if you want. Default values
are:
• Inner Loop. Heat and Spec Error: 5.000e-04
• Outer Loop. Equilibrium Error: 1.000e-05
Because the default values are already very small, you should
use caution in making them any smaller. You should not make
these tolerances looser (larger) for preliminary work to reduce
computer time. The time savings are usually minor, if any. Also,
if the column is in a recycle or adjust loop, this could cause
difficulty for the loop convergence.
Equilibrium Error
The value of the equilibrium error printed during the column
iterations represents the error in the calculated vapour phase
mole fractions. The error over each stage is calculated as one
minus the sum of the component vapour phase mole fractions.
This value is then squared; the total equilibrium error is the sum
of the squared values. The total equilibrium error must be less
than 0.00001 to be considered a converged column.
6-33
Heat and Spec Error

The heat and specification error is the sum of the absolute
values of the heat error and the specification error, summed
over each stage in the tower.
This total value is divided by the number of inner loop

equations. The heat error contribution is the heat flow
imbalance on each tray divided by the total average heat flow
through the stage.
The specification error contribution is the sum of each individual

specification error divided by an appropriate normalization
factor.
For component(s) flow, the normalization factor is the actual

component(s) flow; for composition, it is the actual mole
fraction; for vapour pressure and temperature it is a value of
5000; etc. The total sum of heat and spec errors must be less
than 0.0005 to be considered a converged column.
The allowed equilibrium error and heat and spec error are
tighter than in most programs, but this is necessary to avoid
meta-stable solutions, and to ensure satisfactory column heat
and material balances.
Save Solution as Initial Estimate

This option is on by default, and it saves converged solutions as
estimates for the next solution.
Super Critical Handling Model

Supercritical phase behaviour occurs when one or more Column
stages are operating above the critical point of one or more
components. During the convergence process, super critical
behaviour can be encountered on one or more stages in the
Column. If HYSYS encounters super critical phase behaviour,
appropriate messages appear in the Trace Window.
6-34
HYSYS cannot use the equation of state or activity model in the

super critical range, so an alternate method must be used. You
can specify which method you want HYSYS to use to model the
phase behaviour. There are three choices for super critical
calculations:
Model Description
Refer to Chapter 1 - Simple K The default method. HYSYS calculates K-values for the
Interface in the HYSYS components based on the vapour pressure model
User Guide for details on being used. Using this method, the K-values which are
the Trace Window. calculated are ideal K-values.
Decrease When supercritical conditions are encountered, HYSYS
Pressure reduces the pressure on all trays by an internally
determined factor, which can be seen in the Trace
Window when the Verbose option is used. This factor is
gradually decreased until supercritical conditions no
longer exist on any tray, at which point, the pressure in
the column is gradually increased to your specified
pressure. If supercritical conditions are encountered
during the pressure increase, the pressure is once
again reduced and the process is repeated.
Adjacent Tray When supercritical conditions are encountered on a
tray, HYSYS searches for the closest tray above which
does not have supercritical behaviour. The non-
supercritical conditions are substituted in the phase
calculations for the tray with supercritical conditions.
Trace Level
The Trace Level defines the level of detail for messages
displayed in the Trace Window, and can be set to Low, Medium,
or High. The default is Low.
Initialize from Ideal K’s

When this checkbox is selected, HYSYS initializes its column
solution using ideal K values which are calculated from vapour
pressure correlations. The ideal K-value option, which is also
used by HYSIM, increases the compatibility between HYSIM and
HYSYS.
By default, the Initialize from Ideal K's checkbox is cleared.

HYSYS uses specified composition estimates or generates
estimates to rigorously calculate K-values.
6-35
Two Liquids Check Based on

This option allows you to specify a check for two liquid phases in
the column. The check is based on one of the following criteria:
• No 2 Liq Check. Disables the two liquid check.
• Tray Liquid Fluid. The calculation is based on the
composition of the liquid in the column.
• Tray Total Fluid. The calculation is based on the overall
composition of the fluid in the column.
Tighten Water Tolerance

When this checkbox is selected, HYSYS increases the
contribution of the water balance error to the overall balance
error in order to solve columns with water more accurately. The
default setting for this checkbox is clear.
Auto Reset On
When this checkbox is selected, HYSYS resets the column values
once during convergence calculation, if during the calculation
the heat and spec errors do not reduce by more than 15%.
Solving Method Group

For more information on This group contains two radio buttons that enables you to select
the solving method
available for the the column solution method.
Petroleum Column, refer
to Section 6.2 - Figure 6.23
Petroleum Column
Theory.
The display field, which appears below the drop-down list,

provides explanations for each method.
6-36
Notes Page
comments or information regarding the specific unit operation,
Notes Page/Tab.
or your simulation case in general.
6.4.2 Worksheet Tab

information. contained in the stream property view for all the streams
attached to the unit operation.
6.4.3 Performance Tab

On the Performance tab, you can view the results of a converged
column on the Summary page, Column Profiles page, and
Feeds/Products page. You can also view the graphical and
tabular presentation of the column profile on the Plots page.
6-37
Summary Page
The Summary page gives a tabular summary of the feed or
product stream properties. Select the appropriate radio button
to display the information you want to see.
Figure 6.24
Figure 6.25
6-38
Column Profiles Page

The Column Profiles page gives a tabular summary of Column
stage temperatures, pressures, flows, and duties.
You can view the results in molar, mass or liquid volume, by

selecting the appropriate basis radio button.
• When you select the Flow radio button, the Column

Profiles page displays the following property view:
Figure 6.26
The values
under the
Net Liquid
and Net
Vapour
columns are
the net flows
for each
stage.
6-39
• When you select the Energy radio button, the Column

Profiles page displays the following property view:
Figure 6.27
Feeds/Products Page
The Feeds/Products page gives a tabular summary of feed and
product streams tray entry/exit, temperatures, pressures, flows,
and duties.
Figure 6.28
6-40
You can view the results in molar, mass or liquid volume, by

selecting the appropriate basis radio button.
If a stream has been split, a star (*) follows the phase

designation.
You can split a feed stream into its phase components on the
Options page of the Simulation tab in the Session
Preferences property view.
If there is a duty stream on a stage, “Energy” appears in the

Type column. The direction of the energy stream is indicated by
the sign of the duty.
Energy Balance Page

The Energy Balance page displays the energy flow of any
reboilers, pumps, and condenser within the Petroleum Column.
Figure 6.29
6-41
Plots Page
On the Plots page, you can view various column profiles or assay
curves in a graphical or tabular format.
Figure 6.30
Select the Live Updates checkbox to update the profiles with

every pass of the solver (in other words, a dynamic update).
This option is deactivated by default, and performance of the
column can be a bit slower if the checkbox is on and a profile is
open.
Tray by Tray Properties Group

The options in the Tray by Tray Properties group are disabled
if the Zone by Zone solving method is selected in the
SolverOptns page of the Design tab.
To view a column profile, follow this generalized procedure:

1. Select a profile from the list in the Tray by Tray Properties
group.
The choices include: Temperature, Pressure, Flow, Transport
Properties, Composition, K Value, and Light/Heavy Key.
6-42
2. In the Column Tray Ranges group, select the appropriate

radio button:
Radio Button Action

All Displays the selected profile for all trays connected to the
column (in other words, main tray section, side strippers,
reboilers, and condenser).
Single Tower From the drop-down list, select a tray section.
The main tray section along with the condenser and
reboiler are considered one section, as is each side stripper.
From/To Use the drop-down lists to specify a specific range of the
column. The first field contains the tray that is located at a
higher spot in the tower (in other words, for top to bottom
tray numbering, the first field could be tray 3 and the
second tray 6).
3. After selecting a tray range, click either the View Graph

button or the View Table button to display a plot or table
respectively.
Figure 6.31
Plots and tables are expandible property views that can

remain open without the column property view.
Refer to Section 10.4 - To make changes to the plot, right-click in the plot area, and
Graph Control in the select Graph Control from the object inspect menu.
HYSYS User Guide for
more information.
Depending on the profile selected, you have to make further
specifications. For certain profiles, there is a Properties button
on both the profile plot and table. By clicking this button, the
6-43
Properties property view appears, where you can customize the

display of your profile. Changes made on the Properties property
view affect both the table and plot.
A description of the specifications available for each profile type

are outlined in the following table.
Profile Type Description

Temperature Displays the temperature for the tray range selected.
Profile No further specification is needed.
Pressure Profile Displays the pressure of each tray in the selected
range. No further specification is needed.
Flow Profile Displays the flow rate of each tray in the selected
range. You can customise the data displayed using the
Properties property view.
In the Basis group, select molar, mass or liquid volume
for your flow profile basis.
In the Phase group, select the checkbox for the flow of
each phase that you want to display. Multiple flows can
be shown. If three phases are not present in the
column, the Heavy Liquid checkbox is not available,
and thus, the Light Liquid checkbox represents the
liquid phase.
In the Tray Flow Basis group, you can specify the stage
tray flow basis by selecting the appropriate radio
button:
• Net. The net basis option only includes interstage
flow.
• Total. The total basis option includes draw and
pump around flow.
6-44

Transport Displays the selected properties from each tray in the
Properties selected range. You can customise the data displayed
Profile using the Properties property view:
In the Basis group, select molar or mass for the

properties profile basis.
each phase that you want to display on the graph.
Multiple flows can be shown. If three phases are not
present in the column, the Heavy Liquid checkbox is
not available.
In the Axis Assignment group, by selecting a radio
button under Left, you assign the values of the
appropriate property to the left y-axis. To display a
second property, choose the radio button under Right.
The right y-axis then shows the range of the second
property. If you want to display only one property on
the plot, select the None radio button under Right.
The Properties Profile table displays all of the
properties for the phase(s) selected.
6-45

Composition Displays the selected component’s mole fraction of
each tray in the selected range. You can customise the
data displayed using the Properties property view.

for the composition profile basis.
each phase that you want to display. Multiple flows can
be shown. If the three phases are not present in the
column, the Heavy Liquid checkbox is not available,
and thus, the Light Liquid checkbox represents the
liquid phase.
Choose either Fractions or Flows in the Comp Basis
group by selecting the appropriate radio button.
The Components group displays a list of all the
components that enter the tower. You can display the
composition profile of any component by selecting the
appropriate checkbox. The plot displays any
combination of component profiles.
6-46

K Values Profile Displays the K Values of each tray in the selected
range. You can select which components you want
included in the profile using the Properties property
view.
Light/Heavy Key Displays the fraction ratio for each stage. You can
Profile customise the data displayed using the Properties
property view.

for the profile basis.
In the Phase group, select Vapour, Light Liquid or
Heavy Liquid for the profile phase.
In the Light Key(s) and Heavy Key(s) groups, you can
select the key component(s) to include in your profile.
Assay Curves Group

Figure 6.32
From the Assay Curves group, you can create plots and tables
for the following properties:
• Boiling Point Assay
• Molecular Weight Assay
• Density Assay
• User Properties
For each of the options, you can display curves for a single tray
or multiple trays. To display a plot or table, make a selection
from the list, and click either the View Graph button or the
View Table button.
6-47
The figure below is an example of how a Boiling Point Properties

plot appears.
Figure 6.33
Data Control Property View

Click the Profile Data Control button, which is located on
bottom left corner of every plot and table, to open the Data
Control property view. This property view is common to all plots
and tables on the Curves page. For a selected curve, all changes
made on the Data Control property view affect the data of both
the plot and table.
6-48
The Data Control property view consists of four groups as shown

in the figure below.
Figure 6.34
The following table describes each data control option available

according to group name.
Group Description
Style Select either the Multi Tray or Single Tray radio button.
The layout of the Data Control property view differs slightly
for each selection.
• For the Single Tray selection, you must open the drop-
down list and select one tray.
• For the Multi Tray selection, the drop-down list is
replaced by a list of all the trays in the column. Each
tray has a corresponding checkbox, which you can
select to display the tray property on the plot or table.
Refer to Chapter 4 - Properties This group is only available if you select the Single Tray
HYSYS Oil Manager in radio button, and displays the properties available for the
the HYSYS Simulation plot or table. You can select properties to appear in the plot
Basis guide for details of table, by selecting the appropriate checkbox in this
on boiling point curves. group.
If Multi Tray radio button has been selected, the group is
replaced by a drop-down list. You can only choose one
property on the graph or table when displaying multiple
trays.
Each curve option has its own distinct Properties group.
Basis Select molar, mass or liquid volume for the composition
basis.
6-49
Group Description
Phase Select the checkbox for the flow of each phase that you
want displayed. Multiple flows can be shown. If there are
not three phases present in the column, the Heavy Liquid
checkbox is not available, and thus, the Light Liquid
checkbox represents the liquid phase.
Visible The radio buttons in the Visible Points group apply to the
Points plots only. Select either the 15 Points or 31 Points option to
represent the number of data points which appear for each
curve.
Volume Interchange Button

The Volume Interchange button enables you to access the
Volume Interchange property view.
Figure 6.35
The Volume Interchange Curves property view contains a

volume interchange plot.
The volume interchange plot displays two types of information:

Cumulative and Incremental. You can toggle between
Cumulative and Incremental by selecting the appropriate radio
button in the Volume Interchange group.
6-50
Cumulative Volume Interchange Plot

In the Cumulative plot, the complete picture of stream
separation in the entire column appears. The distilled volume
percent values (of all the feed and product streams) with
respect to temperature appear as curves on the plot. Each curve
shows the live boiling point behaviour for each stream. The
curves from the product streams are normalized with respect to
the feed stream, and the curves are arranged in increasing
order of heaviness.
Figure 6.36
The volume interchange curves on the plot allows you to

interpret the amount of material from the feed stream is exiting
each product stream. For example, a product curve which starts
boiling at 10% and ends the boiling at 30% implies that 20% of
the material from the feed stream is allocated to this product
curve. The product curve also implies that 10% of the feed
stream material has been allocated to the lighter product
curves, and 70% of the feed stream material has been allocated
to the heavier product curves.
The temperature associated to the volume interchange curves

indicates the temperature of when the material in a stream
curve starts and finishes boiling. The greater the overlap of
temperature between the product and feed curve, the better the
separation and vice versa.
6-51
An overlap in temperature between two adjacent product curves

indicates that some material from the light product stream will
enter the heavy product stream and vice versa. This overlap is
referred to as "tails".
Incremental Volume Interchange Plot

In the Incremental plot, the derivative curve of the cumulative
volume interchange plot appears. The volume rate values (of all
product streams) with respect to temperature appear as curves
on the plot. The area under a product curve in the Incremental
plot equals the flow rate of the product stream.
Figure 6.37
The degree of imperfect fractionation appears more clearly in

the Incremental plot. The overlaps in the plot, as shown in the
figure above, indicate the imperfect separation between the two
adjacent product streams.
The spikes in the product curves are the result of the discrete
nature of the HYSYS modeling of crude oil thermodynamics. A
crude, which typically has several thousand components, is
modelled using only 50 to 80 lumps (where each lump represent
a group of components with similar characteristics). This
lumping of components causes the spikes in the Increment plot.
6-52
6.4.4 Calibration Tab

The Calibration tab contains calibration options that enables you
to calculate the parameters (fractionation indices) of the Zone-
by-zone model. The calculated parameter values can be use to
configure the column in the simulation case.
The required input values of the calibration option are:

• Feed temperature
• Product temperature, pressure, flow rate, and
composition
• Steam flow rate, pressure, and temperature
• Reboiler duty (if applicable)
To converge the column based on calibration calculation:

1. Go to the Feeds page and specify the required feed stream
information.
2. Go to the Products page and specify the required product
stream information.
3. Go to the Energy page and specify the required energy
information.
4. Click the Calibrate button at the bottom of the Petroleum
Distillation Column property view.
5. After HYSYS has completed the calculations, you can see the
results in the following two pages:
• Tabular Results page displays the calculated results in
tabular format.
• Plotted Results page displays the calculated results in
plot format.
6-53
Feeds Page
The Feeds page enables you to calibrate the feed stream
entering the Petroleum Column.
Figure 6.38

the Feeds page:
Object Description
Number of Zones cell Displays the number of zones available in the
Petroleum Column.
Feed Temperature Enables you to specify the temperature of the feed
cell stream entering the Petroleum Column.
Pressure cell Enables you to specify the pressure for each zone.
6-54
Products Page
The Products page enables you to calibrate the product streams
exiting the Petroleum Column.
Figure 6.39

the Products page:
Object Description
Top Vapour Flow Enables you to select the top vapor flow basis by
Basis group clicking the appropriate radio button. There are two
selections to choose from: Molar Wet or Molar Dry.
Zone drop-down Enables you to select the product stream zone you
list want to modify.
Top Table
Temperature Enables you to specify the temperature of each product
column stream zone.
Flow column Enables you to specify the flow rate of each product
stream.
Composition Enables you to select the composition type of each
column product stream zone.
If you select TBP composition, you will have to specify
the yield and temperature of the zone in the lower left
table.
6-55
Object Description
Light Ends Contains checkboxes that enable you to toggle
column between activating or deactivating the option to specify
volume fraction for the light ends composition.
• Selected checkbox indicates you can specify the
volume fraction of the light ends for the zone.
• Clear checkbox indicates you cannot specify the
volume fraction of the light ends for the zone.
Bottom Left Table
Yield column Enables you to specify the percentage yield reference
point for the calibration calculation.
Temperature Enables you to specify the temperature associated to
column the temperature yield reference point.
Bottom Right Table
Vol Fraction Enables you to specify the light ends component
column volume fraction associated to the normal boiling point.
For example, if a product stream has a flow rate of 100
m3/hr and the propane flow rate in the product stream
is 1 m3/hr. Then the volume fraction of propane is
0.01.
The value in the Vol Fraction column is the volume
fraction based on the total volume of the entire product
stream, and not just the total volume of the light ends.
NBP column Displays the normal boiling point of the light end
components.
Energy Page
Energy page enables you to specify the energy flowing in and
out of the Petroleum Column for the calibration calculation.
Figure 6.40
6-56
The following table lists and describes the object available in the
Energy page:
Object Description
Reboiler Duty Enables you to specify the reboiler duty for the
column applicable product stream zone.
Steam Flow column Enables you to specify the steam flow rate for the
applicable product stream zone.
Steam Pressure Enables you to specify the steam pressure for the
column applicable product stream zone.
Steam Temperature Enables you to specify the steam temperature for
the applicable product stream zone.
Tabular Results Page

The Tabular Results page displays the section-based solver
parameter values based on the calibration calculation.
Figure 6.41
You use copy the values under the Top Index and Bottom
Index columns, and use the values to configure the column for
the simulation case.
6-57
Plotted Results Page

The Plotted Results page displays the calculated calibration
results in plot format.
Figure 6.42
The following table lists and describes the object available in the
Plotted Results page:
Object Description
Plotted Results drop- Enables you to select the product stream zone you
down list want to view in the plot.
Manual Tuning Available only if the Slope Results radio button is
button selected.
Enables you to manually enter tuning-parameter
slope values.
Slope Results radio Enables you to display the tuning parameter slope
button values on the plot.
Plant vs. Calculated Enables you to display the plant data and
radio button calculated calibration results data on the plot.
Feed Curve radio Enables you to display the feed curve on the plot.
button The feed curve is the plotted values of distilled
volume percent values from the feed stream with
respect to temperature.
6-58
Petroleum Feeder 7-1
7 Petroleum Feeder
7.1 Introduction................................................................................... 2
7.2 Petroleum Feeder Property View ................................................... 2

7.2.1 Connections Tab....................................................................... 4
7.2.2 Parameters Tab ........................................................................ 5
7.2.3 Worksheet Tab ......................................................................... 6
7.2.4 User Variables Tab .................................................................... 6
7-1
7-2 Introduction
7.1 Introduction
The Petroleum Feeder is a logical unit operation that allows
flexibility over how the crude proportions are defined and allows
you to mix petroleum assays from the Basis Environment with
assays from other streams in the flowsheet. In addition, you can
setup feeds as blends and/or cuts of petroleum assays. Streams
can also be setup to represent spiked or partial crudes.
7.2 Petroleum Feeder

Property View
There are two methods to add a Petroleum Feeder to your
simulation:
button.
Feeder.
OR
Object Palette.
2. Double-click the Petroleum Feeder icon.
Petroleum Feeder icon
7-2
The Petroleum Feeder property view appears.
Figure 7.1
There are three common objects at the bottom of the Feeder

property view, the following table describes these objects:
Object Description
Delete button Allows you to delete the operation.
example, missing information or errors
encountered during calculation).
Ignored checkbox Allows you to ignore the operation during
calculations.
When the checkbox is selected, HYSYS completely
disregards the operation (and cannot calculate the
outlet stream) until you clear the checkbox.
7-3
7-4 Petroleum Feeder Property View
7.2.1 Connections Tab

The Connections tab contains the following pages:
• Connections
• Notes
Connections Page
On the Connections page, you can specify the assays, feed
streams, and product stream attached to the Petroleum Feeder.
You can change the name of the operation in the Name field,
and the fluid package associated to the operation in the Fluid
Package drop-down list.
Figure 7.2
Notes Page
7-4
7.2.2 Parameters Tab

The Parameters tab contain one page, the Parameters page.
This page allows you to specify the feed ratio of assays and
streams entering the product stream.
Petroleum Feeder does not consider the temperature,

pressure, or flow rate of any material streams connected to
the unit operation. The Petroleum Feeder only considers the
petroleum properties and composition from the associated
petroleum assays and material streams.
Parameters Page
The Parameters page contains a drop-down list and one or two
table depending on your selection of feed type entering the
Petroleum Feeder.
Figure 7.3
The Balance Type drop-down list allows you to select the unit
basis for the specified values. There are three types of unit for
you to choose from mole, mass, and volume.
7-5
7-6 Petroleum Feeder Property View
The table in the Flow Ratio and Boiling Range group contains the
following:
Column Description
First column Displays the names of the assays and feed streams
connected to the Petroleum Feeder.
Ratio You can specify the flow ratio of the petroleum assay(s) and
stream assay(s) that makes up the petroleum feeder
product stream.
For example, if you selected Mole as the unit basis of the
flow ratio, and you specify the Arab assay to have a ratio of
0.25. Then 25% of the product stream's mole composition
is from the Arab assay.
The sum values under the Ratio column must equal 1.
IBP You can specify a different initial boiling point temperature
for the Petroleum Feeder blending calculation.
You cannot specify values lower than the HYSYS default
temperature.
The default values of the IBP and FBP are the boiling
temperature of the lightest and heaviest components in the
component list, respectively. These are not the initial and
final points of the TBP curve of the assay.
FBP You can specify a different final boiling point temperature
for the Petroleum Feeder blending calculation.
You cannot specify values higher than the HYSYS default
temperature.
7.2.3 Worksheet Tab

information.
attached to the Petroleum Feeder.
You must specify the temperature, pressure, and flow rate of

the product stream exiting the Petroleum Feeder. You can
specify these values in the Worksheet tab or the product
stream’s property view.
7.2.4 User Variables Tab

For more information on
implementing the User The User Variables tab contains the User Vars page. This page
Variables, refer to allows you to create and implement variables in the HYSYS
Section 1.2.4 - User simulation case.
Variables Page/Tab.
7-6
Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor 8-1
8 Petroleum Yield Shift

Reactor
8.1 Introduction................................................................................... 2
8.1.1 Theory.................................................................................... 2
8.2 Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor Property View ................................. 3

8.2.1 Design Tab .............................................................................. 4
8.2.2 Product Spec Tab ..................................................................... 7
8.2.3 Product Properties Tab .............................................................. 7
8.2.4 Worksheet Tab ....................................................................... 11
8-1
8-2 Introduction
8.1 Introduction
license, you cannot add a Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor.
The Petroleum Yield Shift reactor unit operation supports

efficient modeling of reactors by using data tables to perform
shift calculations. The operation can be used for complex
reactors where no analytical model is available, or where models
that are too computationally expensive.
8.1.1 Theory
Shift reactor models are empirical models representing the
response of the output of a reactor to changes in its operating
conditions. These models are not based upon the underlying
scientific theory for the reactor, or upon the chemistry of the
reaction, but simply upon an observation of how the output
responds to certain stimuli. The models are generally linear and
are only applicable within a fairly tight range of a particular base
condition.
The petroleum yield shift unit operation calculates the flow rates
of a defined set of product streams based upon the difference
between the current value of an independent variable and a
supplied base value. Dependent variables other than the flow
rates can also be specified.
The following general equations are used for the calculation of a

dependent variable yk:
Δy k 0
dyk ,j = -------- ⋅ ( x j – x j ) (8.1)
Δx j
0
yk = yk + ∑ dyk ,j (8.2)
j=0
8-2
where:
dyk,j = shift for dependent variable yk with respect to

independent variable xj
0
y k = base value for dependent variable yk at base conditions
of the independent variables x0

Δ
-----y- = rate of change of dependent variable yk with respect to
Δx
unit change in independent variable xj
xj = current value of independent variable
8.2 Petroleum Yield Shift

Reactor Property View
There are two methods to add a Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor to
your simulation:
button.
Shift Reactor.
or
Object Palette.
2. Double-click the Petroleum Shift Reactor icon.
Petroleum Shift Reactor

icon
8-3
8-4 Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor
The Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor property view appears.
Figure 8.1
There are three common objects at the bottom of the Petroleum

Yield Shift Reactor property view, the following table describes
these objects:
Object Description
Delete button Lets you delete the operation.
example, missing information or errors encountered
during calculation).
Ignored Lets you ignore the operation during calculations.
checkbox When the checkbox is selected, HYSYS disregards the
operation (and cannot calculate the outlet stream)
until you clear the checkbox.
8.2.1 Design Tab

Use the Design tab to configure the Petroleum Yield Shift
reactor. The options are grouped in the following pages:
• Connections
• Model Data
• User Variables
(Lets you create and implement your own variables for
the current operation)
• Notes
(Lets you add comments which are exclusively
associated with the unit operation)
8-4
Connections Page
The Connections page (Figure 8.1) lets you configure the
material and energy streams flowing in and out of the reactor.
The following table describes the objects in the Connections
page:
Object Description
Name field Modify the name of the reactor.
Fluid Pkg field Select the fluid package associated with the
reactor.
Main Feed field Specify or select the main petroleum feed flowing
into the reactor. This stream is split into the cuts
specified in the Cuts table.
Energy Stream field Connect or create an energy stream if one is
(optional) required for the operation.
Supplementary Specify or select additional feed streams to the
Feeds table reactor. The total flow rate of the product streams
(optional) is determined from the sum of all feed streams
into the reactor.
Cuts table Specify or select the product streams to associate
with the cuts of the main feed.
Bottom cut Specify or select a product stream to associate
with the highest boiling cut of the main feed.
Supplementary Specify or select product streams that are not cuts
Products table of the main petroleum feed.
(optional)
8-5
Model Data Page

Use the Model Data page to enter the base yield flow rates,
define the independent parameters of the model, and specifiy
the parameters base and shift values..
Figure 8.2
The parameters are optional and you do not have to supply

any parameter information to get the reactor to solve.

the Model Data page:
Object Description
Icons Panel Green Plus - add a HySYS defined variable as an
independent parameter.
Yellow folder - edit an independent parameter.
Red “X” - delete an independent parameter.
Grey Stacks - add an independent parameter not
defined in HySYS - e.g. age of catalyst.
Base Yield Flow Rates Specify the base yield flow rates, i.e. product flow
Column. rates either when there are no independent
variables defined in the model, or if they are
defined but are at their base values.
Independent Variable All other columns in the table. The values in the
Columns columns (except the first cell) define the rate at
which the yield flow rates change with respect to
the changes in the independent variable.
Property Base row Base values of the independent variables.
Yield Basis field Choose to specify the yield flow rates either on a
flow rate basis or on a feed flow fraction basis.
8-6
User Variables Page

For more information on The User Variables page lets you create and implement variables
Variables, refer to
in the HYSYS simulation case.
Section 1.2.4 - User
Notes Page
Variables Page/Tab.
For more information Use the Notes tab record any comments or information
Notes Page/Tab.
regarding the specific unit operation or the simulation case in
general.
8.2.2 Product Spec Tab

The Product Spec tab has a Conditions page which lets you
specify the initial and final boiling points of the product cuts.
Figure 8.3
8.2.3 Product Properties Tab

Use the Product Properties tab to specify additional properties of
the product streams or the reactor that are dependent on
variations in the independent variables. The options are
contained on the following pages:
• Assay Properties
• Base Shift
• TBP Curves
8-7
Assay Properties Page

The Assay Properties page lets you specify assay properties in
the product streams that are affected by the reactor. These
properties can vary with changes in the values of the
independent variables.
Figure 8.4
• Assay Properties Selection group

Assay properties to be modified can be selected using the
options in the Assay Properties Selection table. The
table lists the available product streams. Clicking in a cell
in a column lets you select an assay property that you
want to manipulate for that stream.
• Assay Properties Definition group
The Assay Properties Definition group lets you select the
assay property for a stream and specify its base value.
Object Description
Cut Select the cut stream containing the assay
property that you want to manipulate.
Assay Properties Select the assay property for which you want to
specify a base value. Only properties selected for
the cut stream in the Assay Properties
Selection table are available.
Base Value Specify the base value for the assay property. This
is the value of property that the reactor would
produce at the condition represented by the base
values of the independent variables.
8-8
Object Description
Use Feed Toggle between using or ignoring the assay
property values from the feed stream.
Use Assay Open a drop-down list and select the assay
property values from a petroleum assay.
Base Shift Page

Use the Base Shift page to view and edit the base values of the
independent variables and the dependent product properties.
You can also edit the shift values for each of the product
properties with respect to each of the independent variables.
Figure 8.5
8-9
TBP Curves Page

The TBP Curves page lets you manipulate the product
composition. Referencing a user-provided TBP profile for the
product stream(s), Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining can
characterize the outlet stream composition based on the entered
boiling point curve data.
Figure 8.6

the TBP Curves page:
Object Description
Use TBP Curve to Toggle between activating or ignoring the
Calculate Stream modified variable for the product stream
Composition checkbox composition.
Stream drop-down list Select the product stream associated to the
available TBP curve data.
Volumetric Yield column Specify the volume percent yield associated to
the specified temperature for the product
stream.
TBP column Specify the TBP associated with the
volumetric yield.
Insert button Add a volumetric yield between 0% and 100%
and corresponding TBP data to the table.
Delete button Remove a selected volumetric yield and
corresponding TBP data from the table.
You cannot remove the default data set of 0%
and 100%.
8-10
8.2.4 Worksheet Tab

information. contained in the stream property view for all the streams
attached to the Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor.
8.3 About PIMS Submodel

Calculator
The PIMS Submodel can be added into the Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor either manual
or by importing a file.
Currently Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining does not have all the
necessary models to fully simulate a refinery. With this new
feature, Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining users will be able to
create the missing models as needed. users can take the
equivalent PIMS model’s dat (in the form of a smc file) and
import it either manually or automatically into a Petroleum Yield
Shift Reactor (PYS Reactor).
The PYS Reactor will behave as a simplified version of refinery

reactors such as a hyrdrotreater. Another purpose of this feature
is to allow the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining user to simplify
and speed up some parts of the plant simulation. For areas
where a reigour model is not needed, the user can use a
simplified version imported in from PIMS to represent the
rigorous model instead. This feature is intended to help bridge
the gap between refinery planning and engineering/operations.
PIMS Models are ubiquitous within the refining customer base,
this project will provide a way for re-use of these models to the
benefit of planners and engineers.
8-11
8-12 About PIMS Submodel Calculator
8.3.1 Importing PIMS

Submodel Calculator File
In Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining you can add an PIMS
Submodel Calculator by importing it from another source.
To import a PIMS Submodel Calculator:

1. Add a Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor to the flowsheet.
2. Click Load Pims SMC.
3. Select the smc file and click OK.
The PIMS Submodel Unit/Mapping view will appear. In this
view, all the weight and volume balance rows will be listed in
the Streams matrix. All the PIMS properties retrieved from
the equality rows will be listed in he Properties matrix.
4. Map the PIMS properties to the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining properties by selecting the items from the drop-
down list.
5. Note: Not all PIMS properties will have corresponding Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining properties. These properties are
ignored.
6. Map the PIMS streams to the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining Streams. use the drop-down list to select existing
streams or create a new stream.
7. Select a stream type. The available stream types are: Feed,
Upper Cut, Bottom Cut, Supplementary Feed and
supplementary Product. Only one bottom cut is allowed.
8. Click OK.
Note: Mapped streams will be populated in the Connections view

in the Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor. Additional information such
as Feed stream etc. must be supplied if it was not supplied in
froms PIMS.
The mapped properties and values will display in the MOdel Data
view in the Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor.
Fill in the Cut point information.
8-12
8.3.2 Manually Enter PIMS

Submodel Calculator File
1. Add a Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor to the flowsheet.
2. In the Connections page, create a corresponding Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining stream. Add the streams as Cuts,
Bottom Cut and Feed. In the PIMS table, the column
SXXXFFF (where XXX is smc model name) which has a value
1 in corresponding VBALFFF is a feed stream FFF. The
remaining VBALPPP rows correspond to product streams PPP
of the Petroleum Shift Reactor (PSR).
3. Click Model Data view. All the Product streams are shown
as rows.
4. Click Insert Independent Var.
The Select Associated Object and Variable page appears.
5. Navigate through the variable list and click Calculator
properties.
6. Click Ok. A new column is added to the matrix. Rename the
column.
7. Once all the Independent Variables have been added, fill in
their base values and the base yields and shifted values. The
base value of the independent variable YYY is the value in
the cell (EYYYXXX, SXXXFFF). The base yields are the values
in column Balance corresponding to rows VBALPPP. For the
shifted values take the property values under Column
SXXXYYY for each of the WBALZZZ or VBALZZZ rows and
multiple by -1 and then divided by value under the same
column for Row EYYYXXX. Take these values and enter it into
the Stream and Property cell of PSR's model data.
• The -ve sign in PIMS means production. IN Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining, the +ve sign means production.
Take the values from the BAS column and multiply by -1.
• -999 represent 0
8. Fill in the Base yields, shifted values, cut information and
property base values.
8-13
8-14 About PIMS Submodel Calculator
8-14
Product Blender 9-1
9 Product Blender
9.1 Introduction................................................................................... 2
9.2 Theory ........................................................................................... 3

9.2.1 Simulation Calculation Mode ...................................................... 3
9.2.2 Optimization Calculation Mode ................................................... 3
9.3 Product Blender Property View ...................................................... 5

9.3.1 Connections Tab....................................................................... 7
9.3.2 Parameters Tab ........................................................................ 8
9.3.3 Optimization Tab .................................................................... 10
9.3.4 Worksheet Tab ....................................................................... 26
9.3.5 User Variables Tab .................................................................. 26
9-1
9-2 Introduction
9.1 Introduction
The Product Blender allows you to mix several streams together,
and calculate a blended property value or optimize the
properties in the product stream by back calculation and
determine the optimum mix ratios for the inlet streams.
This unit operation is like a black box consisting of splitters and

mixers. Each inlet stream enters a Tee or splitter, which splits
the stream based on the specified flow ratio. Then the split
streams enter the appropriate mixer. Each mixer represents the
blended product stream. The Product Blender also has a surplus
stream that is used to maintain mass balance in the unit
operation system.
For example, consider the figure below of a Product Blender with

three inlet streams, two product streams, and one surplus
stream.
Figure 9.1
Product streams E and D are a mixture of inlet streams C, B,

and A as indicated by the colored lines. The surplus stream
provides an exit flow for left over fluid from the inlet streams, as
shown in the above figure for inlet streams A, C, and B.
9-2
Product Blender 9-3
9.2 Theory
The Product Blender has two different calculation mode to
determine the flow rate in the product streams: Simulation and
Optimization.
9.2.1 Simulation Calculation

Mode
In the Simulation calculation mode, the inlet streams entering
the Product Blender must be completely solved, in other words
the status bar at the bottom of the Material Stream property
view must read OK.
Refer to Section 9.3.2 - The characteristics of the product and surplus streams are
Parameters Tab for
more information. based on the specified flow ratio from the inlet streams and the
automatic pressure assignment option.
9.2.2 Optimization Calculation

Mode
In the Optimization calculation mode, the Hyprotech SQP
optimizer is used to determine the optimum values required to
achieve the specified objective functions.
For more information The Hyprotech SQP is a sequential quadratic programming

about the SQP
optimization calculation (SQP) algorithm incorporating an L1-merit function and a BFGS
refer to Chapter 7 - approximation to the Hessian of the Lagrangian. The algorithm
Optimizer Operation in features step size restriction, decision variable and objective
the HYSYS Operations
Guide. function scaling, a basic watchdog method, and a problem-
independent and scale-independent relative convergence test.
The algorithm also ensures that the model is evaluated only at
points feasible with respect to the variable bounds.
9-3
9-4 Theory
Switching from Simulation to

Optimization
When you switch from Simulation to Optimization calculation
mode, HYSYS automatically place a stream cutter between the
Product Blender outlet streams and the connected downstream
operations.
The figure below display a Product Blender in Simulation mode

with a valve connected to the product stream C. When the
Product Blender switch to Optimization mode, a stream cutter is
added to stream C.
Figure 9.2
The cutter is added to reduce the calculation time required

during the PFD calculation process. If all the operations and
streams in the PFD need to be recalculated every time the
optimizer generates a possible solution, then the entire
calculation would take too long or lose required information for
the entire PFD to solve. So HYSYS place a cutter that will
temporary separate the Product Blender from the rest of the
PFD during the optimization calculation. When the optimum
value is found, the value is propagated back into the PFD.
The stream cutter is also inactive only during the optimization

calculation process in the Product Blender. Before and after the
9-4
Product Blender 9-5
calculation process, the stream cutter is active and allows

information from the Product Blender’s output streams to flow to
the rest of the process flowsheet diagram.
The stream cutter is only placed when there is an operation

downstream to the Product Blender (in other words, an
operation connected to the outlet streams of the Product
Blender).
9.3 Product Blender

Property View
There are two methods to add a Product Blender to your
simulation:
button.
3. From the list of available unit operations, select Product
Blender.
4. Click the Add button. The Product Blender property view
appears.
OR
Object Palette.
2. Double-click the Product Blender icon.
Product Blender icon
9-5
9-6 Product Blender Property View
The Product Blender property view appears.
Figure 9.3
There are four common objects at the bottom of the Product

Blender property view, the following table describes these
objects:
Object Description
Status bar Displays the current status of the operation (for example,
missing information or errors encountered during
calculation).
Delete Allows you to delete the operation.
button
Refer to Section 9.2 - Calculation Allows you to toggle between simulation and
Theory for more Mode drop- optimization calculation modes.
information. down list If you select the optimization mode without first adding any
variables (optimization variable, process constraints, or
objective functions), HYSYS will auto generate derivatives
and optimizer for optimum product flow rate with inlet
stream flow ratios as the optimization variables.
If you select the optimization mode after adding any
variables (optimization variable, process constraints, or
objective functions), HYSYS will keep the previous variable
values.
Ignored Allows you to ignore the operation during calculations.
checkbox When the checkbox is selected, HYSYS completely
disregards the operation (and cannot calculate the outlet
stream) until you clear the checkbox.
9-6
Product Blender 9-7
9.3.1 Connections Tab

The Design tab contains the following pages:
• Connections
• Notes
Connections Page
On the Connections page, you can specify the feed and product
streams attached to the Product Blender. You can change the
name of the operation in the Name field, and the fluid package
associated to the operation in the Fluid Package drop-down list.
Figure 9.4
Notes Page
comments or information regarding the specific unit operation or
Notes Page/Tab.
9-7
9.3.2 Parameters Tab

The Parameters tab contains the Parameters page. This page
allows you to specify the inlet streams split ratio among the
product streams, and select the type of automatic pressure
assignment option.
Parameters Page
Figure 9.5
Feed Stream Flow Ratios

To specify the inlet stream split ratio, type in the split ratio value
(of the inlet stream) in the appropriate cell where both the inlet
stream row and product stream column intersect.
For example, consider a Product Blender with inlet streams A

and B, and product streams C, D, and Surplus.
Figure 9.6
9-8
Product Blender 9-9
If 50% of stream A is entering stream C and 25% of stream A is

entering stream D. Type 0.50 in the cell along row A and under
column C, and type 0.25 in the cell along row A and under
column D. HYSYS automatically calculates the amount of stream
ratio left for stream A, which is 25%, and sends the amount to
the Surplus stream.
The values in the rows of the Flow Ratio table represent split
ratios of the inlet streams, so the sum of values along each
row must equal 1.
Automatic Pressure Assignment

To select the automatic pressure assignment, click the
appropriate radio button in the Automatic Pressure Assignment
group.
• The default is Set Outlet to Lowest Inlet, HYSYS assigns
the lowest inlet pressure to all the outlet stream
pressures.
• If you specify Equalize All, HYSYS gives all attached
streams the same pressure.
If you are uncertain of which pressure assignment to use,

choose Set Outlet to Lowest Inlet.
Only use Equalize All if you are completely sure that all the
attached streams should have the same pressure.
9-9
9.3.3 Optimization Tab

For more information on You must be in Optimization calculation mode, in order to
the optimizer used by apply any of the options in the Optimization tab.
Product Blender, refer to
Chapter 7 - Optimizer
Operation in the HYSYS
Operations Guide. The Optimization tab contains a tree browser that lets you
access the following pages:
• Variables Configuration Page. This page allows you to
modify initial values of the optimization variables used in
the optimization calculation.
• Variables Inputs Page. This page allows you to
configure the optimization variables in the optimization
calculation.
• Variables Results Page. This page displays the
calculated results of the optimization variables from the
optimization calculation.
• Constraints Configuration Page. This page allows you
to modify the initial values of the constraints in the
• Constraints Inputs Page. This page allows you to
configure the constraints in the optimization calculation.
• Constraints Results Page. This page displays the
calculated results of the constraints from the
• Objectives Page. This page allows you to configure the
goals of the optimization calculation.
• Optimizer Configuration Page. This page allows you
to configure the calculation process of the optimization
calculation.
• Optimizer Results Page. This page displays the results
of the calculation process from the optimization
calculation.
9-10
Product Blender 9-11
The following table describes the four common objects at the

bottom of the Optimization tab:
Object Description
Create Derivative Util Allows you to add derivative utilities or generate
button default derivative utilities.
The default utilities are:
• The flow ratios between the inlet and product
streams for the optimization variables.
• The flow ratios between the inlet and surplus
streams for the process constraints.
• The actual volume flow rates of the product
streams for the objective functions.
Refer to Chapter 14 - View Derivative Allows you to access the Derivative Utility property
Utilities in the HYSYS Utility button view. The Derivative Utility property view contains
Operations Guide for detailed information and option on the variables
more information on the and constraints.
Derivative Utility property
Create Optimizer Allows you to create an optimizer with default
view.
button optimizer parameter settings.
Refer to Chapter 7 -
View Optimizer Allows you to access the Optimizer property view.
Optimizer Operation in
button The Optimizer property view contains detailed
the HYSYS Operations
information and options on the optimizer
Guide for more configuration.
information on the
Optimizer property view. Add button Allows you to add optimization variables,
constraints, or objectives for the optimization
calculation.
The type of optimizer parameters you can add,
depends on what is selected in the drop-down list.
Types of Parameters Allows you to select the type of optimizer
drop-down list parameter to add to the optimization calculation.
You have three choices: optimization variable,
constraint, or objective.
9-11
Variables Configuration Page

The Variables Configuration page allows you to specify the name
and initial value of the optimization variables. The optimization
variables are variables that will be modified to achieve the
specified goal in the optimization calculation.
Figure 9.7
To access the Variables Configuration page, expand the

Variables branch in the tree browser and select Config.
To expand a tree browser, click the Plus icon . To shrink a

tree browser, click the Minus icon .
The table in the Variables Configuration page contains the

following information:
Column Description
Opt Variable Allows you to change the name of the optimization variable.
You can access the Optimization Object Property View
of the variable by double-clicking on the variable name.
Hooked Displays the object associated to the optimization variable.
Object
Hooked Displays the property associated to the optimization
Property variable.
9-12
Column Description
Current Allows you to change the current optimization variable
Value value.
Use Allows you to toggle between using or ignoring the
checkbox optimization variable during optimization calculation.
A selected checkbox indicates the variable is being used in
the calculation.
To remove a optimization variable, select the variable under the

Opt Variable column and press DELETE.
Variables Inputs Page

The Variables Inputs page allows you to specify the range of
values allowed for each optimization variable during the
Figure 9.8
To access the Variables Inputs page, expand the Variables

branch in the tree browser and select Inputs.

9-13
The table in the Variables Inputs page contains the following

information:
Column Description
Minimum Allows you to specify the lower bound property for the
variable during the optimization process.
This value might be different from its global minimum, if
the change in the variable is restricted to its allowed
amount, set by the maximum rate of change, during the
period in the optimization process.
Current Allows you to specify the current variable value before
Value optimization calculation.
Maximum Allows you to specify the upper bound property for the
variable during the optimization process.
This value might be different from its global maximum, if
the change in the variable is restricted to its allowed
amount, set by the maximum rate of change, during the
period in the optimization process.
Range Allows you to specify an alternative for the span.
The purpose of the range is to scale the gradients of the
cost function and constraints, to give similar gradient
magnitude for each variable. The gradients of the objective
function (and constraints) vary inversely with the variable
ranges.
Global Min. Allows you to specify the absolute minimum value for which
the variable is operated.
Global Max. Allows you to specify the absolute maximum value for
which the variable is operated.
9-14
Variables Results Page

The Variables Results page displays the optimum values of the
optimization variables used to achieve the goals you specified.
Figure 9.9
To access the Variables Results page, expand the Variables

branch in the tree browser and select Results.

The table in the Variables Results page contains the following

information:
Column Description
Start Value Displays the initial value of the variable before optimization
calculation.
Current Allows you to specify the current variable value before
Value optimization calculation.
9-15
Column Description
Status Displays the current status of the variable, which is
calculated by the Optimizer. Unlike constraints, opt.
variables are not allowed to move out of their bounds. The
Status property is set to one of:
• Not Evaluated. Status of the variable is not
evaluated by the Optimizer.
• Inactive. Variable Output property lies between the
Minimum and Maximum properties, but not on one of
the bounds.
• Equality. Maximum and minimum properties of the
variable, Minimum and Maximum, are equal, and the
Output property has the same value as well.
• Active Low. Variable Output property value is equal
to that of the Minimum.
• Active High. Variable Output property value is equal
to that of the Maximum.
Price Displays the shadow price (Lagrange multiplier) for the
given opt. variable, calculated by the Optimizer. The
shadow price is used to estimate the effect which small
changes to variable bounds have on the plant cost function.
Span Displays the difference between the Global Minimum and
Global Maximum values for the variable and is calculated by
the variable set-up.
The role of the span is to convert every variable into the
range (0, 1), to use uniform numerical perturbations and
convergence tests.
Output Displays the current value of the variable in the plant
model. The output value is determined by the optimizer
during the optimization process.
9-16
Constraints Configuration Page

The Constraints Configuration page allows you to specify the
name and initial value of the constraints. The constraints are
variables used to simulate real life limitations to the optimization
calculation.
Figure 9.10
To access the Constraints Configuration page, expand the

Constraints branch in the tree browser and select Config.

The table in the Constraints Configuration page contains the

following information:
Column Description
Constraints Allows you to change the name of the constraint variable.
of the constraint by double-clicking on the variable name.
Hooked Displays the object associated to the constraint.
Object
Hooked Displays the property associated to the constraint.
Property
9-17
Column Description
Current Displays the current value of the constraint.
Value
Use Allows you to toggle between using or ignoring the
checkbox constraint variable during optimization calculation.
A selected checkbox indicates the constraint is being used
in the calculation.
To remove a constraint, select the constraint under the

Constraint column and press DELETE.
Constraints Inputs Page

The Constraints Inputs page allows you to specify the amount of
deviation allowed for each constraint during the optimization
calculation.
Figure 9.11
To access the Constraints Inputs page, expand the Constraints

branch in the tree browser and select Inputs.

9-18
The table in the Constraints Inputs page contains the following

information:
Column Description
Minimum Allows you to specify the lower bound of the constraint
value.
Current Displays the current constraint value.
Value
Maximum Allows you to specify the upper bound of the constraint
value.
Scale Allows you to specify the number scale on which the
feasibility of the constraint is measured. This property is
used in conjunction with the Optimizer Zeta property, which
is a relative feasibility tolerance.
In general, a constraint is said to be feasible if:
Minimum – Scale × Zeta ≤ Current ≤ Maximum + Scale × Zeta
where:
Minimum = lower bound properties of the constraint
Maximum = upper bound properties of the constraint
Current = current constraint value (equivalent to
Hooked Property for constraints, which have the
Use checkbox selected)
Min Chi^2 Displays whether or not a chi-square test is done for the
constraint.
9-19
Constraints Results Page

The Constraints Results page displays the constraint values after
Figure 9.12
To access the Constraints Results page, expand the Constraints

branch in the tree browser and select Results.

The table in the Constraints Results page contains the following

information:
Column Description
Current Value Displays the current value of the constraint.
Status Displays the current status of the constraint, which is calculated by the
Optimizer. The Status property is set to one of the following:
• Not Evaluated. The status of the constraint has not been evaluated by
the Optimizer.
• Inactive. The constraint current property lies between the Minimum
and Maximum properties, but is neither Active High nor Active Low.
• Violated Low. The constraint current property is less than Minimum -
Scale x Zeta, where Scale is the constraint Scale property and Zeta is
the Optimizer Zeta tolerance property.
• Violated High. The current property is greater than Maximum + Scale
x Zeta.
• Active Low. The constraint current property is less than Minimum +
Scale x Zeta, but greater than Minimum - Scale x Zeta.
• Active High. Constraint current property is greater than Maximum -
Scale x Zeta, but less than Maximum + Scale x Zeta.
9-20
Column Description
Normalization When the Jacobian matrix is first calculated (first pass evaluation) the
Normalization property for the constraint is set to be the largest Jacobian
entry in the row (Sparse Row) of the Jacobian matrix corresponding to this
constraint. This number is used to normalize the rest of the given Jacobian
row, for all remaining Optimizer search steps (in other words, it is not
recalculated).
Base Value When calculating the gradient of a given constraint with respect to each
variable, the internal scaled variable is perturbed away from the current point
by adding the number specified in the Optimizer Perturbation property. The
new value of the constraint is found corresponding to the new variable value,
and the change in constraint, divided by the change in the variable, is the
corresponding Jacobian element.
The constraint Base property stores the pre-perturbation value of the
constraint. Under certain circumstances, however, the Base property itself
can change during the Jacobian calculation. This is due to the fact that
removing a perturbation from a perturbed variable, and re-running the plant
model, will not reproduce the previous Base property within the constraint
Current property; this is due to noise in the model arising from non-zero
convergence tolerances (in other words, the de-perturbed constraint Current
differs slightly from the pre-perturbed Current).
Therefore, under certain circumstances (when the Pert_Reset flag property of
the Optimizer is checked) the Optimizer will remove the perturbation from
the variable, rerun the plant model, and then re-set the Base property of the
constraint to match the re-calculated Current property. This eliminates
associated noise from the Jacobian matrix.
Price Displays the shadow price (Lagrange multiplier) for the given constraint,
calculated by the Optimizer.
If a feasible solution is found by the Optimizer, then a simple interpretation of
the Lagrange multiplier is that it gives the gradient of the cost function along
the corresponding constraint normal. Thus, the shadow price indicates the
approximate change to the objective function when increasing (in other
words, relaxing) the given active bound by a unit amount.
9-21
Objectives Page
The Objectives page allows you to specify the name and price of
the objectives. The objectives are the goals you specified for the
Figure 9.13
To access the Objectives page, select Objectives branch from

the tree browser.
The table in the Objectives page contains the following

information:
Column Description
Objective Allows you to change the name of the objective.
of the objective by double-clicking on the variable name.
Hooked Displays the object associated to the objective.
Object
Hooked Prop Displays the property associated to the objective.
Current Displays the current value of the objective.
Value
Weighted Displays the difference between the previous objective
Value value and the new optimized objective value.
Price Allows you to specify the price value. The objective function
value is calculated using the following equation and price
value:
Objective Function Value = Price Value × Current Value
For minimum objective value, price value = 1.
For maximum objective value, price value = -1.
9-22
To remove an objective, select the objective under the Objective

column and press DELETE.
Optimizer Configuration Page

The Optimizer Configuration page allows you to configure the
optimization calculation process and assumptions.
Figure 9.14
To access the Optimizer Configuration page, expand the

Optimizer branch in the tree browser and select Config.

The following table describes the objects in the Optimizer

Configuration page:
Object Description
Maximum Allows you to specify the maximum number of major
Iteration field iterations. A major iteration consists of a sequence of
minor iterations that minimize a linearly constrained
sub-problem.
Objective Scaling Allows you to scale the objective function. Positive
Factor field values are used as-is, negative values use the factor
abs(scale*F) (where F is the initial objective function
value) and a value of 0.0 a factor is generated
automatically.
9-23
Object Description
Gradient Allows you to select one-sided (forward) or two-sided
Calculation (central) differences for gradient calculations. In both
Method drop- cases, the perturbation size used for the Optimizer
down list internal variables is given by the Perturbation property.
Diagnostic Print Allows you to select the amount of information to
Level drop-down include in the Optimizer diagnostic file.
list
Accuracy A relative accuracy tolerance used in the test for
Tolerance field convergence. The following convergence test is used,
ConvergenceSum ≤ OptimalityTolerance × max ( F ( x ) , 1.0 )
where:
M
r
ConvergenceSum = ∇F ( x ) d + ∑ uj Cj ( x )
j=1
The ConvergenceSum is a weighted sum of possible

objective function improvement and constraint
violations, and has the same units as the objective
function. This allows the same tolerance parameter to
be used for different problems, and makes the
convergence test independent of objective function
scaling.
Step Restriction A line search step-size restriction factor used during
field the first 3 iterations. Values greater than 1.0 result in
no step restriction. Set the factor to 1.0, 10-1, 10-2,
etc. to impose larger restrictions.
Perturbation Size The change in size of the scaled variables is used in
field gradient evaluation. Individual variables are scaled
according to the variable Minimum and Maximum
properties (or the Range property if the Fix Variable
Spans property checkbox is selected).
Maximum If the Optimizer algorithm is set to MDC_SQP /
Feasible Points MDC_SLP, this parameter gives the maximum number
field of Optimizer iterations allowed to find the first feasible
solution.
If the Optimizer algorithm is set to NAG_SQP, this
parameter gives the maximum number of minor
iterations. A minor iteration in this case represents a
sequence of local improvements to the linearized
problem within a major iteration.
9-24
Optimizer Results Page

The Optimizer Results page displays the optimization calculation
results.
Figure 9.15
The following table describes the display fields in the Optimizer

Results page:
Field Description
Starting Displays the starting objective function value before
Objective Value optimization calculation.
Final Objective Displays the current objective function value as
Value calculated by the Optimizer.
Termination Displays the termination status of the Optimizer.
Reason Values include Running, Step convergence,
Unbounded, Impossible, Not run, and Stopped.
Feasible Point Displays the number of minor iterations since the last
Iterations major iteration.
Solution Phase Displays the current phase of the Optimizer algorithm.
Values include Initialize, Setup, OPT Deriv, OPT Search,
and Results.
Gradient Reports the number of gradient evaluations performed
Evaluations during the course of the optimization.
Actual Optimizer Displays the number of major iterations.
Model Reports the number of model evaluations performed
Evaluations during the course of the optimization.
Code Version The version of Optimizer.
Total CPU Time Reports the time taken to solve the optimization
problem.
9-25
Optimization Object Property View

Refer to Section 5.9 - The Optimization Object property view contains the following
Optimization Objects in
the HYSYS.RTO
three tabs:
Reference Guide for • Connection tab. Displays the connections of the
more information. optimization object to the flowsheet Object name.
• Properties tab. Displays the properties of the
optimization object.
• Transfer tab. Displays the transfer options/flags of the
optimization object.
9.3.4 Worksheet Tab

information.
attached to the operation.
9.3.5 User Variables Tab

For more information on The User Variables tab contains the User Vars page. This page
Variables, refer to
allows you to create and implement variables in the HYSYS
Section 1.2.4 - User simulation case.
Variables Page/Tab.
9-26
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Utilities 10-1
10 Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining
Utilities
10.1 Introduction................................................................................. 2
10.2 Delta Base Utility ......................................................................... 3

10.2.1 Delta Base Property View......................................................... 5
10.2.2 Derivative Analysis Tab............................................................ 6
10.2.3 Variables Tab ....................................................................... 11
10.2.4 Select Variable Property View ................................................. 16
10.2.5 Target Objects Property View ................................................. 18
10.2.6 Generating Derivative Values ................................................. 20
10.2.7 Exporting Generated Derivatives............................................. 23
10.3 Petroleum Assay Utility.............................................................. 23

10.3.1 Design Tab .......................................................................... 25
10.3.2 Results Tab .......................................................................... 28
10.3.3 Dynamics Tab ...................................................................... 30
10.4 Swing Cut Utility ........................................................................ 32

10.4.1 Specification Tab .................................................................. 34
10.4.2 Light Ends Tab ..................................................................... 36
10.4.3 Assay Table Tab.................................................................... 37
10.4.4 PIMS Format Tab .................................................................. 39
10-1
10-2 Introduction
10.1 Introduction
The utility commands are a set of tools, which interact with a
process by providing additional information or analysis of
streams or operations. Similar to the HYSYS utilities, the Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining utilities become a permanent part of
the Flowsheet and are calculated automatically when
appropriate. They can also be used as target objects for Adjust
operations.
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining utilities can be added through

the Available Utilities property view or the Utilities page on the
Attachments tab of a stream's property view.
Figure 10.1
A utility added through either route is automatically updated in

the other location. For example, if you attach an Envelope utility
to a stream using the Available Utilities property view, the
Envelope utility automatically appears on the Utilities page of
the Attachments tab in the property view of the stream to which
it was attached.
10-2
10.2 Delta Base Utility

The Delta Base utility generates the required derivatives for use
in delta base linear programming models, which in turn provides
a simplified model that can be imported into programs such as
PIMS.
PIMS is a program that allows you to determine the best

operating conditions at minimum cost using numerical
optimization method. PIMS calculation consists of linear models
and simplified assumptions.
Sets of independent and dependent variables are selected from

within the flowsheet. Base values are specified for the
independent variables and HYSYS will calculate the change in
the dependent variables with respect to changes in the
The utility works by perturbing each of the independent

variables from the assigned base value, solving the flowsheet at
the perturbed value, and determining the delta change in each
of the specified dependent variables.
Adding a Delta Base Utility

1. In the Tools menu, click the Utilities command. The
Available Utilities property view appears.
You can also access the Available Utilities property view by
pressing CTRL U.
2. From the list of available utilities, in the right pane, select
the Delta Base utility.
3. Click the Add Utility button. The Delta Base utility property
view appears.
10-3
10-4 Delta Base Utility
Editing a Delta Base Utility

2. From the list of installed utilities, in the left pane, select the
Delta Base utility you want to view.
3. Click the View Utility button. The selected utility’s property
view appears. From here, you can modify any of the utility’s
properties.
Deleting a Delta Base Utility

utility you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete Utility button. HYSYS will ask you to
confirm the deletion.
You can also delete a utility by clicking the Delete button on
the utility’s property view.
10-4
10.2.1 Delta Base Property

View
The following figure is an example of the Delta Base property
view without scoped objects or variables.
Figure 10.2
The following table lists and describes each button located at the
bottom of the Delta Base property view:
Button Description
Delete Deletes the Delta Base utility.
HYSYS request for confirmation before deleting the utility.
Tear Places material stream cutters for all streams entering and
exiting the scope objects that are connected to objects
outside the scope.
UnTear Removes all the material stream cutters created by the
Tear option.
10-5
Button Description
Isolate Disables the transition of variables across the cutters for all
stream cutters placed by the Tear option.
After clicking Isolate, if you close the Delta Base utility
without clicking Propagate, the cutters will be left in non-
transitional state.
So any changes made in the flowsheet will not be
transferred into or out of the scoped objects.
Propagate Enables the transition of variables across the cutters for all
stream cutters placed by the Tear option.
Value changes in the flowsheet are able to propagate
through the scope objects and to the entire process flow
diagram.
Close Closes the Delta Base utility property view.
10.2.2 Derivative Analysis Tab

The Derivative Analysis tab allows you to:
• Scope objects to be included in the Delta Base utility.
• Select variables for the Delta Base utility.
• Generate derivatives by perturbation of independent
variables.
• Export the derivatives to a *.csv file.
The table layout of the Derivative Analysis tab is similar to

the Excel spread sheet layout from the PIMS program.
10-6
Figure 10.3

the Derivative Analysis tab:
Object Description
Name field Allows you to change the name of the Delta Base
utility.
Scope Objects button Allows you to scope objects to be included in the
Delta Base utility by opening the Target Objects
Property View.
Add Independent Allows you to add independent variables by
Variable button opening the Select Variable Property View.
Add Dependent Allows you to add dependent variables by opening
Variable button the Select Variable Property View.
Top right table Contains the tag name, unit type, perturbation
value, and proxy variable toggle of the
The unit type selected for the independent
variable is the unit that will be used to calculate
the derivative value.
Middle left table Contains the tag name, description, unit type, and
base value of the dependent variables.
10-7
Object Description
Middle right table Contains the derivative value for the dependent
variables with respect to the independent
variables.
For example, the derivative value for independent
variable X and dependent variable Y, is located in
the intersecting cell of column X and row Y.
Bottom left table Contains the tag name, description, unit type, and
base value of the independent variable.
Cancel Solve button Allows you to stop the solver, cancelling the
calculation of derivatives or the refreshing of
dependent variable values.
Generate Derivatives Allows you to start the calculation to generate
button derivative values based on the independent
variable perturbation.
Export Data button Allows you to export the generated derivative
values to a *.cvs file. This file can be imported into
the PIMS program.
Configuring Independent Variables

To configure an independent variable:
1. Open the Delta Base Utility property view and go to the
Derivative Analysis tab.
2. Click the Add Independent Variable button to Select the
Variable.
After you have selected a variable, the description of the
selected independent variable appears in the top right and
bottom left tables of the Derivative Analysis tab.
3. Select the unit type you want to enter the value in by doing
one of the following:
• In the top right table, use the drop-down list in the
appropriate cell in the Units row to select and view the
variable values in different units.
• In the bottom left table, use the drop-down list in the
appropriate cell under the Units column to select and
view the variable values in different units.
The unit selected for the independent variable is the unit

that will be used to calculate the derivative value.
4. In the top right table, change the independent variable's

name by selecting and typing the new name in the
appropriate cell in the Tag row.
10-8
5. Specify the absolute value by which you want the variable to

be changed, the perturbation value, by typing the value in
the appropriate cell in the Pert row. The value entered will
have the units selected in the Units cell.
6. In the bottom left table, change the independent variable's
description by selecting and typing the new description in
the appropriate cell under the Desc column.
7. Specify a tag for the row containing the independent variable
by selecting and typing a name in the appropriate cell under
the Tag column. This name will be exported as the tag for
the 'balance row' in the PIMS model.
8. You can change the base variable value by selecting and
typing the new value in the appropriate cell under the Base
column. The value entered will have the units selected in the
Units cell.
Configuring Proxy Variables

To select and configure a proxy variable:
1. Open the Delta Base Utility property view, and go to the
2. Select the Use proxy checkbox of an independent variable
that requires a proxy variable.
3. Open the Independent Var property view by double-clicking
on any cell of the selected independent variable.
Figure 10.4
4. (Optional) You can modify the selected independent variable

by double-clicking the Independent Variable field and
following the Select the Variable procedure.
5. Select the proxy variable by double-clicking on the Proxy
Variable field and following the Select the Variable
procedure.
10-9
6. Specify the units, base value, and perturbation value for the
proxy variable in the appropriate field.
7. Click the Close icon to close the Independent Var
property view.
Configuring Dependent Variables

To configure a dependent variable:
1. Open the Delta Base Utility property view and go to the
2. Click the Add Dependent Variable button to Select the
Variable.
After you have selected a variable, the description of the
selected dependent variable appears in the middle table of
the Derivative Analysis tab.
3. Change the dependent variable's tag name by selecting and
typing the new name in the appropriate cell under the Tag
column.
4. Change the dependent variable's description by selecting
and typing the new description in the appropriate cell under
the Desc column.
5. Use the drop-down list in the appropriate cell under the
Units column to select and view the variable values in
different units.
6. The base value for a dependent variable is the value of the
variable when the flowsheet is solved at the base values of
all the independent variables. To refresh the dependent
variable values, right-click on the property view and select
Refresh dependent variables from the object inspect
menu.
10-10
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Utilities 10-
10.2.3 Variables Tab

The Variables tab has similar functions as the Derivative
Analysis tab. You can scope objects and select variables for the
Delta Base utility.
Figure 10.5
The table layout of the Variables tab is the standard HYSYS

layout.

the Variables tab:
Object Description
Name field Allows you to change the name of the Delta Base
utility.
Scope Objects button Allows you to scope objects to be included in the
Delta Base utility by opening the Target Objects
Property View.
Independent Variable group
Insert button Allows you to add independent variables by
opening the Select Variable Property View.
10-11
Object Description
Edit button Allows you to edit the selected independent
variables by opening the Select Variable
Property View.
Delete button Allows you to remove the selected independent or
proxy variables from the Delta Base utility.
When you delete a proxy variable, HYSYS
automatically deletes the independent variable
associated to the proxy variable.
Refresh button Allows you to set all independent and proxy
variables to the current values in the flowsheet.
Independent Contains the tag name, description, unit type,
Variable table base value, current value, perturbation value, and
proxy toggle checkbox of the independent
variables.
The unit type selected for the independent
variable is the unit that will be used to calculate
the derivative value.
Dependent Variable group
Insert button Allows you to add dependent variables by opening
the Select Variable Property View.
Edit button Allows you to edit the selected dependent
variables by opening the Select Variable
Property View.
Delete button Allows you to remove the selected dependent
variables from the Delta Base utility.
Refresh button Allows you to set all dependent variables to the
values corresponding to the base values for the
Cancel button Allows you to stop the solver, cancelling the
refreshing of dependent variable values or the
calculation of derivatives.
Dependent Variable Contains the tag name, description, unit type,
table base value, and current value of the dependent
variables.
Configuring Independent Variables

To configure an independent variable:
1. Open the Delta Base utility property view.
2. Go to the Variables tab.
3. Click the Scope Objects button to select the objects
containing the variables you want to export.
4. In the Independent Variables group, click the Insert button
to Select the Variable.
10-12
The description of the selected independent variable appears

in the table.
5. Change the variable's name by typing the new name in the
appropriate cell under the Tag column.
6. Change the independent variable's description by selecting
the Description column.
different units.
8. Change the base variable value by selecting and typing the
new value in the appropriate cell under the Base column.
The value entered will have the units selected in the Units
column.
The current value of the variable in the flowsheet is
displayed in the appropriate cell under the Current column.
9. Specify the absolute perturbation value by typing the new
value in the appropriate cell under the Pert column. The
value entered will have the units selected in the Units
column.
10. (Optional) If a proxy variable is required to vary the
independent variable, select the checkbox in the appropriate
cell under the Pert column.
Information about the proxy variable appears in a row below

the associated independent variable.
Configuring Proxy Variables

To select a proxy variable on the Variables tab:
1. Open the Delta Base Utility property view, and go to the
Variables tab.
2. In the Independent Variables group, select any cell in the
row containing the proxy variable (any variable that has the
description Proxy for the independent variable name), and
click the Edit button.
10-13
The Select proxy variable for… property view appears.
Figure 10.6
You can also access the Select proxy variable for… property
view by double-clicking any of the cells in the row containing
the proxy variable.
3. Select the proxy variable by following the Select the
Variable procedure.
4. Specify the units, base value, and perturbation value for the
proxy variable directly in the row containing the proxy
variable.
5. (Optional) Change the independent variable associated with
the proxy variable. Select any cell in the row containing the
proxy variable, and double-click in the cell or click the Edit
button.
6. (Optional) Change the name of the independent and proxy
variables by typing a new name in the appropriate cell.
Proxy variables that are not connected to a variable will

display no var in the Proxy Variable field.
The Description for proxy variables is not modifiable and
indicates which independent variable is associated to the
proxy variable.
10-14
Configuring Dependent Variables

To configure a dependent variable:
2. Go to the Variables tab.
3. Click the Scope Objects button to select the objects
containing the variables you want to export.
4. In the Dependent Variables group, click the Insert button to
Select the Variable.
The description of the selected dependent variable appears
in the table.
5. Change the dependent variable's name by selecting and
typing the new name in the appropriate cell under the Tag
column.
6. Change the dependent variable's description by selecting
the Description column.
different units.
The current value of the variable in the flowsheet is
displayed in the appropriate cell under the Current column.
10-15
10.2.4 Select Variable

Property View
The Select Variable property view is used to browse for and
select variables from a single or multi-level process flowsheet
diagram.
Figure 10.7
The following table lists and describes each object in the Select
Variable property view:
Object Description
Flowsheet list Allows you to select a flowsheet from a list of all
available flow sheets in the simulation.
Object list Allows you to select an object from the list of all
objects available from the selected flowsheet.
Variable list Allows you to select the variable from the list of all
variables available from the selected object.
Variable Allows you to select a specific variable qualification
Specifics list from the list of all specifics from the selected variable.
Variable Allows you to type in a description for the selected
Description field variable.
OK button Allows you to add the selected variable to the Delta
Base utility.
10-16
Object Description
Object Filter Allows you to filter the list of objects available for the
variable selection. There are seven filter options:
• All. Makes all the objects in the selected
flowsheet available.
• Streams. Makes only streams in the selected
• UnitOps. Makes only unit operations in the
selected flowsheet available.
• Logicals. Makes only logical operations in the
• Utilities. Makes only utility operations in the
• ColumnOps. Makes only objects in the selected
column environment available.
• Custom. Makes only the objects from the
customized filter available.
Custom button Allows you to configure the customized filter option, by
accessing the Select Type property view and setting
the type of objects to be included in the filter.
Disconnect Allows you to remove the selected variable from the
button Delta Base utility.
Cancel button Allows you to exit the Select Variable property view
without saving any changes.
Select the Variable

When selecting a variable, work through the lists from left to
right. To select a variable:
1. Open the Select Variable property view.
Click the Cancel button at any time to close the Select
Variable property view without accepting any changes.
2. From the Flowsheet list, select the flowsheet which the
variable is located.
3. From the Object list, select the object with the variable you
want to use.
4. From the Variable list, select the variable you want to use.
5. Certain variables (such as component specific variables),
require further specification. From the Variable Specifics list,
select the qualifier for the variable.
6. Enter a more detailed description of the variable in the
Variable Description field or leave the default description.
7. Click OK to accept the variable.
10-17
To disconnect a variable from an object, click the Disconnect

button. The Variable Navigator remains open, allowing you
to make a new variable selection.
10.2.5 Target Objects Property

View
The Target Objects property view allows you to scope objects to
be included in the Delta Base utility.
Figure 10.8
The following table lists and describes in the objects in the

Target Objects property view:
Object Description
FlowSheets Allows you to select a flowsheet from a list of top-level and
group sub-level flowsheets available to the Delta Base utility.
Object Filter Allows you to filter the list of objects available for scoping
group into the Delta Base utility. There are five filter options:
• All. Makes all the objects in the selected flowsheet
available.
• Streams. Makes only streams in the selected
• UnitOps. Makes only unit operations in the selected
• Logicals. Makes only logical operations in the
• FlowSheet Wide. Makes the entire selected
10-18
Object Description
Unit Allows you to select the operations you want to scope into
Operations the Delta Base utility.
group The name of the right group in the Objects Available group
varies depending on the option selected in the Object Filter
group.
>>>>>> Allows you to move the selected objects from the Objects
button Available group to the Scope Objects group.
<<<<<< Allows you to remove the selected objects from the Scope
button Objects group.
Scope Displays the objects you have selected to scope into the
Objects Delta Base utility.
group
Accept List Allows you to include the selected scope objects into the
button Delta Base utility, and close the Target Objects property
view.
Cancel Allows you to close the Target Objects property view,
Changes without accepting any changes made in the property view.
button
Scoping Objects
To scope objects for the Delta Base utility:
2. Go to the Derivative Analysis tab.
3. Click the Scope Objects button. The Target Objects
property view appears.
4. In the FlowSheets group, select the flow sheet that contains
the object you want to scope.
5. In the available objects group (list on left side), select the
objects you want to consider in the Delta Base utility.
6. Click the >>>>>> button to move the selected objects into
the Scope Objects group.
7. Click the Accept List button to scope the selected unit
operations and exit the Target Objects property view.
Changing the scope in the Target Objects property view will

automatically remove variables (that are no longer attached
to the objects in the Scope Objects list) from the Delta Base
utility.
10-19
10.2.6 Generating Derivative

Values
To generate derivative values of dependent variables with
respect to changes in the values of independent variables:
2. Go to the Derivative Analysis tab.
3. In the top right table, select the type of units you want to
use by using the drop-down list in the appropriate cell along
the Units row.
4. Type the absolute perturbation (amount of changes) values
for the independent variables in the appropriate cells along
the Pert row.
If the independent variable you have selected is a calculated
variable (in other words, the variable value is not specified
but calculated by HYSYS), HYSYS will not let you vary the
value of the selected independent variable.
You have to either add tear around the scoped objects or
select the appropriate checkbox in the Use proxy row, and
use a proxy variable to vary the calculated independent
variable value.
5. (Optional) Click the Isolate button to isolate the scope
object.
When the independent variable values change, the new
values are ignored by the rest of the objects in the process
flow diagram.
6. Click the Generate Derivatives button to calculate the new
dependent variable values and the derivative values.
10-20
The derivative values are displayed in the middle table with

respect to the independent variable columns.
Figure 10.9
The derivatives are displayed in the delta units of the

dependent variable with respect to the delta units of the
independent variable. Selecting different units will display
the derivatives in the new unit set, but the values are only
valid at the base values of the independent variables in the
unit sets at which the analysis was performed.
Click the Cancel Solve button, if you want to stop the

derivative calculations.
7. (Optional) Click the Propagate button to deactivate the
stream cutters. This allows changes in the flowsheet to
propagate through the scope objects to the entire process
flow diagram, but may cause independent variables to
become un-modifiable.
10-21
Equations to Calculate Derivatives

The following is an example on calculating the derivatives from
independent variables:
y1 – y0
Derivative value = Δy
------ = ---------------
- (10.1)
Δx x1 – x0
where:
x 1 = x 0 + Δx
y1 = new dependent variable value based on x1
x0 = base value of the independent variable
y0 = base value of the dependent variable
Δx = perturbation value of the independent variable
The following is an example on calculating the derivatives from

proxy variables:
Derivative value = Δy
------ (10.2)
Δx
where:
w 1 = w 0 + Δw
w0 = base value of the proxy variable
Δw = perturbation value of the proxy variable
Δx = x 1 – x 0
x0 = base value of the independent variable
x1 = new independent variable value based on w1
Δy = y 1 – y 0
y0 = base value of the dependent variable
y1 = new dependent variable value based on w1
10-22
10.2.7 Exporting Generated

Derivatives
To export the Delta Base data to PIMS, you have to save the
derivative data as a *.csv file.
2. Click the Derivative Analysis tab.
3. Click the Export Data button. The File Selection for
Exporting Delta Base Data property view appears.
4. Use the Save in drop-down list to select the location for the
variable *.csv file.
5. In the File name field, type in the name of the *.csv file.
6. Click the Save button. You can now retrieve the variable
data in PIMS by opening the *.csv file in the PIMS program.
10.3 Petroleum Assay

Utility
The Petroleum Assay utility is only available for use when
you have added a petroleum assay in the simulation
environment.
When there is a petroleum assay in the simulation
environment, the Boiling Point Curves utility is unavailable.
The Petroleum Assay utility, which is used in conjunction with

characterized assays from the Petroleum Assay, allows you to
obtain the results of a laboratory style analysis for your
simulation streams. Simulated distillation data including TBP,
ASTM D86, D2887, D1160(Vac), and D1160(Atm), as well as
petroleum properties for each cut point are calculated. The data
can be viewed in a tabular format or graphically.
The object for the analysis can be a material stream, a stream

phase in any stage of a tray section, a stream phase in a
separator, a stream phase in a condenser, or a stream phase in
a reboiler.
10-23
10-24 Petroleum Assay Utility
Figure 10.10
To ignore this utility during calculations, select the Ignored

checkbox on the utility’s property view. HYSYS disregards the
utility entirely until you restore it to an active state by clearing
the checkbox.
Adding a Petroleum Assay Utility

pressing CTRL U.
2. From the list of available utilities, in the right pane, select
the Petroleum Assay utility.
3. Click the Add Utility button. The Petroleum Assay utility
10-24
Editing a Petroleum Assay Utility

Petroleum Assay utility you want to view.
properties.
Deleting a Petroleum Assay Utility

Petroleum Assay utility you want to delete.
10.3.1 Design Tab

The Design tab contains two pages:
• Connections
• Notes
10-25
Connections Page
On the Connections page, you can select the parameters for the
Petroleum Assay utility.
Figure 10.11
To set the Petroleum Assay utility parameters:

1. On the Connections page of the Design tab, change the
Name of the utility, if desired.
2. From the Object Type drop-down list, select the object type
you want. The options are Stream, Tray Section, Separator,
Condenser, or Reboiler.
For a tray section, the petroleum assay properties can be
accessed on the Profiles tab of the Column Runner.
10-26
3. Click the Select Object button, the Select (object type)

Figure 10.12
The title of the Select (object type) property view depends

on the object type you selected. For example, if you select
the condenser, the Select Condenser property view appears.
4. Choose the appropriate object from the Object list, and click
the OK button to add the selected object to the utility.
The Object list can be filtered by selecting one of the radio
buttons in the Object Filter group.
5. For all object types except the Stream selection, from the
Phase drop-down list you can select the phase for the
analysis as either Vapour or Liquid.
6. If the Object Type which you have selected is a Tray Section,
from the Stage drop-down list select a stage.
Notes Page
For more information The Notes page provides a text editor, where you can record
Notes Page/Tab.
any comments or information regarding the utility, or to your
simulation case in general.
10-27
10.3.2 Results Tab

The Results tab contains three pages:
• Boiling Curves
• Properties
• Plots
Boiling Curves Page

You can view the results of the boiling point curve calculations in
tabular format on the Boiling Curves page.
Figure 10.13
Simulated distillation profiles are provided for the following

assay types:
• TBP
• ASTM D86
• ASTM D2887
• ASTM D1160 (Vac.)
• ASTM D1160 (Atm.)
The ASTM D86 boiling point curve corresponds to the true

boiling points of the oil, which assumes no cracking has
occurred.
10-28
When the oil is characterized by a ASTM D86 distillation assay

with no cracking option, the ASTM D86 boiling point curve
corresponds to raw lab data, with no cracking correction
applied.
When the oil is characterized by a ASTM D86 distillation assay

with cracking option, the ASTM D86 boiling point curve
corresponds to the assay input data.
Properties Page
The Properties page displays the petroleum assay properties.
Figure 10.14
Plots Page
The Plots page displays the plots of the boiling point curves,
molecular weight, standard liquid density, and the petroleum
properties in graphical form. Examine the plot of your choice by
making a selection from the Property drop-down list.
Refer to Section 10.4 -
Graph Control in the You can customize a plot by right-clicking in the plot area, and
HYSYS User Guide for
details concerning the selecting Graph Control from the object inspect menu.
customization of plots.
10-29
The figure below shows an example of the Plots page.
Figure 10.15
10.3.3 Dynamics Tab

The Dynamics tab allows you to control how often the utility
gets calculated when running in Dynamic mode.
Figure 10.16
10-30
The Control Period field is used to specify the frequency that the
utility is calculated. A value of 10 indicates that the utility be
recalculated every 10th pressure flow step. This can help speed
up your dynamic simulation since utilities can require some time
to calculate.
The Use Default Periods checkbox allows you to set the control
period of one utility to equal the control period of any other
utilities that you have in the simulation. For example, if you
have five utilities, and require them all to have a control period
of 5 and currently the value is 8, with this checkbox selected if
you change the value in one utility all the other utilities change.
Alternatively, if you want all the utilities to have different values
you would clear this checkbox.
The Enable in Dynamics checkbox is used to activate this

feature for use in Dynamic mode.
10-31
10-32 Swing Cut Utility
10.4 Swing Cut Utility

The Swing Cut utility, which is used in conjunction with the
Petroleum Distillation column, allows you to generate and
export assay tables with user-specified swing cuts in PIMS
format.
Aspen PIMS (Process Industry Modeling System) is a production

planning and optimization tool that is widely used in the refinery
industry. It allows you to determine the best operating
conditions at minimum cost using Linear Programming (LP) and
simplified assumptions. The Swing Cut utility provides tighter
integration between Aspen Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
and Aspen PIMS to achieve a wider refinery modeling solution.
LP crude assays consist of yields and properties of heart cuts

and swing cuts. Heart cuts refer to material that must always be
allocated to a given refinery stream. For example, the kerosene
heart cut is material that will always be taken from the crude
column kerosene draw. Swing cuts represent material that can
be allocated to two adjacent crude column draws.
For example, the naphtha/kerosene swing cut is material that

can be drawn out of the crude column with the naphtha stream,
or kerosene stream. The allocation of the swing cut is
determined by the cut point on the actual crude column; this is
set by specifying the TBPs.
Adding a Swing Cut Utility

pressing CTRL U.
2. From the list of available utilities, shown in the right pane,
select the Swing Cut Utility.
3. Click the Add Utility button. The Swing Cut utility property
view appears.
10-32
Editing a Swing Cut Utility

2. From the list of installed utilities, shown in the left pane,
select the Swing Cut utility you want to view.
properties.
Deleting a Swing Cut Utility

2. From the list of installed utilities, shown in the left pane,
select the Swing Cut utility you want to delete.
Exporting Assay Properties from

Swing Cut Utility
You can only export assay properties after you have run the
Swing Cut calculation option.
1. Open the Swing Cut Utility property view.

2. Scope the appropriate objects.
3. Select the light end components for the Swing Cut
calculation.
4. Select the assay properties for the Swing Cut calculation.
5. Specify a tag name in the Crude tag field.
6. Click the Run button.
7. Click the Export Assay Table button to export the
calculated assay properties data to a *csv file.
10-33
10.4.1 Specification Tab

The Specification tab allows you to specify the heart and swing
cuts that you want to calculate in the Petroleum Distillation
column.
Figure 10.17

the Specifications tab:
Object Description
Name field Allows you to change the name of the Swing Cut utility.
Scope Objects Allows you to select a Petroleum Distillation column to
button be attached to the Swing Cut utility by opening the
Target Objects Property View.
Calculation Basis Allows you to select Volume Basis or Mass Basis for
drop-down list your calculations.
Once you have connected the Swing Cut utility to a Petroleum

Distillation column, the product streams of the column are
shown in the Heart and Swing Cut table.
10-34
You can select the products you want to include in the printed
report in the Swing Cut utility by selecting their corresponding
checkboxes in the Include column.
The TBP Cut data for each product stream are retrieved from the
column. You need to specify a maximum TBP cut temperature to
define a swing cut. The maximum TBP Cut must be a
temperature value in between two adjacent product streams
and it must satisfy the following condition:
( T2 – T1 )
T 1 + 1.0 < TBP < T 1 + ------------------------ (10.3)
2
T2 > T1 (10.4)
where:
T1, T2 = temperature values for product stream 1 and 2
TBP = maximum TBP cut for the product stream 1
Since there is no specific TBP cut point for the last product
stream, the last maximum TBP cut must satisfy the following
condition:
T 1 + 1.0 < TBPLast < T 1 + 50.0 (10.5)
where:
T1 = temperature of the product stream before the last

product stream
TBPLast = swing cut TBP for the last product stream
You will not be allowed to enter a value if the value is out of

range.
10-35
10.4.2 Light Ends Tab

The Light Ends tab contains a table that displays the petroleum
light ends properties (yield by weight and volume, NBP,
molecular weight, and SG) of the components in the selected/
scoped objects.
You can select or clear the checkboxes under the Include

column to consider or ignore the component properties
during calculation.
Figure 10.18
10-36
10.4.3 Assay Table Tab

The Assay Table tab allows you to select and view the assay
properties from the product stream used in the calculation.
Figure 10.19
• Calculation Basis drop-down list enables you to select

Volume Basis or Mass Basis for your calculations.
• Crude Tag field enables you to specify a PIMS tag for
the assay table.
• Run button enables you to run the Swing Cut calculation
option.
• Export Assay Table button enables you to export the
calculated assay properties data into a *.csv format file.
10-37
Selecting an Assay Property

To select an assay property for a product stream:
1. Under the Assay Property column, place the mouse cursor
over an empty cell.
The down arrow icon appears in the cell as shown.
Figure 10.20
2. Click the down arrow icon to open the drop-down list and
select an assay property.
Property Calculation for Swing Cuts

After you have selected the desired cut properties for each
product stream, click on the Run button to run the utility.
Swing Cuts utility generates assay tables with user-specified
swing cuts. For each individual crude, the column will run once
using the default product cut points, and once again using the
maximum cut point for each product, where a swing cut was
selected.
For instance, in a Kero-LGO swing, the column will run with Kero
cut point set to maximum Kero TBP cut, and then the following
formulas are used to calculate properties (Ps) of Kero-LGO
swing.
10-38
From LGO:
Vs ⋅ Ps + V1 ⋅ P1 = ( Vs + V1 ) ⋅ P2 (10.6)
[(V + V ) ⋅ P – V ⋅ P ]
s 1 2 1 1 (10.7)
P = ----------------------------------------------------------------
s V
s
where:
V = volume (or weight)
P = property
s = swing cut
1, 2 = state (low, high cut point)
The Swing Cut utility is available in steady state mode. You can
perform the calculations on the petroleum distillation column
without propagation of the perturbation to other unit operations.
The utility will be available within the subflowsheet environment
as well as at the main flowsheet level. Each instance of the
utility will be independent. There may be several instances of
the utility active in a flowsheet.
10.4.4 PIMS Format Tab

The PIMS Format tab allows you to associate a unique PIMS tag
for each product stream and cut property. When you export the
assay tables, these PIMS tags are used to represent the product
streams and cut properties in the csv file. You can type directly
in the cell to specify a PIMS tag.
10-39
Figure 10.21
Comma Separated Values (csv) file is a simple structured data

file. The file contains a table of product streams and their
corresponding properties data. The data in the file can be
accessed through Microsoft Excel application. Aspen Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining uses csv files to contain petroleum
properties of individual assays.
The following describes the general layout of the csv file:

• In the first column, the PIMS tags for the product
streams and cut properties are displayed in combination.
• In the second column, the full name of the product
stream and the associated cut property are displayed.
• The third column displays the numerical data
information.
• The crude tag is displayed in the first cell of the third
column. You can have multiple crude data displayed on
the same spreadsheet.
10-40
Petroleum Methods & Correlations A-1
A Petroleum Methods &

Correlations
A.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2
A.2 Physical Property Calculation ........................................................ 2

A.2.1 Calculation for Molecular Weight................................................. 3
A.2.2 Calculation for Centroid Boiling Point........................................... 3
A.2.3 Calculation for Specific Gravity................................................... 4
A.2.4 Heat of Formation .................................................................... 4
A.3 Petroleum Property Calculation ..................................................... 5

A.3.1 Mass Blend.............................................................................. 6
A.3.2 Mole Blend .............................................................................. 6
A.3.3 Volume Blend .......................................................................... 7
A.3.4 Healy Method for RON and MON ................................................. 8
A.3.5 Component Level Calculations.................................................... 9
A.3.6 Stream Level Calculations ....................................................... 16
A.4 Comma Separated Value Files...................................................... 40

A.4.1 Format of CSV Files ................................................................ 40
A.5 Petroleum Assay XML Files .......................................................... 44

A.5.1 File Versions .......................................................................... 46
A.5.2 File Types.............................................................................. 46
A.5.3 Crude and Component Information........................................... 47
A.5.4 Individual Component Information............................................ 48
A.6 PET Files ...................................................................................... 49
A.7 Spiral Files ................................................................................... 51
A. 8 References................................................................................... 47
A-1
A-2 Introduction
A.1 Introduction
This appendix is contains the blending rules of the physical and
petroleum properties in petroleum assays, the definition of a
Comma Separated Value (CSV) file, and the format of an XML
file containing a petroleum assay data.

license, you will not be able to access the petroleum
properties.
A.2 Physical Property

Calculation
For more information on All the physical properties of a stream with petroleum assays
physical property
calculations, refer to are calculated/estimated based on three critical information:
Appendix A - Property molecular weight, centroid boiling point, and specific gravity.
Methods & Calculations These three property values are often provided with the
in the HYSYS
Simulation Basis guide. petroleum properties values of a petroleum assay.
If the three critical property values are not provided,

estimated values are calculated based on blending the
components’ property values. The components considered
are the components that are active in the petroleum assay.
When two petroleum assays are blended together, their physical

properties are recalculated/re-estimated using the blended
value of the molecular weight, centroid boiling point, specific
gravity, and heat of formation.
A-2
A.2.1 Calculation for Molecular

Weight
The following equation is used to calculate the blended
molecular weight value:
∑ MFlowS × MW S
MW blend = S = stream
--------------------------------------------------------------- (A.1)
∑ MFlow S
S = stream
where:
MWblend = mixed molecular weight
MFlow = mass flow rate of stream S
MW = molecular weight in each stream
A.2.2 Calculation for Centroid

Boiling Point
The following equation is used to calculate the blended centroid
boiling point value:
∑ VFlow S × CBP S
CBP blend = S = streams
------------------------------------------------------------------ (A.2)
∑ VFlow S
S = streams
where:
CBPblend = mixed centroid boiling point
VFlow = volumetric flow rate of stream S
CBP = centroid boiling point in each stream
A-3
A-4 Physical Property Calculation
A.2.3 Calculation for Specific

Gravity
The following equation is used to calculate the blended liquid
density/specific gravity value:
∑ MFlow S
SG blend = S---------------------------------------------
= streams - (A.3)
∑ VFlow S
S = streams
where:
SGblend = mixed specific gravity
The volumetric flow conditions is at standard 60°F.
A.2.4 Heat of Formation

The following equation is used to calculate the blended heat of
formation value:
∑ MolFlow S × HofF S
HofF blend = S = stream
------------------------------------------------------------------------ (A.4)
∑ MolFlow S
S = stream
where:
HofFblend = mixed heat of formation
MolFlow = molar flow rate of stream S
HofF = heat of formation in each stream
A-4
A.3 Petroleum Property

Calculation
In Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining there are two levels of
calculation for the petroleum properties:
• Component Level. In this calculation method, individual
component properties in a stream are used to calculate
the petroleum property.
Component level blending occurs in all situations when two

or more streams enter a unit operation. For example, in
mixers, separators, and distillation columns with two or
more feeds.
For example, consider the streams mixing in the figure

below. To calculate the blended Aniline Point for
component B in stream 3, the Component Level method
uses the B component property from stream 1 and 2.
You can also select the type of blending rule (mass,
mole, or volume) to calculate the new Aniline Point.
Figure A.1
• Stream Level. In this calculation method, the overall

stream properties are used to calculate the petroleum
property.
For example, consider the streams mixing in the figure
above. To calculate the blended Aniline Point for stream
3, the Stream Level method uses the petroleum property
from component A, B, and C. In the case of Stream Level
there is only one type of blending equation available.
There are three main blending calculations that most of the

petroleum properties use: Mass, Mole, and Volume.
A-5
A-6 Petroleum Property Calculation
A.3.1 Mass Blend

This blending rule4 is used to blend properties based on mass
fraction using the following relation:
∑ MFlow S × prop S
Mixprop = S = streams
------------------------------------------------------------------- (A.5)
∑ MFlowS
S = streams
where:
prop = property to be blended in each stream
Mixprop = mixed value of the targeted property
A.3.2 Mole Blend

The Mole Blend rule4 is used to blend properties based on mole
fraction using the following relation:
∑ MolFlow S × prop S
Mixprop = S------------------------------------------------------------------------
= streams - (A.6)
∑ MolFlow S
S = streams
where:
MolFlow = molar flow rate of stream S
A-6
A.3.3 Volume Blend

The Volume Blend rule4 is used to blend properties based on
volume fraction using the following relation:
∑ VFlow S × prop S
Mixprop = S = streams
------------------------------------------------------------------ (A.7)
∑ VFlow S
S = streams
where:
A-7
A.3.4 Healy Method for RON

and MON
The Healy Method9 blending rules for RON and MON are:
RON = RON sum + 0.05411 ( ΔRONMON 1 – RON sum × ΔRONMON )

2 2 (A.8)
+ 0.00098 ( Olfsum2 – Olf sum ) – 0.00074 ( Arom sum2 – Arom sum )
MON = MON sum + 0.03908 ( ΔRONMON 2 – MON sum × ΔRONMON )

–7 2 2 (A.9)
– 7.03 × 10 ( Arom sum2 – Arom sum )
where:
RON sum = ∑ RONi × Vi

S
MON sum = ∑ MONi × Vi

S
Olfsum = ∑ Olfi × Vi
S
2
Olfsum2 = ∑ Olfi × Vi
S
Arom sum = ∑ Aromi × Vi

S
2
Arom sum2 = ∑ Aromi × Vi
S
ΔRONMON = ∑ ( RONi – MONi ) × Vi

S
ΔRONMON 1 = ∑ RONi ( RONi – MONi ) × Vi

S
ΔRONMON 2 = ∑ MONi ( RONi – MONi ) × Vi

S
VFlow i
V i = --------------------------------------------
-
∑ VFlow S
S t
A-8
A.3.5 Component Level

Calculations
The following sections describe the Blend rules and equations at
Component Level calculation for the assay properties in Aspen
Aniline Point
The Aniline Point16,6 is calculated using the following blending
rules:
• Mass Blend
• Mole Blend
• Volume Blend
Aromatics By Volume
The Aromatics By Volume6 is calculated using Volume Blend.
Aromatics By Weight
The Aromatics By Weight16 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Asphaltene Content
The Asphaltene Content3 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Basic Nitrogen Content

The Basic Nitrogen Content3 is calculated using Mass Blend.
C To H Ratio
The C to H Ratio is calculated using Mass Blend.
A-9
Cloud Point
The mass, mole, and volume blending calculations are also
available.
Cloud Point Blending6,16 is calculated using the following

equations:
n
( ∑ v i × CI i ) (A.10)
CIB i = ---------------------------------
1.8
1
---
n (A.11)
CI i = ( 1.8 × C i )
where:
CIBi = Cloud Point of the blended component i
CIi = Cloud Point index of individual components
vi = Volume fraction of individual components
Ci = Cloud Point of individual components
n = default constant value of 0.55, for heavier cut point

HYSYS recommends 0.6
Conradson Carbon Content

The Conradson Carbon Content3 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Copper Content
The Copper Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
A-10
Flash Point
available.
Flash Point Blending6,10,16 is calculated using the following

equations:
– 0.6
( ∑ v i × FIi ) (A.12)
FIB i = --------------------------------------
1.8
– 1-
------ (A.13)
0.6
FI i = ( 1.8 × F i )
where:
FIBi = Flash Point of the blended component i
FIi = Flash Point index of individual components
Fi = Flash Point of individual components
Freeze Point (Temperature)

The Freeze Point6,16 is calculated using the following blending
methods:
• Mass Blend
• Mole Blend
• Volume Blend
Molecular Weight
The Molecular Weight is calculated using Mass Blend.
A-11
MON Clear
The MON Clear6 is calculated using Healy Method for RON and
MON.
Naphthenes By Volume
The Naphthenes By Volume6 is calculated using Volume Blend.
Naphthenes By Weight
The Naphthenes By Weight3,16 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Ni Content
The Ni Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Nitrogen Content
The Nitrogen Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Olefins By Volume
The Olefins By Volume is calculated using Volume Blend.
Olefins By Weight
The Olefins By Weight3 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Paraffins By Volume
The Paraffins By Volume6 is calculated using Volume Blend.
A-12
Paraffins By Weight
The Paraffins By Weight3,16 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Pour Point
available.
Pour Point Blending6,16 is calculated using the following

equations:
PI i = exp ( 73.0883 + 12.885 × In ( P i × 1.8 ) ) (A.14)
⎛ ln ( ∑ PI i × V i ) – 73.0883⎞
exp ⎜ --------------------------------------------------------------⎟ (A.15)
⎝ 12.885 ⎠
PIB i = -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.8
where:
Pi = Pour Point of individual components
PIi = Pour Point index of individual components
Vi = Volume fraction of individual components
PIBi = Pour Point of the blended component i
Refractive Index
The Refractive Index is calculated using the following blending
rules:
• Mass Blend
• Mole Blend
• Volume Blend
A-13
RON Clear
The RON Clear6 is calculated using the Healy Method for RON and
MON.
RON Leaded
The RON Leaded calculated using the following blending rules:
• Mass Blend
• Mole Blend
• Volume Blend
Reid Vapor Pressure (RVP)

available.
RVP Blending1,8,14,15 is calculated using the following equations:
0.8
( ∑ V i × RVPI i )
RVPB i = --------------------------------------- (A.16)
0.145
RVPI i = ( RVP i × 0.145 )

1.25 (A.17)
where:
RVPi = RVP of individual components
RVPIi = RVP index of individual components
RVPBi = RVP of the blended component i
A-14
SG (60/60F)
The SG (60/60°F)7 is calculated using Volume Blend.
Smoke Point
The Smoke Point2 calculated using the following blending rules:
• Mass Blend
• Mole Blend
• Volume Blend
Sulfur Content
The Sulfur Content12 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Vanadium Content
The Vanadium Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Viscosity
The Viscosity is calculated using an indexing method, and there
are two methods available. One method uses 0.8 as the
parameter constant and the second method uses 0.08 as the
parameter constant.
10Vmix (A.18)
U b = 10 –c
U mix = ∑ xi × log ( log [ Vi + c ] ) (A.19)
where:
Ub = viscosity of blend
Ui = viscosity of component i
A-15
Xi = composition fraction of component i
C = parameter constant
Wax Content
The Wax Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
A.3.6 Stream Level

Calculations
The following sections contains the Blend rules and equations at
Stream Level calculation for the assay properties in Aspen
Acetaldehyde (toxic emission)

Toxic emissions from Acetaldehyde11 is calculated using the
following equations:
Acet B ( T 1 – B1 ) ( T2 – B2 )
ToxEmi Acet = -------------- ( 0.444e + 0.556e ) (A.20)
6
10
where:
T 1 = 0.0002631 ( Sulf T ) + 0.039786 ( RVP T ) – 0.012157 ( E300 T )

– 0.005525 ( Arom T ) – 0.009594 ( MTBE T ) + 0.31658 ( ETBE T )
+ 0.24925 ( Ethanol T )
B 1 = 0.0002631 ( Sulf B ) + 0.039786 ( RVP B ) – 0.012157 ( E300 B )

– 0.005525 ( Arom B ) – 0.009594 ( MTBE B ) + 0.31658 ( ETBE B )
+ 0.24925 ( Ethanol B )
T 2 = 0.0002627 ( Sulf T ) – 0.012157 ( E300 T ) – 0.005548 ( Arom T )

– 0.05598 ( MTBET ) + 0.3164665 ( ETBE T ) + 0.2493259 ( Ethanol T )
B 2 = 0.0002627 ( Sulf B ) – 0.012157 ( E300 B ) – 0.005548 ( Arom B )

– 0.05598 ( MTBEB ) + 0.3164665 ( ETBE B ) + 0.2493259 ( Ethanol B )
SulfT = sulfur content, range 0 to 500
A-16
AromT = aromatics content, range 0 to 50
RVP T = Reid Vapor Pressure × 0.145
MTBET = ∑ 34.7 ( Mass of componenti )

i
ETBE T = ∑ 34.7 ( Mass of componenti )

i
Ethanol T = ∑ 34.7 ( Mass of componenti )

i
AcetB = 7.25 for winter, 4.44 for summer
SultB = 338.0 for winter, 339.0 for summer
RVPB = 11.5 for winter, 8.7 for summer
E300B = 83.0 for winter, 83.0 for summer
AromB = 26.4 for winter, 32.0 for summer
Aniline Point
The Aniline Point6,16 is calculated using Volume Blend.
Note: AP values in HYSYS are computed in K. Because some

components may be missing AP values, Σx i ≠ 1 . That means
AP ( @K ) ≠ AP ( @C ) + 273.15
Aromatics By Volume
The Aromatics By Volume6 is calculated using Volume Blend.
Aromatics By Weight
The Aromatics By Weight16 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Asphaltene Content
The Asphaltene Content3 is calculated using Mass Blend.
A-17
Basic Nitrogen Content

The Basic Nitrogen Content3 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Benzene (toxic exhaust emission)

Toxic emissions from Benzene11 is calculated using the following
equations:
ExBenz B ( T1 – B1 ) ( T2 – B2 )
ToxEmi ExBenz = ---------------------- ( 0.444e + 0.556e ) (A.21)
6
10
where:
T 1 = 0.0006197 ( Sulf T ) – 0.003376 ( E200 T ) + 0.02655 ( Arom T )

+ 0.22239 ( Benz T )
B 1 = 0.0006197 ( Sulf B ) – 0.003376 ( E200 B ) + 0.02655 ( Arom B )

+ 0.22239 ( Benz B )
T 2 = 0.000337 ( Sulf T ) + 0.011251 ( E300 T ) + 0.011882 ( Arom T )

+ 0.222318 ( Benz T ) – 0.096047 ( OxyT )
B 2 = 0.000337 ( Sulf B ) + 0.011251 ( E300 B ) + 0.011882 ( Arom B )

+ 0.222318 ( Benz B ) – 0.096047 ( Oxy B )

Oxy T = ∑ 34.7 ( Mass of componenti )

i
Benz T = ∑ 34.7 ( Mass of componenti )

i
EXBenzB = 77.62 for winter, 53.54 for summer

SulfB = 338.0 for winter, 339.0 for summer
E200B = 50.0 for winter., 41.0 for summer
A-18
BenzB = 1.53 for winter, 1.64 for summer
OxyB = 0.0 for winter, 0.0 for summer
Benzene (toxic non-exhaust

emission)
Toxic non-exhaust emissions from Benzene11 is calculated using
the following equations:
ToxEmi NonExBenz = BenzE HotS + BenzE Diu

+ BenzE RunLos + BenzE Reful (A.22)
where:
BenzEHotS = 10 ( Benz T × VOC HotS )

× ( 1.4448 – 0.0342 [ MTBE T ] – 0.080274 [ RVP T ] )
BenzEDiu = 10 ( Benz T × VOC Diu )

× ( 1.3758 – 0.029 [ MTBE T ] – 0.080274 [ RVP T ] )
BenzERunLos = 10 ( Benz T × VOC RunLos )

× ( 1.4448 – 0.0342 [ MTBE T ] – 0.080274 [ RVP T ] )
BenzEReful = 10 ( Benz T × VOC Reful )

× ( 1.3974 – 0.0296 [ MTBE T ] – 0.081507 [ RVP T ] )
Region 1:
VOC HotS = 1000 ( 0.006654 [ RVP 2 ] – 0.08009 [ RVP T ] + 0.2846 )
VOC Diu = 1000 ( 0.007385 [ RVP 2 ] – 0.08981 [ RVP T ] + 0.3158 )
VOC RunLos = 1000 ( 0.017768 [ RVP 2 ] – 0.18746 [ RVP T ] + 0.6146 )
VOC Reful = 1000 ( 0.0004767 [ RVP T ] + 0.011859 )
Region 2:
VOC HotS = 1000 ( 0.006078 [ RVP 2 ] – 0.07474 [ RVP T ] + 0.27117 )
VOC Diu = 1000 ( 0.004775 [ RVP 2 ] – 0.05872 [ RVP T ] + 0.21306 )
A-19
VOC RunLos = 1000 ( 0.016169 [ RVP 2 ] – 0.17206 [ RVP T ] + 0.56724 )
VOC Reful = 1000 ( 0.004767 [ RVP T ] + 0.011859 )
2
RVP 2 = ( RVP T )
Benz T = ∑ 34.7 ( Mass of componenti )

i

i
Butadiene (toxic emission)

Toxic emissions from Butadiene11 is calculated using the
But B (T – B ) (T – B )
- ( 0.444e 1 1 + 0.556e 2 2 )
ToxEmi But = ----------- (A.23)
6
10
where:
T 1 = 0.0001552 ( Sulf T ) – 0.007253 ( E200 T ) – 0.014866 ( E300 T )

– 0.004005 ( Arom T ) + 0.028235 ( Olef T )
B 1 = 0.0001552 ( Sulf B ) – 0.007253 ( E200 B ) – 0.014866 ( E300 B )

– 0.004005 ( Arom B ) + 0.028235 ( Olef B )
T 2 = 0.043696 ( Olef T ) – 0.060771 ( OxyT ) – 0.007311 ( E200 T )

– 0.008058 ( E300 T ) – 0.004005 ( Arom T )
B 2 = 0.043696 ( Olef B ) – 0.060771 ( Oxy B ) – 0.007311 ( E200 B )

– 0.008058 ( E300 B ) – 0.004005 ( Arom B )

OlefT = olefins content, range 0 to 25
Oxy T = ∑ 34.7 ( Mass of componenti )

i
A-20
ButB = 15.84 for winter, 9.38 for summer
OlefB = 11.9 for winter, 9.2 for summer
OxyB = 0.0 for winter, 0.0 for summer
C To H Ratio
The C to H Ratio is calculated using Mass Blend.
Cetane Index (D976)

Cetane Index (D976)17 is calculated using the following
equation:
2
CetIdx 976 = – 420.34 + 0.016 ( API ) + 0.192 ( API ) log 10 ( D86T50F ) (A.24)
2 2
+ 65.01 ( log [ D86T50F ] ) – 0.0001809 ( D86T50F )
where:
D86T50F = D86 value in F at 50% volume
Cetane Index (D4737)

Cetane Index (D4737)17 is calculated using the following
equation:
CetIdx 4737 =
45.2 + 0.0892 ( T10Dif ) + ( 0.131 + 0.901 [ SG Corr ] ) × T50Dif
+ ( 0.0523 – 0.42 [ SG Corr ] ) × T90Dif (A.25)
2 2
+ 0.00049 ( [ T10Dif ] – [ T90Dif ] ) + 107.0 ( SG Corr )
2
+ 60.0 ( SG Corr )
A-21
where:
SG Corr = exp ( – 3.5 [ SG – 0.85 ] ) – 1.0
T10Dif = D86T10 - 215.0
D86T10 = D86 value in C at 10% volume
T50Dif = D86T50 - 260.0
T90Dif = D86T90 - 310.0
Cetane Number
Cetane Number17 is calculated using the following equation:
2 (A.26)
Cetane Number = 5.28 + 0.371 ( CetIdx 4737 ) + 0.0112 ( CetIdx 4737 )
where:
CetIdx4737 = Cetane Index (4737), see Equation (A.25)
Cloud Point
Cloud Point Blending6,16 uses two options:
The Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Indexing Method uses the

0.55
( ∑ vi × Ci ) (A.27)
CIB = ------------------------------------
1.8
1-
---------
0.55 (A.28)
CI = ( 1.8 × CIB )
where:
CIB = Blended Cloud Point index
CI = Cloud Point index of stream in F
A-22
Ci = Cloud Point of individual components in K
The Crude Manager Indexing Method for Cloud Point uses the
CIB = Σ ( V i exp ( 0.035 × C i ) ) (A.29)
CI = log (---------------
CIB )- (A.30)
0.035
There is also a backup method equation:
0.315
– 7.41 + 5.49 log 10 ( BP i ) – 0.712 ( BP i ) – 0.133 ( SG i ) (A.31)
CIB i = 10.0
where:
BP = average boiling point (° R)
SG = specific gravity
Conradson Carbon Content

The Conradson Carbon Content3 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Copper Content
The Copper Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
DON (Clear)
DON is calculated at the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
stream level using the following formula:
RON + MON-
DON ( Clear ) = -------------------------------- (A.32)
2
A-23
Driveability Index
The driveability index is calculated at the Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining stream level using the following formula:
DI = 1.5 × TBP10F + 3.0 × TBP50F + TBP90F (A.33)
where:
DI = Driveability Index
TBP10 = 10 vol % TBP F
Flash Point
Flash Point Blending6,10,16 is calculated using the following
methods:
Flash Point: Indexing Method:
– 0.6
FIB =
∑ ( v i × FIi )
--------------------------------------- (A.34)
1.8
–1
-------
0.6 (A.35)
FI = ( 1.8 × F i )
where:
FIB = Blended Flash Point
FIi = Flash Point of component i in K
vi = Volume fraction of component i
FI = Flash Point of stream in K
A-24
Flash Point: API2B7.1 Method
1
FP = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- (A.36)
2.84947
– 0.024209 + ------------------------------ + 3.4254e-3 × log ( d86temp10 )
D86temp10
where:
FP = Flash point in K
D86temp10 = 10 vol% D86 temperature in K
This is also a back up method for calculating the flash point

when the indexing method fails (due to not having the Flash
point of individual components).
Flash Point: Riazi Cuts Method
This method calculates the Flash point of individual component

by following equation
1
FP i = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.84947 (A.37)
– 0.024209 + ------------------- + 3.4254e-3 × log ( NBP i )
NBP i
where:
NBPi = Normal boiling point of component i in K
FPi = Flash point of component i in K
It then blends the flash point of individual components using the

Wickey18 method.
– 6.1188 + 2414.0
Flash Point Index = ⎛⎝ pow ⎛⎝ 10.0, ⎛⎝ -------------------------------------------⎞⎠ ⎞⎠ (A.38)
FP i + 230.56
2414.0 (A.39)
FP = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- – 230.56
( 6.1188 + log 10 ( FlashPointIndex ) )
A-25
where:
FP = Flash point of stream in K
Flash Point: Linear D86 Based Method
The Linear D86 based method uses a simple correlation:
FP = param1 + param2 × D86_IBP + param3 × D86_5 (A.40)
where:
D86_IBP = D86 IBP in C,
D86_5 = 5 vol % D86 in C
FP = Flash point of stream in C
Param1, param2, param3 and D86 IBP can be specified from the
correlation manager.
Freeze Point (Temperature)

Freeze Point temperature6,16 is calculated using the following
methods:
Freeze Point: Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Indexing

Method
1
---
3 (A.41)
FP = ( Vf max ) × ( F max – F min ) + F max
where:
Fmax = maximum freeze point of all components in K
Fmin = minimum freeze point of all components in K
Vfmax = maximum volume fraction among all components
A-26
Freeze Point: CrudeManager Indexing Method
FIB i = exp ( 2.35 + 0.03638 × FI i )

(A.42)
FI = ( Ln ( FIB ) – 2.35 ) ⁄ 0.03638
where:
FIi = Freeze Point of component i in F
FIBi = Freeze Point Index for component i
FI = Freeze Point of stream in F
Formaldehyde (toxic emission)

Toxic emissions from Formaldehyde11 is calculated using the
Form B (T – B ) (T – B )
- ( 0.444e 1 1 + 0.556e 2 2 )
ToxEmi Form = ---------------- (A.43)
6
10
where:
T 1 = – 0.010226 ( E300 T ) – 0.007166 ( Arom T ) + 0.0462131 ( MTBE T )
B 1 = – 0.010226 ( E300 B ) – 0.007166 ( Arom B ) + 0.0462131 ( MTBE B )
T 2 = – 0.10226 ( E300 T ) – 0.007166 ( Arom T ) + 0.0462131 ( MTBE T )

– 0.031352 ( Olef T )
B 2 = – 0.10226 ( E300 B ) – 0.007166 ( Arom B ) + 0.0462131 ( MTBE B )

– 0.031352 ( Olef B )

i
FormB = 15.34 for winter, 9.7 for summer
A-27
Luminometer Number
The Luminometer Number is calculated using the following
formula:
L = – 12.03 + 3.009 ( Smoke ) – 0.0104 ( Smoke )

2 (A.44)
where:
L = The Luminometer Number
Smoke = the smoke point in mm.
Molecular Weight
The Molecular Weight is calculated using Mass Blend.
MON Clear
The MON Clear is calculated using Volume Blend.
Naphthenes By Volume
The Naphthenes By Volume6 is calculated using Volume Blend.
Naphthenes By Weight
The Naphthenes By Weight6,16 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Ni Content
The Ni Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
A-28
Nitrogen Content
The Nitrogen Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
NOx (emission)
Emissions from NOx11 is calculated using the following
equations:
NOx B ( T1 – B1 ) ( T2 – B2 )
NOx = -------------- ( 0.738e + 0.262e ) (A.45)
6
10
where:
T 1 = 0.0018571 ( Oxy T ) + 0.0006921 ( Sulf T ) + 0.0090744 ( RVP T )

+ 0.000931 ( E200 T ) + 0.00846 ( E300 T ) + 0.0083632 ( Arom T )
–7 2 2
– 0.002774 ( Olef T ) – 6.63 × 10 ( Sulf T ) – 0.000119 ( Arom T )
2
+ 0.0003665 ( Olef T )
B 1 = 0.0018571 ( Oxy B ) + 0.0006921 ( Sulf B ) + 0.0090744 ( RVP B )

+ 0.000931 ( E200 B ) + 0.00846 ( E300 B ) + 0.0083632 ( Arom B )
–7 2 2
– 0.002774 ( Olef B ) – 6.63 × 10 ( Sulf B ) – 0.000119 ( Arom B )
2
+ 0.0003665 ( Olef B )
T 2 = 0.000252 ( Sulf T ) – 0.00913 ( Oxy T ) – 0.01397 ( RVP T )

+ 0.000931 ( E200 T ) – 0.00401 ( E300 T ) + 0.007097 ( Arom T )
–5 2 2
– 0.00276 ( Olef T ) – 7.995 × 10 ( Arom T ) + 0.0003665 ( Olef T )
B 2 = 0.000252 ( Sulf B ) – 0.00913 ( Oxy B ) – 0.01397 ( RVP B )

+ 0.000931 ( E200 B ) – 0.00401 ( E300 B ) + 0.007097 ( Arom B )
–5 2 2
– 0.00276 ( Olef B ) – 7.995 × 10 ( Arom B ) + 0.0003665 ( Olef B )
SulfT = Sulphur content, range 0 to 500

AromT = Aromatics content, range 0 to 50
OlefT = Olefins content, range 0 to 25
A-29
OxyT = Oxy mod × mass component × 100 (For ethanol Oxymod =

0.347, MTBE Oxymod = 0.187, ETBE Oxymod = 0.157,
and TAME Oxymod = 0.157)
RVPT = 8.7 for winter, RVP × 0.145 for summer
If you do not specify a Reid Vapor Pressure value, Aspen

HYSYS Petroleum Refining automatically use 8.7 (the Winter
value).
NOxB = 1540.0 for winter, 1340.0 for summer

RVPB = 8.7
OxyB = 0.0
E300B = 83.0
Olefins By Volume
The Olefins By Volume is calculated using Volume Blend.
Olefins By Weight
The Olefins By Weight3 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Paraffins By Volume
The Paraffins By Volume6 is calculated using Volume Blend.
Paraffins By Weight
The Paraffins By Weight3,16 is calculated using Mass Blend.
A-30
Polycyclic (toxic emission)

Toxic emissions from Polycyclic11 is calculated using the
Poly B T –B T –B
- ( 0.444e 1 1 + 0.556e 2 2 )
ToxEmi Poly = -------------- (A.46)
6
10
where:
T 1 = 0.0005219 ( Sulf T ) – 0.0003641 ( Oxy T ) + 0.0289749 ( RVP T )

2
+ 0.01447 ( E200 T ) + 0.0001072 ( E200 T ) – 0.068624 ( E300 T )
2
+ 0.0004087 ( E300 T ) + 0.0323712 ( Arom T ) – 0.002858 ( Olef T )
– 0.0003481 ( Arom T × E300 T )
B 1 = 0.0005219 ( Sulf B ) – 0.0003641 ( Oxy B ) + 0.0289749 ( RVP B )

2
– 0.01447 ( E200 B ) + 0.0001072 ( E200 B ) – 0.068624 ( E300 B )
2
+ 0.0004087 ( E300 B ) + 0.0323712 ( Arom B ) – 0.002858 ( Olef B )
– 0.0003481 ( Arom B × E300 B )
T 2 = 0.043295 ( RVP T ) – 0.003626 ( Oxy T ) – 0.000054 ( Sulf T )

– 0.013504 ( E200 T ) – 0.062327 ( E300 T ) + 0.0282042 ( Arom T )
2 2
– 0.002858 ( Olef T ) + 0.000106 ( E200 T ) + 0.000408 ( E300 T )
– 0.000287 ( Arom T × E300 T )
B 2 = 0.043295 ( RVP B ) – 0.003626 ( Oxy B ) – 0.000054 ( Sulf B )

– 0.013504 ( E200 B ) – 0.062327 ( E300 B ) + 0.0282042 ( Arom B )
2 2
– 0.002858 ( Olef B ) + 0.000106 ( E200 B ) + 0.000408 ( E300 B )
– 0.000287 ( Arom B × E300 B )

OxyT = ∑ 34.7 ( Mass of componenti )

i
A-31
PolyB = 4.5 for winter, 3.04 for summer
RVPB = 11.5 for winter, 8.7 for summer
E300B = 83.0
OxyB = 0.0
Pour Point
The Pour Point6,16 of a stream may be calculated using either of
two methods:
Method 1 (Default)
PPidx = Σ ( Vol i × ( exp ( 73.0883 + 12.885 × log ( PP i × 1.8 ) ) ) (A.47)
⎛ log PPidx – 73.0883⎞

-------------------------------------------------
⎝ 12.885 ⎠ (A.48)
PP = exp -------------------------------------------------------
1.8
where:
PPidx = Pour Point index
Voli = Volume Fraction of component i
PPi = Pour point of component i in K
PP = Pour point of component i in K
Method 2.
PPidx = Vol i × exp ( PP i × 0.03 ) (A.49)
( PPidx )-
PP = log
---------------------------- (A.50)
0.03
A-32
where:
PPi = Pour Point of component i in F
Voli = Volume Fraction of component i
PPidx = Pour point index
PP = Pour point of stream in F
Refractive Index
The Refractive Index13 is calculated using Volume Blend
Reid Vapor Pressure (RVP)

For Flash at 37.5°C, RVP is assumed to be the saturation
pressure.
RVP Blending1,3,8,14,15 is calculated using the following

equations:
pow ( ∑ V i × RVP i ,0.8 ) (A.51)

RVPB = ---------------------------------------------------------
0.145
RVPI i = pow ( [ RVP i × 0.145 ] ,1.25 ) (A.52)
where:
RVPi = RVP of individual components in kPa
RVPIi = RVP index of individual components in kPa
RVPBi = RVP of the blended component i
As a backup, RVP calculations reference the API 5B1.1 method
A-33
RON Clear
The RON Clear6 may be calculated using the following methods:
RON Clear: Indexing Method
RON - Index (RONidxi) is calculated from following equation:
RONidx i = a + b ( RON iC ) (A.53)
The values of parameters a, b and c are dependent upon the

value of RONi.
RONidx blends by volume and the RON of the blend are

calculated using the following reverse formula:
RON = exp (d,Log ( RONidx – e ) ÷ f) (A.54)
The values of parameters d, e and f are dependent upon the

value of RONidx.
where:
RONi = RON of component i
RONidxi = RON Index for component i

RON = RON of blend
RONidx = RON Index for blend
a, b, c, d, e and f = Parameters
RON Clear: see Volume Blend
RON Clear: see Healy Method for RON and MON.
RON Leaded
The RON Leaded is calculated using Volume Blend.
A-34
SG (60/60F)
The SG (60/60°F)7 is calculated using Volume Blend.
Smoke Point
The Smoke Point2 is calculated using the following blend index:i
1
SPidx = Σ ⎛ Vol i × ⎛ -------- ⎞ ⎞ (A.55)
⎝ ⎝ SP i ⎠ ⎠
1 - (A.56)
SP = --------------
SPidx
where:
SPi =Smoke Point of Component i
Voli =Liquid Volume Fraction of Component i
SPidx = Smoke Point Index of Stream
SP = Smoke Point of Stream
Standard Liquid Density

Standard Liquid Density is calculated using following equation:
moleFrac i × MW i (A.57)
SLD = Σ ( moleFrac i × MW i ) ÷ Σ ⎛ ---------------------------------------------⎞
⎝ Den i ⎠
where:
moleFraci = Mole Fraction of component i
A-35
MWi = Molecular Weight of component i
Deni = Density of component i in kg/m3
SLD = Standard liquid density of stream in kg/m3
Sulfur Content
Sulfur Content12 is calculated using Mass Blend.
Total Toxic Emission

Total toxic emission11 is calculated using the following equation:
ToxEmi Total = ToxEmi NonExBenz + ToxEmi Poly + ToxEmi But

(A.58)
+ ToxEmi Acet + ToxEmi Form + ToxEmi ExBenz
where:
ToxEmiNonExBenz = toxic emission from non-exhaust Benzene,

see Equation (A.22)
ToxEmiPoly = toxic emission from Polycyclic, see Equation

(A.46)
ToxEmiBut = toxic emission from Butadiene, see Equation

(A.23)
ToxEmiAcet = toxic emission from Acetaldehyde, see

Equation (A.20)
ToxEmiForm = toxic emission from Formaldehyde, see

Equation (A.43)
ToxEmiExBenz = toxic emission from exhaust Benzene, see

Equation (A.21)
Vanadium Content
Vanadium Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
A-36
Viscosity
Viscosity is calculated using standard HYSYS methods. (See The
Aspen HySYS Simulation Basis Reference Guide)
VOC (exhaust)
Exhaust from VOC11 is calculated using the following equations:
ExVOC B ( T 1 – B1 ) ( T 2 – B2 )
ExVOC = ---------------------- ( 0.444e + 0.556e ) (A.59)
6
10
where:
T 1 = 0.0005219 ( Sulf T ) – 0.0003641 ( Oxy T ) + 0.0289749 ( RVP T )

2
+ 0.01447 ( E200 T ) + 0.0001072 ( E200 T ) – 0.068624 ( E300 T )
2
+ 0.0004087 ( E300 T ) + 0.0323712 ( Arom T ) – 0.002858 ( Olef T )
– 0.0003481 ( Arom T × E300 T )
B 1 = 0.0005219 ( Sulf B ) – 0.0003641 ( Oxy B ) + 0.0289749 ( RVP B )

2
– 0.01447 ( E200 B ) + 0.0001072 ( E200 B ) – 0.068624 ( E300 B )
2
+ 0.0004087 ( E300 B ) + 0.0323712 ( Arom B ) – 0.002858 ( Olef B )
– 0.0003481 ( Arom B × E300 B )
T 2 = 0.043295 ( RVP T ) – 0.003626 ( Oxy T ) – 0.000054 ( Sulf T )

– 0.013504 ( E200 T ) – 0.062327 ( E300 T ) + 0.0282042 ( Arom T )
2 2
– 0.002858 ( Olef T ) + 0.000106 ( E200 T ) + 0.000408 ( E300 T )
– 0.000287 ( Arom T × E300 T )
B 2 = 0.043295 ( RVP B ) – 0.003626 ( Oxy B ) – 0.000054 ( Sulf b )

– 0.013504 ( E200 B ) – 0.062327 ( E300 B ) + 0.0282042 ( Arom B )
2 2
– 0.002858 ( Olef B ) + 0.000106 ( E200 B ) + 0.000408 ( E300 B )
– 0.000287 ( Arom B × E300 B )
SulfT = Sulphur content, range 0 to 500
AromT = Aromatics content, range 0 to 50

OlefT = Olefins content, range 0 to 25
A-37
OxyT = Oxy mod × mass component × 100 (For ethanol Oxymod =

0.347, MTBE Oxymod = 0.187, ETBE Oxymod = 0.157,
and TAME Oxymod = 0.157)
E200 T ≤ 65.52
E300 T ≤ 79.75 + 0.385 ( Arom T )
RVPT = 8.7 for winter, RVP × 0.145 for summer
If you do not specify a Reid Vapor Pressure value, Aspen

HYSYS Petroleum Refining automatically use 8.7 (the Winter
value).
ExVOCB = 1341.0 for winter, 907.0 for summer

RVPB = 8.7
OxyB = 0.0
E300B = 83.0
VOC (total non-exhaust)

Total non-exhaust from VOC11 is calculated using the following
equations:
NonExVOC total = VOC HotS + VOC Diu + VOC RunLos + VOC Reful (A.60)
where:
2
RVP 2 = ( RVP T )
A-38
Region 1:
0.031807 ( RVP 2 ) – 0.3568833 ( RVP T ) + 1.226859

NonExVOC total = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
[ 0.006654 ( RVP 2 ) – 0.08009 ( RVP T ) + 0.2846 ]

VOC HotS = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
[ 0.007385 ( RVP 2 ) – 0.08981 ( RVP T ) + 0.3158 ]

VOC Diu = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
[ 0.017768 ( RVP2 ) – 0.18746 ( RVP T ) + 0.6146 ]

VOC RunLos = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
[ 0.0004767 ( RVP T ) + 0.011859 ]

VOC Reful = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
Region 2:
0.027022 ( RVP 2 ) – 0.300753 ( RVP T ) + 1.063329

NonExVOC total = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
[ 0.006078 ( RVP 2 ) – 0.07474 ( RVP T ) + 0.27117 ]

VOC HotS = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
[ 0.004775 ( RVP 2 ) – 0.05872 ( RVP T ) + 0.21306 ]

VOC Diu = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
[ 0.016169 ( RVP2 ) – 0.17206 ( RVP T ) + 0.56724 ]

VOC RunLos = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
[ 0.004767 ( RVP T ) + 0.011859 ]

VOC Reful = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
1000
A-39
A-40 Comma Separated Value Files
VOC (total)
Total VOC11 is calculated using the following equations:
VOC total = ExVOC + NonExVOC total (for Summer)

(A.61)
= ExVOC (for Winter)
Wax Content
The Wax Content6 is calculated using Mass Blend.
A.4 Comma Separated

Value Files
Comma Separated Values (CSV) files are simple structured data
files. The files contain a table of components, and the
component’s molecular weight, normal boiling point, specific
gravity, and petroleum properties. The data in the file can be
accessed through Microsoft Excel application. Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining uses CSV files to contain petroleum
properties of individual assays.
A.4.1 Format of CSV Files

For Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining to properly read and
interpret the data in a CSV file, there are some simple format
rules that need to be followed. These include the correct format,
precise spelling of component names, and the required units for
the properties.
The following describes the general layout of a .csv file for an

assay:
The first three lines of csv assay file contain name and date
information related to the file. For example:
A-40
Name,Assay-4
Created,19/07/2007 10:59:07
Modified,19/07/2007 11:00:03
The fourth row defines the table heading. The first column has
the heading Cpt (Component), followed by the property names
listed in sequence, separated by commas.
The remaining rows contain the corresponding component

names and property values in sequence, separated by commas:
Methane,n1,n2,n3,n4,etc,etc.
The correct case and spelling of the properties are required for
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining to properly import the assay
values. Any change in spelling results in Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining reading the in properties as user properties,
and the property values will be displayed in the UserProp
column, instead of in the correct property name column. Below
are the proper designations for Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
properties:
Acidity, Aniline Point, Aromatics By Volume, Aromatics By
Weight, Asphaltene Content, Basic Nitrogen Content, Boiling
Temperature, C to H Ratio, C5 Mass, C5 Vol, Cloud Point,
Conradson Carbon Content, Copper Content, Copper/Iron
Content, Flash Point, Freeze Point, Mercaptan Sulfur
Content, Molecular Weight, MON (Clear), MON (Leaded),
Naphthenes By Volume, Naphthenes By Weight, Nickel
Content, Nitrogen Content, Olefins By Volume, Olefins By
Weight, Paraffins By Volume, Paraffins By Weight, Pour Point,
Refractive Index, Reid Vapour Pressure, RON (Clear), RON
(Leaded), Smoke Point, Sodium Content, Standard Liquid
Density, Sulfur Content, True Vapour Pressure, Vanadium
Content, Wax Content, Viscosity @ 50C, Benzene Content By
Volume, Benzene Content By Weight, Toluene Content By
Weight, Toluene Content By Volume, Isoparaffin By Weight
and Isoparaffin By Volume.
A-41
A-42 Comma Separated Value Files
Property Units in CSV Files

The table below displays some of the properties in the Comma
Separated Valued (CSV) file and their corresponding units:
Property Unit
Acidity Wt/Wt
Aniline Point Kelvin
Aromatics by Volume Vol %
Aromatics by Weight Weight %
Asphaltene Content Weight %
Boiling Temperature Kelvin
C to H Ratio No Units
Centroid Boiling Temperature Kelvin
Cloud Point Kelvin
Composition Mole Fraction
Conradson Carbon Content Weight %
Copper Content ppmWt
Copper/Iron Content ppmWt
Flash Point Kelvin
Freeze Point Kelvin
Iron Content ppmWt
IsoParaffins by Volume Volume %
Luminometer Number No Units
Mercaptan Sulfur Content Weight %
Molecular Weight No Units
MON (Clear) No Units. Octane Number
MON (Leaded) No Units
Naphthenes by Volume Volume %
Naphthenes by Weight Weight %
Nickel Content ppmWt
Nitrogen Content ppmWt
Olefins by Volume Volume %
Olefins by Weight Weight %
Paraffins by Volume Volume %
Paraffins by Weight Weight %
Pour Point Kelvin
Refractive Index No Units
Reid Vapor Pressure Kilo Pascal (kPa)
RON (Clear) No Units
RON (Leaded) No Units
A-42
Property Unit
Smoke Point Millimeters
Sodium Content Weight %
Standard Liquid Density Kg/m3
Sulfur Content Weight %
True Vapor Pressure Kilo Pascal (kPa)
Vanadium Content ppmWt
Viscosity @ 100°C CentiStokes (cSt)
Viscosity @ 50°C CentiStokes (cSt)
Wax Content Weight %
You must use the correct/required units while specifying the

property values in the CSV file for Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining to interpret the values correctly.

information from the CSV file:
• List of components.
• Three critical physical properties: molecular weight,
centroid boiling point, and specific gravity. The rest of the
physical properties are calculated based on the three
critical properties.
• All petroleum properties.
A-43
A-44 Petroleum Assay XML Files
A.5 Petroleum Assay XML

Files
The following figure displays the structure of an XML file
containing petroleum assay data.
Figure A.2
The XML file can contain the exact same information as the CSV
file. The XML file contains the name of the petroleum assay,
description, created date, last modified date, a list of
components available, and the molecular weight, normal boiling
point, specific gravity, and petroleum properties of each
component.

information from the XML file:
A-44

If the petroleum assay data file contains petroleum

properties outside Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
petroleum property list, Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
imports the data from the non-default petroleum properties
and designate the non-default petroleum properties as
UserProp-n, where n is an integer value.
If the petroleum assay data file does not have values for a
petroleum property, Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining leaves
the petroleum property blank.
The difference is the data provided by the XML file is stored into
branches of a tree browser. There are four levels or branches in
a typical petroleum assay XML file.
• File version
• File type
• Crude and component information
• Individual component properties
The information in the XML file is presented in three colors:

• Blue indicates the code used by the XML.
• Red indicates the displayed variables.
• Black indicates the value that can be modified.
A-45
A.5.1 File Versions

The first level branch of the petroleum assay XML file displays
the file version, as shown in the figure below.
Figure A.3
You have to click the Plus icon to expand the Version branch
to view the second level branch.
A.5.2 File Types

The second level branch of the petroleum assay XML file displays
the file type, that indicates whether the file was created,
exported, imported, and so on.
Figure A.4
You have to click the Plus icon to expand the Type branch to
view the third level branch.
A-46
A.5.3 Crude and Component

Information
The third level branch of the petroleum assay XML file displays
the following:
• Name of the petroleum assay
• Description of the petroleum assay
• Date of when the petroleum assay was created
• Date of when the petroleum assay was last modified
• List of components in the petroleum assay
Figure A.5
You have to click the Plus icon to expand the Crude and
Component branch to view the information in each branch.
In the Component branch, each individual component has a

Y or N value for the active state.
• The Y indicates the component is being used in the
petroleum assay.
• The N indicates the component is not being used in
the petroleum assay.
A-47
In the Component branch, the list of components are split into

two types:
• Library components. These are the standard and default
components provided by Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining. Each library component branch contains the
name of the component and indicator on active state.
• Hypothetical components. These are the non-standard
crude oil components. Each hypothetical component
branch contains the name of the component, indicator on
active state, indicator on the component type (in other
words, is it a hypocomponent? Yes or No), final boiling
point temperature (in Kelvin), and initial boiling point
temperature.
A.5.4 Individual Component

Information
The forth level branch displays all the physical and petroleum
properties of each individual component.
Figure A.6
A-48
You have to click the Plus icon to expand the Individual

Component branch to view the property information in each
branch.
Each Property branch contains the name of the property and

the property may or may not have a value. You can specify or
modify the value of a property by clicking in between the two
quotation marks and typing in the new value.
A.6 PET Files

The HYSYS petroleum assay file (*.pet) contains the same
information as the CSV or XML file, in addition the *.pet file also
contains information about the fluid packages, reactions, and
component maps associated to the petroleum assay.
In other words, the .pet file contains all the information located
in the Simulation Basis Manager view.
Figure A.7
Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining imports all the following

information from the PET file:
A-49
A-50 PET Files
HYSYS User Property Aliases for

Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
When you import a HYSYS assay into Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining, the user properties defined in the HYSYS oil
environment should be transferred to their corresponding Aspen
HYSYS Petroleum Refining properties. However, because HYSYS
names are limited to 12 characters, they will frequently not
match their corresponding Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
names, which may be longer.
As a workaround for this, Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining is set

up to recognize certain under-12 character property names from
HYSYS, and to pass their values to the correct Aspen HYSYS
Petroleum Refining property names.
After the HYSYS assay import, you should rename the HYSYS
user properties using the aliases shown below, so their values
will be applied to their associated Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining properties. The table lists the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum
Refining user property names on the left, and the associated
aliases on the right.
When the HYSYS user property is renamed using the alias, and
the assay is recalculated, the imported HYSYS properties are
applied to the correct Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining property
names.
Target Aspen HYSYS

Petroleum Refining Use this HYSYS Alias
Property
Acidity Acidity W
Aniline Point Aniline Pt
Assay - Aromatics Vol Pct Aromatics V
Assay - Aromatics Wt Pct Aromatics W
Asphaltene Content Asphaltene
Basic Nitrogen Content Basic N2
C to H Ratio C/H Ratio
Cloud Point Cloud Pt
A-50
Target Aspen HYSYS

Petroleum Refining Use this HYSYS Alias
Property
Conradson Carbon Content Conradson C
Copper Content Copper
Cetane Number Cetane No
Flash Point Flash Pt
Freeze Point Freeze Pt
MON (Clear) MON-Clear
MON (Leaded) MON-Leaded
Assay - Naphthenes Vol Pct Naphthene V
Assay - Naphthenes Wt Pct Naphthene W
Nickel Content Nickel
Nitrogen Content Nitrogen
Assay - Olefins Vol Pct Olefins V
Assay - Olefins Wt Pct Olefins W
Assay - Paraffins Vol Pct Paraffins V
Assay - Paraffins Wt Pct Paraffins W
Pour Point Pour Pt
Refractive Index Ref Idx
Reid Vapour Pressure RVP
RON (Clear) RON-Clear
RON (Leaded) RON-Leaded
Smoke Point Smoke Point
Sulfur Content Sulfur
Mercaptan Sulfur Content Mercaptan S
Sodium Content Na
True Vapour Pressure TVP
Vanadium Content Vanadium
Iron Content Iron
Luminometer Number Lumino No
C5 Mass C5 W
C5 Vol C5 V
Viscosity @ 38C Visc @ 38C
Wax Content Wax
A-51
A-52 Spiral Files
A.7 Spiral Files

The Spiral file contains the exact same information as the CSV
and XML file. The only difference is that the format and layout of
the information is structured so the information can be read by
the Crude Manager software. Refer to the Crude Manager help
system for more information.

information from the Spiral file:
A.8 References
1
“31.0 API Iranian Heavy Crude Oil”, Chevron Oil Trading Company,
1971.
2
Albahri, T.A., Riazi, M.R., and Algattan, A.A., 2003, “Analysis of
Quality of Petroleum Fuels”, Energy & Fuels, Vol. 17, No. 3, pp.
689-693.
3
Aspen Physical Property System 12.1 Physical Property Data,
AspenTech Support, Aspen Technology Inc., viewed: 21 April 2006,
http://support.aspentech.com/CustomerSupport/Documents/
Engineering/AES%2012.1%20Product%20Documentation/
AprSystem%2012.1/
APRSYS%20121%20Physical%20Property%20Data.pdf
4
Auckland, M.H.T., and Charnock, D.J., “The Development of Linear
Blending Indices for Petroleum Properties”, J. Institute Petroleum,
Vol. 55, No. 545 (September 1969), pp. 322-329.
5
Baird, Cud Thomas IV, 1989, Guide to Petroleum Product Blending,
HPI Consultants Inc., Texas.
6
Crude Name: Sample Assay PTI Assay IF: SMP.01.2002, 2003,
Specializing In Crude Assay Information, PetroTech intel, viewed:
21 April 2006, http://www.petrotechintel.com/pti.data/
components/std_assay.pdf
A-52
7
DIADEM 2004, version 2.3.0, DIPPR Information and Data Evaluation
Manager for the Design Institute for Physical Properties, BYU DIPPR
Lab, e-mail: dippr@byu.edu.
8
Fasullo, P.A., “Rvp Reductions Would Harm U.S. Gas-Processing
Industry”, Oil Gas Journal, Vol. 86, No. 5 (February 1, 1988), pp.
51-56.
9
Healy, W.C., Maassen, C.W., and Peterson, R.T., “A New Approach to
Blending Octanes”. API Midyear Meeting, Division of Refining, New
York (May 27, 1959).
10
Hu, J., and Burns, A.B., “New Method Predicts Cloud, Pour, Flash
Points of Distillate Blends”, Hydrocarbon Processing, Vol. 49, No. 11
(November 1970), pp. 213-216.
11Regulation
of Fuels and Fuel Additives, 2001 CFR Title 29, Volume 8,
National Archives and Records Administration, Code of Federal
Regulations,viewed: 21 April 2006, http://www.access.gpo.gov/
nara/cfr/waisidx_01/40cfr80_o1.html
12
Riazi, M.R., Nasimi, N., and Roomi, Y.A., 1999, “Estimation of Sulfur
Content of Petroleum Products and Crude Oils”, Ind. Eng. Chem.
Res., Vol. 38, no. 11, pp. 4507-4512
13Riazi,
Mohammad R., and Roomi, Yousef A., 2001, “Use of Refractive
Index in the Estimation of Thermophysical Properties of
Hydrocarbons and Petroleum Mixtures:, Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., Vol.
40, No. 8, pp. 1975-1984
14Stewart,
W.E., “More About Figuring RVP of Blends”, Petroleum
Refiner, Vol. 40, No. 10 (October 1960), p. 109.
15
Stewart, W. E., “Predict RVP of Blends Accurately”, Petroleum Refiner,
Vol. 38, No. 6 (June 1959), p. 231.
16
Strategic Petroleum Reserve Crude Oil Assay Manual, 2nd ed.,
Strategic Petroleum Reserve Crude Oil Assays, U.S. Department of
Energy, Assistant Secretary for Fossil Energy Strategic Petroleum
Reserve Headquarters, viewed: 21 April 2006, http://
www.spr.doe.gov/reports/docs/crudeoilassaymanual.pdf
17
Technical Data Book: Petroleum Refining, American Petroleum
Institute, Vol 1 - III, May 1985.
18
R.O.Wickey, D.H. Chittenden, Hydrocarbon Processing, 42, 6, 1963,
157-158.
A-53
A-54 References
A-54
Index
A feed blend results 4-115
feed condition 4-96
assay curves 6-47
feed data 4-94
feed properties 4-95
add 3-3
feed type 4-94
assay tab 3-6
heater temperatures 4-106
change props page 3-7
initial parameter value 4-107
composition page 3-9
manage data set 4-87, 4-91
connections page 3-4
objective function 4-108
create 3-3
operation measurement 4-103
design tab 3-4
operation variables 4-95
notes page 3-5
overall results 4-121
options page 3-6
parameter 4-107
parameters page 3-5
pinning percent 4-104
property view 3-3
product property results 4-110
shift props page 3-8
product yield results 4-116
user variables page 3-5
property view 4-86
worksheet tab 3-10
reactor control 4-97
B reactor geometry 4-93
reactor pressure 4-105
Blend reactor results 4-117
centroid boiling point A-3 recontactor 4-98
heat of formation A-4 recontactor results 4-119
liquid density A-4 results 4-109
molecular weight A-3 run 4-87
physical properties A-2 select data set 4-88
specific gravity A-4 sigma values 4-108
Blending Macros 2-18 solver commands 4-102
Blending Rules 2-6 solver console 4-102
user define 2-17 solver options 4-101
Blends solver scripts 4-102
Healy method A-8 summary results 4-120
mass A-6 validation wizard 4-89
mole A-6 Calibration Set Library
MON A-8 add set 4-82, 5-64
RON A-8 clone set 4-82, 5-64
volume A-7 delete set 4-82, 5-64
C edit set 4-81, 5-63
export set 4-82, 5-64
Calibration import set 4-82, 5-64
advanced options 4-102 property view 4-81, 5-63
catalyst 4-98 Catalytic Reformer 4-3
catalyst results 4-118 add 4-19
catalyst weight 4-104 advanced options 4-43
coke laydown 4-104 calibration 4-23, 4-86
configure reactor 4-92 calibration environment 4-23
control variables 4-107 calibration factor set 4-81
data set 4-87 calibration factors page 4-31
design reactor 4-91 calibration run 4-23, 4-87
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com I-1

I-2
catalyst 4-36 solver options 4-40

catalyst activity model 4-13 solver scripts 4-42
catalyst results 4-54 summary results 4-47
catalytic reformer environment 4-21 system pressure control 4-14
coke make model 4-11 template 4-18
components 4-6 theory 4-6
configure reactor 4-59 zone pressure 4-45
connections page 4-30 Characterized GC Data Results
create 4-19 property view 2-40
deactivate catalyst 4-9 Comma Separated Value File See CSV File
delete 4-20 component level
design 4-30 Aniline Point A-9
environments 4-16 aromatics A-9
export calibration factors to file 4-111 asphaltene A-9
factor set 4-82 basic nitrogen A-9
feed 4-33 C to H ratio A-9
feed blend results 4-48 Cloud Point A-10
feed characterization 4-4 Conradson carbon A-10
feed type library 4-56 copper A-10
feed type property view 4-80 Cu/Fe A-10
fractionator 4-44 Flash Point A-11
fractionator specs 4-45 Freeze Point A-11
main environment 4-17 molecular weight A-11
modify calibration factor set 4-112 MON Clear A-12
notes page 4-32 naphthenes A-12
product property results 4-52 Ni A-12
product yield results 4-49 Nitrogen A-12
property view 4-29 olefins A-12
push calibration factors to simulation 4- paraffins A-12–A-13
111 Pour Point A-13
reaction expressions 4-9 refractive index A-13
reaction paths 4-7 Reid Vapor Pressure A-14
reactor control 4-34 RON Clear A-14
reactor design 4-59 RON Leaded A-14
reactor feed 4-61 rvp A-14
reactor feed condition 4-65 sg A-15
reactor feed properties 4-63 Smoke Point A-15
reactor feed type 4-62 specific gravity A-15
reactor geometry 4-60 sulfur A-15
reactor operation 4-64 vanadium A-15
reactor results 4-53 viscosity A-15
reactor section 4-33, 4-58 wax content A-16
reactor temperature control 4-15 CSV File A-41
recontactor 4-38 format A-41
recontactor results 4-54 layout A-41
reformer configuration wizard 4-24 property units A-43
results 4-47
D
solve commands 4-42
solver console 4-42 Data Control

I-3
property view 6-48 catalyst deactivation page 5-55

Data Set Manager configuration page 5-49
add data set 4-91 design tab 5-49
clone data set 4-91 feed blend page 5-59
delete data set 4-91 feed data tab 5-51
property view 4-87, 4-91 feeds page 5-54
rename data set 4-91 geometry page 5-50
Delta Base Utility 10-3 hydrogen balance page 5-62
add 10-3 hydrogen system page 5-61
create 10-3 library page 5-51
data layout in HYSYS format 10-11 notes page 5-50
data layout in PIMS format 10-6 operation tab 5-53
delete 10-4 product properties page 5-60
dependent variables 10-10, 10-15 product yields page 5-60
derivative analysis tab 10-6 properties page 5-52
derivative equations 10-22 property view 5-48
derivative values 10-20 reactor page 5-61
edit 10-4 recycle gas loop page 5-55
export derivatives 10-23 results tab 5-59
independent variables 10-8, 10-12 solver console page 5-58
property view 10-5 solver options page 5-56
proxy variables 10-9, 10-13 specifications page 5-54
scope objects 10-19 Hydrocracker 5-3
select variable 10-16 add 5-19
target objects 10-18 calibration factor set 5-22
variables tab 10-11 Calibration Set Library 5-63
catalyst deactivation page 5-35
E
components 5-6
Edit Bulk Properties connections page 5-29
property view 2-23 create 5-19
Edit Property Distribution Parameters deactivation of catalyst 5-16
property view 2-39 delete 5-20
Editing Properties design tab 5-29
property view 2-24 environments 5-17
Factor Set 5-64
F feed blend page 5-41
Factor Set feed characterization 5-3
fractionator page 5-66 feed page 5-32
property view 4-82, 5-64 feed type library 5-46
reactor page 5-66 fractionator page 5-45
Flowsheet Menu fractionator tab 5-39
notes manager 1-9 HCR configuration wizard 5-23
HCR environment 5-21
H HCR reactor section 5-48
HCR Configuration Wizard 5-23 hydrogen balance page 5-46
calibration factors 5-27 hydrogen system page 5-44
configuration 5-24 main environment 5-18
geometry 5-26 notes page 5-31
HCR Reactor Section product properties page 5-43

I-4
product yields page 5-42 Petroleum Assay

property view 5-20, 5-28 add 2-7
reaction kinetic expression 5-14 analysis tab 2-41
reaction kinetics 5-6 blending rules 2-17
reaction paths 5-11 centroid point 2-4
reactor page 5-44 composition 2-26
reactor section tab 5-31 copy 2-8
reactor temperature control 5-16 create 2-7
recycle gas loop page 5-34 delete 2-8
Results 5-67 edit 2-7
results tab 5-41 edit properties 2-24
solver console page 5-38 estimation tab 2-42
solver options page 5-36 export 2-15
specification page 5-34 gas chromatography 2-34
specs page 5-39 GC data results 2-40
system pressure control 5-16 gc data tab 2-34
template 5-18 import 2-9
tuning factors page 5-30 Haverly H/CAMS 2-13
zone pressures page 5-39 PIMS 2-11
import HYSYS assays 2-27
I
information tab 2-22
Input Experts 6-13 notes tab 2-44
connections page 6-13 plots tab 2-44
side stripper page 6-14 PONA tree diagram 2-36
specs page 6-19 property view 2-20
zone page 6-18 remove 2-8
Input Stream Base Yield summary information 2-22
property view 8-11 view 2-7
Petroleum Assay Manager
N property view 2-5
Notes Petroleum Assay Utility 10-23
add 1-8 add 10-24
Notes Manager 1-9 boiling curves page 10-28
add 1-9 connections page 10-26
edit 1-9 create 10-24
search 1-10 delete 10-25
view 1-9 design tab 10-25
Notes page 1-7 dynamics tab 10-30
Notes tab 1-7 edit 10-25
plots page 10-29
O properties page 10-29
Optimization Object results tab 10-28
property view 9-26 Petroleum Assays 2-2
csv file 2-10, 2-16
P PET file 2-9
PET file A-50 pet file 2-16
Petroelum Assay Composition Spiral file 2-16
property view 2-26 xml file 2-10, 2-16
Petroleum Assays Utility

I-5
notes page 10-27 tbp cut points 6-9

Petroleum Column 6-2 theory 6-4
add 6-12 trace level 6-35
auto reset 6-36 two liquids check 6-36
calibration tab 6-53 volume interchange curve 6-50
column profiles page 6-39 water handling 6-7
condenser handling 6-7 water tolerance 6-36
configuration 6-22 worksheet tab 6-37
connections page 6-22 zone page 6-24
conventions 6-3 zone-by-zone method 6-4
convergence 6-21 Petroleum Distillation Column 6-2
convergence results 6-37 property view 6-20
create 6-12 Petroleum Feeder 7-2
cumulative plots 6-51 add 7-2
design tab 6-22 connections page 7-4
energy balance page 6-41 connections tab 7-4
energy page 6-56 notes page 7-4
equilibrium error 6-33 parameters page 7-5
equilibrium tolerance 6-33 parameters tab 7-5
feed page 6-54 property view 7-2
feed-propducts page 6-40 user variables tab 7-6
heat and spec error 6-34 worksheet tab 7-6
heat tolerance 6-33 Petroleum Properties A-5
incremental plots 6-52 component level A-5, A-9
initialize ideal K 6-35 Healy method A-8
installation 6-12 mass blend A-6
maximum iteration 6-33 mole blend A-6
notes page 6-37 MON blend A-8
performance tab 6-37 RON blend A-8
plots 6-42 stream level A-5, A-16
plots page 6-42 volume blend A-7
plotted results page 6-58 Petroleum Yield Shift Reactor 8-2
products page 6-55 assay properties page 8-13
property view 6-20 base shift page 8-12, 8-14
run / reset buttons 6-21 base yield page 8-9
save for initial estimate 6-34 conditions page 8-9
side draws page 6-29 connections page 8-5
side stripper page 6-26 design tab 8-4
solver options 6-32 indep variables page 8-7
solveropts page 6-32 notes page 8-8
spec tolerance 6-33 product flow tab 8-8
specifications 6-30 product properties tab 8-13
specs page 6-30 properties page 8-15
stage-by-stage method 6-8 property view 8-3
stream detail 6-40 reactor params page 8-6
stream summary 6-38 tbp curves page 8-16
summary page 6-38 theory 8-2
super critical handling model 6-34 user variables page 8-8
tabular results page 6-57 worksheet tab 8-17

I-6
Prediction variables configuration page 9-12

advanced options 4-102 variables inputs page 9-13
catalyst 4-98 variables results page 9-15
catalyst weight 4-104 worksheet tab 9-26
coke laydown 4-104
R
configure reactor 4-92
design reactor 4-91 Reactor Section
feed condition 4-96 advanced options 4-72
feed data 4-94 catalyst 4-67
feed properties 4-95 catalyst results 4-78
feed type 4-94 configuration 4-59
heater temperatures 4-106 control 4-66
operation measurement 4-103 design 4-59
operation variables 4-95 feed blend 4-74
pinning percent 4-104 feed condition 4-65
reactor control 4-97 feed data 4-61
reactor geometry 4-93 feed properties 4-63
reactor pressure 4-105 feed type 4-62
recontactor 4-98 geometry 4-60
solver commands 4-102 notes page 4-61
solver console 4-102 operation 4-64
solver options 4-101 product properties 4-76
solver scripts 4-102 product yields 4-75
Product Blender 9-2 property view 4-58
add 9-5 reactor results 4-77
automatic pressure assignment 9-9 recontactor 4-68
connections page 9-7 recontactor results 4-78
connections tab 9-7 results 4-73
constraints configuration page 9-17 solver commands 4-71
constraints inputs page 9-18 solver console 4-71
constraints results page 9-20 solver options 4-70
create 9-5 solver scripts 4-71
inlet flow ratios 9-8 summary results 4-73
notes page 9-7 Refinery Column Input Experts 6-13
objectives page 9-22 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining
optimization calculation mode 9-3 common property views 1-5
optimization tab 9-10 utilities 10-2
optimizer configuration page 9-23 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Object
optimizer results page 9-25 Palette 1-6
parameters page 9-8 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Options 1-2
parameters tab 9-8 Results
pressure 9-9 feed blend page 5-67
property view 9-5 hydrogen balance page 5-70
simulation calculation 9-8 hydrogen system page 5-70
simulation calculation mode 9-3 product properties page 5-69
switching between simulation and product yields page 5-68
optimization 9-4 property view 5-67
theory 9-3 reactor page 5-69
user variables tab 9-26

I-7
S sg A-36
Smoke Point A-36
Select Feed Location
specific gravity A-36
property view 5-33
Standard Liquid Density A-36
Select Variable
sulfur A-37
property view 10-16
total toxic emission A-37
using 10-17
vanadium A-37
Side Stripper
viscosity A-38
property view 6-27
VOC exhaust A-38
Spiral file A-52
VOC total A-40
stream level
VOC total non-exhaust A-39
acetaldehyde toxic emission A-16
wax content A-41
Aniline Point A-17
Swing Cut Utility 10-32
aromatics A-17
add 10-32
asphaltene A-17
assay table tab 10-37
basic nitrogen A-17
create 10-32
benzene toxic emission A-19
delete 10-33
benzene toxic exhaust emission A-18
edit 10-33
butadiene toxic emission A-20
export assay properties 10-33
C to H ratio A-21
light ends tab 10-36
Cetane Index 4737 A-21
pims formate tab 10-39
Cetane index 967 A-21
property calculation 10-38
Cetane Number A-22
select assay property 10-38
Cloud Point A-22
specification tab 10-34
Conradson carbon A-23
copper A-23 T
Cu/Fe A-23
Target Objects
DON(Clear) A-24
property view 10-18
Driveability Index A-24
scoping 10-19
Flash Point A-24
TBP Cut Points 6-9
formaldehyde toxic emission A-27
Tray Section Details
Freeze Point A-26
property view 6-24
Hydrogen combustion A-28
Luminometer Number A-28 U
molecular weight A-28
MON Clear A-28 User Variable
naphthenes A-29 add 1-12
Ni A-29 User Variables page 1-10
nitrogen A-29 User Variables tab 1-10
NOx emission A-29 utility
olefins A-30–A-31 delta base 10-3
paraffins A-31 petroleum assay 10-23
polycyclic toxic emission A-31 swing cut 10-32
Pour Point A-32 W
refractive index A-33
Reid Vapor Pressure A-34 Worksheet tab 1-6
RON Clear A-35 X
RON Leaded A-36
rvp A-34 XML file A-45

I-8
component A-48
crude A-48
first branch A-47
forth branch A-49
individual component A-49
second branch A-47
third branch A-48
type A-47
version A-47


Aspen HYSYS Refining V7 0 Ops PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aspen HYSYS Refining V7 0 Ops PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aspen HYSYS

Unit Operations Guide

Aspen Technology, Inc.

1.2 Common Property Views ................................................................ 5

1.1 Introduction to Aspen

In order to run Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining features,

Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining is based on a flexible structure

At the Simulation Environment, each stream may have its own

rules. When process streams are mixed together on any HYSYS

The various components that comprise HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS

Any results, including passing partial information when a

The multi-flowsheet architecture of HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS

smaller components, you can easily isolate any aspect for

The design of the HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining

The inherent flexibility of HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS Petroleum

Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining also offers an assortment of

All standard HYSYS unit operations are explained in the HYSYS

Included in the available operations are those which are

logical operations like the Adjust, Set, and Recycle. A number of

In modelling operations, HYSYS/Aspen HYSYS Petroleum

For instance, consider the Pump operation. If you provide a

All information concerning a unit operation can be found on the

1.2 Common Property

1.2.1 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum

To access the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining object palette do

Refining object palette 1.2.2 Worksheet Tab

The Properties page displays the property correlations of the

• Vapour / Phase Fraction • Vap. Frac. (molar basis)

• Mass Entropy • Act. Liq. Flow

The Heat of Vapourisation for a stream in HYSYS is defined

The PF Specs page contains a summary of the stream property

The PF Specs page is relevant to dynamics cases only.

1.2.3 Notes Page/Tab

Object Icon Description

3. Click in the large text field and type your comments.

The information you enter in the Notes tab or page of any

To access the Notes Manager do one of the following:

Click the Plus

1.2.4 User Variables Page/Tab

The following table outlines options in the user variables

Object Icon Function

Add a User Variable

Select the data

Allows you to add

2.2 Petroleum Assay Manager Property View....................................... 5

2.3 The Petroleum Assay Property View ............................................ 20

2.4 Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining Unit Tags................................. 46

• A continues mixture of many naturally occurring

• Heavy fractions that are not mixtures of discretely

A proper description of the physical properties of the plus-

Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining contains a data base that you

A petroleum assay is a vector that stores physical properties and

A component list typically consists of library components (for

The assay properties are usually imported from an assay

If you do not have the Aspen HYSYS Petroleum Refining

You can create a petroleum assay using the options in the

Oil Manager Petroleum Assay Manager

2.1.1 Centroid Point

The final boiling point temperature is assigned as the

4. Step #2 and #3 are repeated to generate the boiling point

2.2 Petroleum Assay

The Petroleum Assay Manager property view enables you to

To access the Petroleum Assay Manager property view: